Notes - Proe Drawing & Sketcher

- For University Use Only -
Commercial Use Prohibited
Table of Contents
Fundamentals of Drawing
INTRODUCTION 1-1
PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER......................................................... 1-2
Using Drawing Templates..................................................................................................1-2
Using Configuration Files ..................................................................................................1-3
Files Automatically Loaded by the System ........................................................................1-6
Editing the Configuration File During a Pro/ENGINEER Session ....................................1-6
Using Drawing Setup Files.................................................................................................1-7
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................... 1-9
EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing .............................................................................1-9
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 1-13
CREATING VIEWS 2-1

VIEW CREATION ............................................................................................................ 2-2
Creating Different View Types ..........................................................................................2-2
Controlling the View Display.............................................................................................2-5
Adding Cross-Sections .......................................................................................................2-6
Specifying the View Scale..................................................................................................2-8
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS................................................................................ 2-8
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................ 2-9
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 2-13
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing of the Plunger ...........................................................2-13
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Drawing of the Barrel .............................................................2-22
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 2-28
ASSEMBLY AND MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS 3-1

ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS ................................................................................................ 3-2
Adding Exploded Views.....................................................................................................3-2
MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS ......................................................................................... 3-2
Adding the Model to the Drawing......................................................................................3-3
EXERCISE 1: Displaying Multiple Models in a Drawing .................................................3-5
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 3-12
MODIFYING VIEWS 4-1
MANIPULATING VIEWS ................................................................................................4-2
Changing View Location, Orientation, and Origin ............................................................ 4-2
Controlling Hidden Line Display....................................................................................... 4-4
Removing Views from a Drawing ..................................................................................... 4-4
Modifying the View Scale ................................................................................................. 4-5
Modifying View Boundaries and Callouts......................................................................... 4-5
Changing a Cross-Section .................................................................................................. 4-7
Altering Assembly Views .................................................................................................. 4-8
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ..............................................................................4-12
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS...............................................................................4-13
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ........................................................................................4-16
EXERCISE 1: Manipulating Views................................................................................. 4-17
EXERCISE 2: Altering the Display of Views.................................................................. 4-24
EXERCISE 3: Modifying the Scale of Views.................................................................. 4-27
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................4-35
SHOWING DIMENSIONS 5-1

DRAWING DETAILS .......................................................................................................5-2
Showing Detail Items......................................................................................................... 5-2
Manipulating Detail Items ................................................................................................. 5-4
Changing the Display of Dimensions in a Drawing........................................................... 5-5
Hole Charts ........................................................................................................................ 5-9
EXERCISE 1: Showing Dimensions on a Drawing......................................................... 5-12
EXERCISE 2: Showing Dimensions in Symbolic Form ................................................. 5-23
EXERCISE 3: Displaying Dual Dimensions ................................................................... 5-28
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................5-32
CREATING DIMENSIONS 6-1

ADDING DIMENSIONS TO A DRAWING.....................................................................6-2
Creating Driven Dimensions.............................................................................................. 6-2
Creating Reference Dimensions......................................................................................... 6-3
Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme................................................................................ 6-3
Creating Draft Dimensions ................................................................................................ 6-3
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................6-4
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..........................................................................................6-6
EXERCISE 1: Creating Dimensions on a Drawing ........................................................... 6-7
EXERCISE 2: Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme ..................................................... 6-12
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................6-15
CREATING NOTES 7-1
ADDING NOTES TO A DRAWING................................................................................ 7-2
Specifying the Content of a Note .......................................................................................7-2
Drawing Labels ..................................................................................................................7-2
User-Defined Symbols .......................................................................................................7-3
Manipulating Notes ............................................................................................................7-3
Creating Style Libraries......................................................................................................7-7
EXERCISE 1: Creating Notes on a Drawing ...................................................................7-10
EXERCISE 2: Creating Parametric Notes........................................................................7-16
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 7-18
TOLERANCES ON DRAWINGS 8-1

LINEAR TOLERANCES .................................................................................................. 8-2
Showing Linear Tolerances................................................................................................8-2
Changing Linear Tolerances...............................................................................................8-3
GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES.......................................................................................... 8-3
Creating a Geometric Tolerance.........................................................................................8-3
Geometric Tolerances in Assembly Drawings ...................................................................8-6
Modifying a Geometric Tolerance .....................................................................................8-6
Drawing Setup File Options ...............................................................................................8-8
EXERCISE 1: Using Linear and Geometric Tolerances ....................................................8-9
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 8-16
DRAWING STANDARDS 9-1

SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING STANDARDS............................................................ 9-2
Setting Up Your Configuration File ...................................................................................9-2
Setting Up Your Drawing Setup File .................................................................................9-2
CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES ........................................................................... 9-8
Model Requirements ..........................................................................................................9-9
Template View Definition ..................................................................................................9-9
Dimension and Balloon Priority .......................................................................................9-11
View Symbol....................................................................................................................9-11
EXERCISE 1: Setting Drawing Standards through the Drawing Setup File ................... 9-12
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Drawing Template .................................................................. 9-16
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................9-19
DRAWING TABLES 10-1

PURPOSE OF DRAWING TABLES ..............................................................................10-2
Creating a Drawing Table ................................................................................................ 10-2
Manipulating a Drawing Table ........................................................................................ 10-3
Adding Text to the Cells .................................................................................................. 10-5
Repositioning Drawing Tables......................................................................................... 10-6
EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Drawing Table ............................................... 10-7
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................10-14
COSMETIC FEATURES 11-1

COSMETIC SKETCHES .................................................................................................11-2
Working with Regular Sections ....................................................................................... 11-2
Working with Projected Sections..................................................................................... 11-2
Showing Cosmetic Sketches on a Drawing...................................................................... 11-3
COSMETIC THREADS...................................................................................................11-3
Creating Cosmetic Threads.............................................................................................. 11-3
Creating Cosmetic Threads using Standard Hole............................................................. 11-7
USER-DEFINED FEATURES.........................................................................................11-8
Creating a UDF ................................................................................................................ 11-8
Placing a UDF................................................................................................................ 11-11
Summary of Technique for Creating Cosmetic Threads................................................ 11-13
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................11-14
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cosmetic Sketch ................................................................... 11-14
EXERCISE 2: Creating Cosmetic Threads.................................................................... 11-17
EXERCISE 3: Cosmetic Threads Using Standard Holes............................................... 11-25
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................11-27
2-D DRAFTING 12-1

2-D DRAFTING CAPABILITIES ...................................................................................12-2
Creating Draft Geometry.................................................................................................. 12-2
Manipulating Draft Geometry.......................................................................................... 12-4
Modifying Draft Geometry .............................................................................................. 12-5
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS...............................................................................12-5
EXERCISE 1: Using the 2-D Drafting Functionality.......................................................12-7
EXERCISE 2: Updating a 2-D Drawing ........................................................................12-16
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 12-20
SYMBOLS 13-1
CREATING DRAWING SYMBOLS.............................................................................. 13-2
Creating Symbol Geometry..............................................................................................13-2
Adding Text to a Symbol .................................................................................................13-2
Grouping Symbols............................................................................................................13-3
Controlling Symbols.........................................................................................................13-4
Storing Symbols ...............................................................................................................13-5
PLACING SYMBOLS ON A DRAWING...................................................................... 13-6
Defining the Relationship Between the Symbol Instance and Original Symbol ..............13-6
Changing Variable Text Values in a Symbol Instance .....................................................13-7
Selecting Groups to Include in the Instance .....................................................................13-7
REDEFINING EXISTING SYMBOLS........................................................................... 13-8
Updating a Redefined Symbol in a Drawing ....................................................................13-8
USING WELDING SYMBOLS ...................................................................................... 13-9
USING SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS ......................................................................... 13-9
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ............................................................................ 13-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..................................................................................... 13-11
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Symbol with Variable Text ...................................................13-11
EXERCISE 2: Creating Symbol Groups ........................................................................13-17
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 13-22
USING LAYERS TO CONTROL DRAWING DISPLAY 14-1

PURPOSE OF LAYERS.................................................................................................. 14-2
Creating a Layer in a Drawing .........................................................................................14-2
Creating the Layer ............................................................................................................14-3
Associating Items to Layers .............................................................................................14-3
Specifying the Display of a Layer ....................................................................................14-4
Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing .......................................................................14-5
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS .............................................................................. 14-7
EXERCISE 1: Using Layers to Control Drawing Display ...............................................14-8
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 14-13
RESOLVING REGENERATION PROBLEMS 15-1

RESOLVING FEATURE FAILURES ............................................................................ 15-2
Identifying the Failed Feature .......................................................................................... 15-2
Determining the Cause of the Failure .............................................................................. 15-3
Fixing the Failure ............................................................................................................. 15-4
Tips on Resolving Regeneration Failures ........................................................................ 15-5
EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failed Features........................................................................ 15-6
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................15-10
DRAWING FORMATS 16-1

CREATING A DRAWING FORMAT ............................................................................16-2
Importing a Format from Another System....................................................................... 16-2
Creating a Format with 2-D Drafting............................................................................... 16-3
Creating a Format in Sketcher Mode ............................................................................... 16-4
ADDING INFORMATION TO A FORMAT..................................................................16-4
Including Parametric Information in a Format................................................................. 16-4
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ..............................................................................16-6
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Multi-Sheet Drawing Format.................................................. 16-7
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................16-15
CREATING A BILL OF MATERIALS 17-1

CREATING A BOM USING PRO/REPORT..................................................................17-2
Generating a BOM Report ............................................................................................... 17-2
Manipulating a BOM Report ........................................................................................... 17-3
Showing the Correct Quantity.......................................................................................... 17-6
Calculating a Total Cost................................................................................................... 17-6
Continuing the Table on the Next Page ........................................................................... 17-8
Showing BOM Balloons .................................................................................................. 17-8
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................17-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................17-11
EXERCISE 1: Creating an Automatic BOM ................................................................. 17-11
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................17-20
FAMILY TABLES 18-1

ADVANTAGES OF USING FAMILY TABLES ...........................................................18-2
Saving Space with Instances ............................................................................................ 18-2
Reducing Development Time .......................................................................................... 18-2
CREATING A FAMILY TABLE ....................................................................................18-2
Creating the Generic Part................................................................................................. 18-2
Specifying Items for the Table to Drive ...........................................................................18-3
Creating New Instances....................................................................................................18-3
Verifying the Validity of the Model Instances .................................................................18-5
USING FAMILY TABLES IN DRAWING MODE ....................................................... 18-5
Creating a Parts Catalog ...................................................................................................18-5
Creating a Separate Drawing for Each Instance ...............................................................18-9
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ............................................................................ 18-11
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Family Table .........................................................................18-12
EXERCISE 2: Showing Family Tables on a Drawing ...................................................18-18
EXERCISE 3: Creating Separate Drawings for Each Instance ......................................18-21
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 18-22
WORKING WITH LARGE DRAWINGS 19-1

MANAGING LARGE DRAWINGS............................................................................... 19-2
Drawing Retrieval Process ...............................................................................................19-2
APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT............................................. 19-3
Configuration File Settings...............................................................................................19-3
Model Simplification........................................................................................................19-4
View Manipulation...........................................................................................................19-6
Erasing Views...................................................................................................................19-7
Cross-Section Manipulation .............................................................................................19-7
Drawing Rep Tool ............................................................................................................19-8
Merging Drawings............................................................................................................19-8
View Only Retrieval.........................................................................................................19-9
EXERCISE 1: Reducing Regeneration and Repaint Time .............................................19-10
EXERCISE 2: Creating Simplified Representations ......................................................19-15
EXERCISE 3: Merging Two Drawings into One...........................................................19-17
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 19-20
PLOTTING 20-1
PLOTTING A DRAWING .............................................................................................. 20-2
Plotting Interactively ........................................................................................................20-2
Plotting Using the Pro/BATCH Utility.............................................................................20-5
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................. 20-7
EXERCISE 1: Creating Plot Files for Drawings ............................................................20-10
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 20-13
MARKUP MODEL 21-1
ENGINEERING MARKUPS ...........................................................................................21-2
Creating a Markup ........................................................................................................... 21-2
Saving and Viewing a Markup......................................................................................... 21-3
Retrieving Markups.......................................................................................................... 21-3
OVERLAYS .....................................................................................................................21-3
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Markup on a Drawing............................................................. 21-5
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................21-9
CREATING ISO-STANDARD DRAWINGS A-1

CONFIGURATION FILES AND DRAWING SETUP FILES ........................................A-2
Using Configuration File Options to Create ISO-Standard Drawings .............................. A-2
Using Drawing Setup File (.dtl) Options to Create ISO-Standard Drawings.................... A-3
TOLERANCE TABLES....................................................................................................A-5
Using Tolerance Tables for ISO Standards....................................................................... A-5
ISO SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS ................................................................................A-7
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .........................................................................................A-9
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing in Accordance with the ISO Standard....................... A-9
MODULE SUMMARY...................................................................................................A-22
INFO BILL OF MATERIALS MENU B-1

PLACING A BOM USING THE INFO MENU ...............................................................B-2
Manipulating the Format of a BOM Report...................................................................... B-3
Dividing a BOM into Sections.......................................................................................... B-3
Specifying Information and Format .................................................................................. B-3
Calculating a Total Value ................................................................................................. B-5
SKETCHER BASICS C-1

THE SKETCHER ENVIRONMENT................................................................................C-2
The Sketcher Interface .......................................................................................................C-2
Intent Manager ...................................................................................................................C-3
Pop-Up Menus ...................................................................................................................C-4
SKETCHER MODE FUNCTIONALITY.........................................................................C-5
Sketcher Menus..................................................................................................................C-5
Specifying References........................................................................................................C-6
Creating Geometry.............................................................................................................C-6
Dimensioning.....................................................................................................................C-8
Constraining.....................................................................................................................C-10
Additional Sketcher Tools............................................................................................... C-11
SETTING SKETCHER PREFERENCES....................................................................... C-14
SKETCHER PHILOSOPHY .......................................................................................... C-17
Rules of Thumb ............................................................................................................... C-17
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ...................................................................................... C-19
EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics...................................................................................... C-19
EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps ................................................................................... C-25
EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon............................................................................... C-30
MODULE SUMMARY .................................................................................................. C-33
PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT D-1

FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT PAGE ............................................................ D-2
OPENING A TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALL................................................................ D-2
Opening a call via email:...................................................................................................D-2
Opening a call via telephone: ............................................................................................D-3
Opening calls on the PTC Web Site: .................................................................................D-3
Sending Data to Technical Support ...................................................................................D-3
CALL / SPR FLOW CHART AND PRIORITIES ........................................................... D-4
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT .................................................................... D-5
ON-LINE SERVICES....................................................................................................... D-6
FINDING SOLUTIONS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE................................................ D-6
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION.................................................................... D-8
CONTACT INFORMATION ........................................................................................... D-8
Internet ..............................................................................................................................D-8
Telephone ..........................................................................................................................D-9
ELECTRONIC SERVICES ............................................................................................ D-14
USING PTC.HELP E-1

PTC HELP OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................E-2
PTC HELP FEATURES ....................................................................................................E-2
USING THE PRO/ENGINEER HELP SYSTEM .............................................................E-2
Getting Help While Performing a Task ............................................................................. E-2
GETTING HELP THROUGH THE PTC HELP SIDEBAR .............................................E-3
PTC HELP MODULE LIST ..............................................................................................E-4
For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited
Module
Introduction
In this module, the concept of using a drawing template to document
a model is introduced. The use of configuration and drawing setup
files to change various characteristics of the drawing is introduced
as well.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Create and modify configuration files.

• Create and modify drawing setup files.
• Use an existing drawing template.
Page 1-1
NOTES
PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER

With Pro/ENGINEER, you can create a detailed drawing from your 3-D
model that is fully associated to the part. That is, when you make a change
to the part, the system reflects that change in the drawing; likewise, when
you make a change to the drawing, it reflects that change in the associated
part.
Before creating a drawing, you should first modify your configuration file
and drawing setup file to customize the appearance of your drawings.
Through these files, you can specify such characteristics as the number of
decimal places that you would like to display for each dimension, the
default units, and the linear tolerance format.
Using Drawing Templates

Using the new drawing templates, you can create drawings automatically
and define the layout of views, set view display, place notes, define tables,
create snap lines, and show dimensions.
Pag e 1- 2 Fundament als of D ra wing

NOTES
Figure 1
These drawing templates will typically be created and maintained by a

system administrator. The creation of drawing templates will be discussed
in a later chapter. Once these templates are created, they are applied
during drawing creation.
Using Configuration Files

Using Pro/ENGINEER configuration files, you can customize your
working environment by specifying startup values for environment options
and other global settings. For example, you can turn the bell on or off,
select a suitable background color, or set the model display to hidden line
mode.
Introduction Pag e 1- 3
NOTES
Table 1 lists some of the configuration file options that affect the
appearance of a drawing. For a complete listing of the configuration file
options available in Pro/ENGINEER, refer to PTC HELP.

NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawings

Option Value Description
drawing_file_editor editor Sets the editor that you
protab can use to edit drawing
setup files (.dtl).
drawing_setup_file filename.dtl Points the system to the

file containing drawing
setup parameters. All
new drawings use this file
as the default setup file.
drawing_models_read_ no Makes the model (part, or
only yes assembly) read-only in a
drawing.
draw_points_in_model_ no If set to “yes,” the system
units yes defines the current draft
coordinate values as
model units rather than
drawing units.
dwg_select_across_ no Controls the default
pick_box yes option from the PICK
MANY menu. If set to
“yes,” the default is
Across Box . If set to
“no,” the default is
Inside Box .
mapkey keystroke Sets up macros, allowing
you to press one or two
keys to execute a set of
commands.
pro_dtl_setup_dir directory path Specifies the directory in
which the system should
store drawing setup files.
If you do not set it, the
system uses the default
setup directory.
rename_drawings_with_ none Controls whether the
object part system copies associated
drawings automatically
assem with parts and assemblies.
both
save_objects changed_and_specified Controls whether the
changed system stores an object
and its dependent objects
all (such as a part used in an
assembly).
NOTES
Files Automatically Loaded by the System

Pro/ENGINEER can read configuration files from several areas. If a
particular option is present in more than one configuration file, however, it
uses the latest value. When the system initially starts, it reads in
configuration files from the following directories, in the order in which
they are listed:
• Config.sup in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in which

you install Pro/ENGINEER) – Usually, only the system administrator
has the ability to change the options in this file because they are
generally company standards and you cannot override them with other
configuration files. Use this file to lock in certain requirements for all
users.
• Config.pro in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in which
you install Pro/ENGINEER) – The system administrator also manages
this file to set global search paths to library directories. Other
configuration files can override the options in this file.
• Config.pro in the your home directory – This file is located in your
home directory. If the system encounters an option in this file that is
the same as one in the loadpoint config.pro file, it uses this option,
overriding the option in the other file.
• Config.pro in the current directory – This file is located in the
directory from which you launched Pro/ENGINEER. If the system
encounters an option in this file that is the same as one in the loadpoint
config.pro directory or the home directory config.pro, it uses this
option, overriding the others.
Note:
If you do not set an option in any of these configuration files,
the system uses the default value for that option.
Editing the Configuration File During a

Pro/ENGINEER Session
In general, you should set the options in your configuration file before you
start a Pro/ENGINEER session.

NOTES
Global Considerations
Keep in mind that configuration file options impact your model globally—
that is, they affect the model in all modes of Pro/ENGINEER and they
affect every associated drawing. To control the appearance of an
individual drawing, you can modify your drawing setup file.
Using Drawing Setup Files

To change (or customize) the current drawing only—without affecting
other modes of Pro/ENGINEER or other drawings—you can modify the
drawing setup file. When you create a drawing, Pro/ENGINEER provides
you with a default setup file with default values. You can change these
values to customize the characteristics of the current drawing such as
dimension and note text height, text orientation, geometric tolerance
standards, font properties, drafting standards, and arrow lengths.
Specifying Your Default Drawing Setup File

Before starting your drawing, you should specify your default drawing
setup file by setting the configuration file drawing_setup_file You
can change the values in this file for individual drawings at any time.
Table 2 lists a few of the drawing setup file options available. For a
complete listing, see PTC HELP.
NOTES
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options

Drawing_units inch Specifies the units for all
feet drawing parameters.
mm
cm
m
Drawing_text_height 0.15625 Specifies the default text
value height for all text in the
drawing using the units set
by the configuration file
option drawing_units.
text_thickness 0.000000 Specifies the default
0<value<0.5 thickness for new text.
text_width_factor 0.80000 Specifies the default ratio
0.235<value<8 between the text width and
the text height. The
system maintains this ratio
until you change the width
using the Text Width
option.

NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To customize Pro/ENGINEER by creating a configuration file and
drawing setup file.
Method
In this exercise, a configuration file is created in the current working
directory. A drawing setup file is also created and the default values for
options are modified.
EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing

Task 1. Customize your working session by creating a configuration
file.
1. Change the working directory to FUND_DRAW_310. Click File >

Working Directory > FUND_DRAW_310 > OK .
2. Create a default configuration file for the current session. Click

Utilities > Preferences . The PREFERENCES dialog box appears
on the screen.
3. In the OPTION box of the PREFERENCES dialog box, begin

entering the first option listed in the table below. The system will
complete the option. Select the VALUE from the drop down list.
Click Add/Change . Do the same for each option.
Table 3: Configuration File Options

Option Value
bell NO
display HIDDENVIS
highlight_new_dims YES
parenthesize_ref_dim YES
4. Save the configuration file to a new name. Click , for the

name type [ my_config ] and click OK .
NOTES
5. Click OK from the PREFERENCES dialog box.
Task 2. Create a new drawing using a drawing template.
1. Change the Working Directory to INTRODUCTION.
2. Click File > New > Drawing .
3. Type [X123456 ] for the name and click OK . Ensure the Use
Default Template checkbox is checked. You will need to browse
for both the Default Model and template.
4. Make sure the NEW DRAWING dialog box options are selected as
shown in Figure 2. The model and the template are both stored in
your current directory.
Figure 2: New Drawing Dialog Box
5. Click OK . The drawing should appear as in Figure 3.
6. Save the drawing.

NOTES
Figure 3: The Initial Drawing
Note:
The template specified the following actions to take place
automatically:
- Place four views
- Set the scale of all views to .500
- Set the display of the isometric view to No Hidden
- Set the display of the planar views to Hidden Line
- Place a standard note on the drawing
- Create snap lines offset a predefined distance from the views
- Show the dimensions for the model with a view location

priority of FRONT, RIGHT and TOP .
-Locate the dimensions on the snap lines
NOTES
Task 3. Edit the drawing setup file.
1. Modify the existing drawing setup file. Click Advanced > Draw
Setup . The PREFERENCES dialog box appears with the initial
settings for the drawing setup file.
2. Change the options as shown in Table 4. Scroll down through the

list, select the option, enter the value and click Add/Change .
Table 4: Drawing Setup File Options

Option Value
drawing_text_height 0.2
crossec_arrow_length 0.25
crossec_arrow_width 0.1
witness_line_offset 0.15
draw_arrow_style filled
circle_axis_offset 0.25
3. Save the changes to the file. Click , for the name type
[my_dtl ]and click OK .
4. Click OK from the PREFERENCES dialog box.
5. Zoom-in to view the changes to the arrow head styles.
Task 4. Add an option to the configuration file so that the system

always loads the drawing setup file that you just created for all new
drawings .
1. Click Utilities > Preferences . The default configuration file is

CURRENT_SESSION.
2. Open the file MY_CONFIG.PRO. Click , select

MY_CONFIG.PRO, and click Open .
3. For option, type [drawing_setup_file] click Browse , select

MY_DTL.DTL, and click Open . Click Add/Change .
4. Click OK to close the PREFERENCES dialog box.
5. Close the current window. Click Window > Close Window .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that:
• You can create and modify configuration files.

• You can create drawing setup files.
Module
Creating Views
In this module, you learn about the different view types and how to
place them on a drawing.
Objectives
• Create a drawing and place different view types.

• Create different types of cross-section views on a drawing.
Page 2-1
NOTES
VIEW CREATION
In the previous chapter you were introduced to drawing templates. These
templates will allow you to jump-start the drawing creation process. There
will be many cases where you will still need to create and manipulate new
drawing views and detail items.
There are several different types of views you can add to a

Pro/ENGINEER drawing such as general, detailed, projection, auxiliary,
and revolved as shown in Figure 1. As you create each view type, you can
specify how much of the model should be visible in the drawing, and
whether the view should be of a single surface on the model or have a
cross-section.
Auxiliary
Revolved View
View
General
View
General View Detailed View

Projection View
Figure 1: View Types
Creating Different View Types

General Views
When a drawing is created without a template, the first view of a model
that the system places on a drawing is a general view. These types of
views are unique in that they allow you to specify any orientation of the

NOTES
model for the view. Initially, the system places a general view in its
default orientation; you can then reorient it using default datum planes or
predefined named views.
Orienting General Views Using Predefined Named Views

You can define the orientation of a general view by using a named view
that has been saved previously in a Part or Assembly. When creating
saved views, you should use default datum planes as the references
because they are the only references on your model that will never change.
Orienting General Views Using Default Datum Planes

When manually orienting a general view, you should specify top, bottom,
left, right, front, or back as the primary direction (corresponding to the
direction of your computer screen such as front of the screen, top of the
screen, etc.). You should use default datum planes as the references
because they are the only references on your model that will never change.
When specifying datum planes for references, keep in mind that the
yellow side of the datum plane faces the side of the screen that you pick.
For example, if you select top and DTM2, the yellow side of DTM2 faces
the top side of the screen
Projection Views
A projection view is an orthographic projection seen from the top, bottom,
left, or right of a selected drawing view. To create it, you specify a
location with respect to another drawing view and Pro/ENGINEER
automatically determines how to project it. Once it determines a suitable
view, it automatically orients and positions it correctly.
Once you have placed a projection view, the system associates it with the
view from which it projected it. If the parent view moves, the projection
view maintains its alignment.
Auxiliary Views
An auxiliary view is a projection of another view 90 degrees from an
inclined surface, a datum plane, or along an axis. Consider an auxiliary
view to be a projection at an odd angle, as opposed to the right, left, top, or
bottom.
C reat ing Vi ew s Pag e 2- 3

NOTES
• If you pick an edge as the reference, the view shows the surface to
which the edge belongs, parallel to the computer screen.
• If you pick a datum plane, the view shows the datum plane parallel to
the computer screen.
• If you pick a datum axis, the view looks along the datum axis. This
would be useful for looking through a hole on a model.
As with projection views, once you have placed an auxiliary view, the
system associates it with the view from which it is projected. If the parent
view moves, the auxiliary view maintains its alignment.
Detailed Views
A detailed view displays a portion of an existing view in a larger scale,
making it easier to see the geometry and dimensions. To create a detailed
view, you must specify:
• A location for the detailed view

• A reference point on the model to define the location of interest.
• A view boundary. You will sketch a spline around the area that you
want to show.
• A location for the callout note
Pro/ENGINEER relates a detailed view to the view from which you create
it, but you can move the detail view independently of its parent.
Revolved Views
A revolved view is a section view revolved 90 degrees about the cutting
plane line and offset along its length. The section is an area cross-section,
showing only material cut by the cutting plane.
Graph Views
A graph view shows a datum graph on a drawing to associate a function
with the part. Once you have created the datum graph feature, you can
show it in your drawing, as shown in Figure 2.

NOTES
Figure 2: Graph View
Controlling the View Display

In addition to determining which type of view to place, you can also
control how much of the model the system shows in the view by using
these options in the VIEW TYPE menu, as shown in Figure 3:
• Full View – Displays the entire model in the view.

• Half View – Displays only a portion of the model using a datum plane
to control how much is visible.
• Broken View – Displays a portion of a large model by removing an
area of the model from the display and brings the pieces of the model
on either side of the removed area closer together.
½ Several options exist for defining what the break will look like.
You can manually sketch the break geometry or choose S-
curve or heartbeat break geometry.
• Partial View – Shows a localized portion of the model using the same
technique that you would use to create a detailed view.
Broken View Partial View
Full View Half View

Figure 3: View Options

NOTES
Adding Cross-Sections
You can add the following types of cross-sections to a view, as shown in
Figure 4:
• Full – Displays the entire view as a cross-section.

• Half – Displays the cross-section on one side of a datum plane without
affecting the other side.
• Local – Displays the cross-section in localized areas by sketching a
boundary (using the same techniques that you would use to create
detailed and partial views).
• Full and Local – Displays the entire model as one cross-section while
a local area displays another.
Note:
Use the Of Surface option in the VIEW TYPE menu to show
only one surface in a particular view.
Full cross-section Half cross-section
Local cross-section Full & Local cross-section
Figure 4: Cross-Section Types
Note:
In version 2000i2 of Pro/ENGINEER, a new type of cross
section engine is available that will dramatically reduce the
number of occurrences when a cross section view cannot be
created. The new style of cross section can be enabled using
the detail setup option crossec_type.

NOTES
Full Cross-Sectional Views

Using the XSEC TYPE menu, you can manipulate full cross-sectional
views in the following ways:
• Use Total Xsec to show all edges of a full cross-section, including

those behind the cutting plane, as shown in Figure 5.
• Use Total Align to show a total cross-section that is unfolded around
an axis, as shown in Figure 6.
• Use Total Unfold to show a total cross-section unfolded so that the
cutting planes are parallel to the screen, as shown in Figure 7.
• Use Area Xsec to show only the geometry at the cutting plane, as
shown in Figure 5.
• Use Align Xsec to show an area cross-section that is unfolded around
an axis, as shown in Figure 6.
• Use Unfold Xsec to show an area cross-section unfolded so that the
cutting planes are parallel to the screen, as shown in Figure 7.
Total cross-section Area cross-section
Figure 5: Total versus Area Cross-Section
Figure 6: Aligned Cross-Section

NOTES
Figure 7: Unfolded Cross-Section
Specifying the View Scale

When you create a view in a drawing, the scale of the view appears at the
bottom of the graphics area. Pro/ENGINEER determines the scale based
on the model and drawing sheet size. When creating a general view, you
have the option to specify a unique scale for the new view only.
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS

Table 1 lists configuration file options that affect view display. The default
values are shown in italics.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting View Display

Option Value Definition
default_draw_scale no Sets the default drawing
value (positive) scale for views added with
the No Scale option.
When set to “no,” the
system does not set a
default scale. You can set
this option to a positive
number to predefine the
scale when you choose No
Scale.
make_proj_view_notes no Adds view names
yes automatically for
projection views in the
format “VIEW viewname-
viewname.”
orientation trimetric Establishes the view
isometric orientation as isometric,
user-defined, or trimetric.
user_default

NOTES
selection_of_removed_ yes Controls the selection of

entities no entities in front of a cross-
section. If set to “yes,” you
can select entities even if
they are in front of the
cross-section, clipped, or
erased with the EDGE
DISP menu.
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS

Table 2 lists the drawing setup file options that affect view display. The
default values are shown in italics.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting View Display

broken_view_offset 1.0 Sets the offset distance
value between the two halves of
a broken view.
crossec_arrow_length 0.0625 Sets the length of the

value cross-section cutting
plane arrow heads.
crossec_arrow_width 0.1875 Sets the width of the

value cross-section cutting
plane arrows.
crossec_arrow_style tail_online Sets the arrowhead

head_online display, either head online
or tail online.

NOTES
crossec_text_place after_head Sets location of the cross-

before_tail section text.
above_tail
above_line
no_text
cutting_line_adapt no If set to “yes,” the system

yes uses adaptive line fonts to
display cross-section
arrows; that is, they begin
and end in the middle of a
complete line segment.
def_view_text_height 0 Sets the default text
value height for view names
and arrows in cross-
section and detailed
views.
def_view_text_thickness 0 Sets the default text
value thickness for view names
and arrows in cross-
section and detailed
views.
detail_circle_line_style solidfont Sets the line style for
font_name circles indicating a
detailed view in a
drawing. The value for
this option can be any
available system-defined
or user-defined line styles.
detailed_view_circle on Controls the display of the
off circle encompassing the
detailed view.

NOTES
half_view_line solid Controls the display of the

symmetry half view. If set to “solid,”
system draws solid lines
none where material is present.
If set to “symmetry,”
system draws a centerline
extending beyond the part
and acting as a break line.
If set to “none,” the
system draws the object a
short distance past the
symmetry line. You must
specify a datum to create
the half view and use a
centerline to indicate the
actual half.
Symmetry None
projection_type third_angle Specifies the projection
first_angle type: first or third angle.
show_total_unfold_seam yes Controls the display of
no seams in a total unfolded
cross-section.
view_scale_denominator 0 Determines the view scale

integer denominator for the view
scale before you simplify
the fraction.

NOTES
view_scale_format decimal Determines whether the

fractional system expresses a scale
as a decimal, fraction, or
ratio_colon ratio.

NOTES
Goal
To create a drawing and place different views types on the drawing.
Method
In the first exercise, a new drawing of a plunger part is created and
different view types are created.
In the second exercise, a new drawing of a barrel part is created and views
are created. The barrel part is modified, and the associative drawing also
updates.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing of the Plunger
Figure 8: Plunger Body Drawing

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve the plunger part to become familiar with its geometry.
1. Click File > Open > PLUNGER_BODY.PRT > Open.
2. Spin the model to review the geometry.
3. Click Window > Close Widow .
Task 2. Create a new drawing named PLUNGER_BODY.DRW as

shown in Figure 8. Use PLUNGER_BODY.PRT as the model. Place a
first general view and two projection views.
1. Click File > New > Drawing , type [PLUNGER_BODY] as drawing

name. Clear the Use default template checkbox and click OK .
2. Accept the defaults in the New Drawing dialog box and click OK.
3. Click Views , accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view
by centering it at the bottom of the drawing.
4. Orient the view as shown in Figure 9. Accept defaults and pick

DTM1 on the screen for the Front and DTM2 on the screen for the
Top. Click OK .
Figure 9: First View
Note:
You should use default datum planes to orient general views.
When picking datum planes to face in a particular direction,
the yellow side of that datum should face in the specified
direction.

NOTES
5. Place a projection view to the left of the first view, as shown in

Figure 10. Click Add View , accept the defaults and click Done .
Locate the view to the left of the first view.
Figure 10: First Projection
6. Place a second projection view above the first projection view that
you just created, as shown in Figure 11. Click Add View , accept
the defaults and click Done . Locate the view above the projection
view.
Figure 11: Second Projection
Task 3. Create a general view with a cross-section cutting through the

middle of the model.
1. Click Add View > General > Full View >Section > No Scale >
Done .
2. To define the type of cross-section, accept the defaults and click

Done . Locate the view above the first view.

NOTES
3. Orient the view as shown in Figure 12. Expand the Saved Views
list, select FRONT and click Set > OK .
Figure 12: Cross-section A-A
4. Click Create , accept the defaults and click Done . Type [A] as the
cross-section name.
5. Specify DTM3 as the plane to use for the cross-section. Pick DTM3
from the MODEL TREE.
6. Pick the second projection view in the upper left corner of the
screen as the view in which to locate the cutting plane arrows.
Task 4. Create a detailed view that displays the tab in the lower right
corner of View 3.
1. Click Add View > Detailed , accept the defaults and click Done .
Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in Figure
13. Type [4] as the scale.

NOTES
Figure 13: DETAIL 1
2. Zoom in on the second projection view and pick the lower right
corner of the model as shown in Figure 14.
Figure 14: DETAIL 1 Center Point
3. Sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and the
geometry for the detailed view. (Refer to Figure 13). Click the
middle mouse button to complete the spline.
4. Type [1] as the name.
5. Click Circle and locate the note for the detail to the left of the
circle.

NOTES
Task 5. Create a detailed view displaying the geometry of two of the

cooling fins on the plunger body shown in Section A-A.
1. Click Add View > Detailed, accept the defaults and click Done .
Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in Figure
15.
Figure 15: DETAIL 2
2. Type [4] as the scale of the detailed view.
3. Zoom in on Section A-A and pick the edge of the flange that is
second from the right as the center point, Figure 16.
Pick the edge
of this flange
for the center
of the detail
boundary
Figure 16: DETAIL 2 Center Point
geometry for the detailed view. (Refer to Figure 15). Type [2] as
the name of the detailed view.
5. Click Circle and locate the note for the detail to the upper left of
the callout.

NOTES
Task 6. Create a partial view that displays the cross-sectional geometry

of one of the tabs on the plunger body.
1. Click Add View > General > Partial View > Section > Scale >
Done .
2. Click Done to accept the default values for the type of section to
be created.
3. Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in

Figure 17. Type [4] as the scale for the partial view.
Figure 17: Cross-Section B-B
4. Orient the view using the FRONT saved view. Click OK .
5. Create a planar cross-section through the hole of one of the tabs on

the plunger body. Click Create , accept defaults, and click Done .
Type [B] as the name of the cross-section.
6. Click Make Datum and create a datum that goes through the axis
in the tab and parallel to DTM3. You may find it helpful to select
DTM3 from the model tree.

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

When creating a datum using the Make Datum option, you
can specify an axis or a datum plane even if it is not visible on
the drawing. Simply turn on the display in the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box and use Query Select to pick
approximately where to locate the axis or datum plane.
7. Pick the projection view in the upper left corner of the screen to
specify the view in which to place the cross-section arrows.
8. Specify the center point for the outer boundary on the current view.
Pick an edge of the through hole, as shown in Figure 18, and
sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and the
geometry for the partial view.
Select this edge

for the center
point of the
partial boundary
Figure 18: Partial View Center Point
Task 7. Create a 3-D view in an isometric orientation.
1. Click Add View > General > Done . Locate the view in the upper
right corner of the drawing.
2. Orient the view similar to the view shown in Figure 19.

Temporarily orient the model to the FRONT saved view.
3. From the TYPE pull-down list select ANGLES. From the

REFERENCE pull-down list select VERTICAL as the first
reference, type [-45], and click Apply .
4. Click Add to add a second rotation. From the TYPE pull-down list
select HORIZONTAL as the reference and type [35] and click
Apply .
5. If the view is oriented correctly as shown in Figure 19, click OK . If

the orientation is not correct, repeat steps 2 through 5 of this task.

NOTES
Figure 19: Isometric View
6. Click Views > Move View and reposition the views as shown in
Figure 8.
7. Save the drawing. Click File > Save and accept default name.
8. Close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Drawing of the Barrel
Figure 20: Barrel Drawing
Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.PRT to become familiar with its geometry.
1. Spin the model to obtain a good view of the part.
2. Close the active window.

NOTES
Task 2. Create a new drawing and place a general view on the drawing.
1. Create a new drawing named BARREL.DRW. Click File > New >
Drawing . Enter [barrel] for the name. Clear the Use default
template checkbox, then click OK .
2. The model for the drawing in the NEW DRAWING dialog box
should be BARREL.PRT. Accept defaults and click OK .
3. Click Views , accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view
in the upper left corner of the drawing.
4. Orient the view as shown in Figure 21. Pick DTM2 on the screen
for the Front. Select BOTTOM from the REFERENCE 2 drop-down
list, pick DTM3 on the screen and click OK .
Figure 21: First View
Task 3. Create a projection view with an align cross-section through the

patterned holes to the right of the first view.
1. Click Add View > Section > Done .
2. Specify the cross-section type. Click Align XSEC > Done . Locate
the view to the right of the first view, as shown in Figure 22.
Figure 22: Section A-A

NOTES
3. Click Create > Offset > Done to create an offset cross-section

through the center hole and two of the patterned holes.
Note:
The One Side /Both Sides options define which way the
system cuts the cross-section: in one or both directions
perpendicular to the sketching plane. In this case, you could
use either one because of DTM2 position, but you should use
the default Both Sides .
4. Type [A] as the name of the cross-section. The barrel part appears
on the screen. Pick DTM2 as the sketching plane and click OK to
view the sketching plane from above.
5. You may have to show the DTMS_PART_DEF layer to see the

axes. Click View > Layers and show the layer. Repaint the screen
to see the axes and close the LAYERS dialog box
6. For the reference plane click Bottom and pick DTM3.

Pro/ENGINEER orients the view and places you in Intent
Manager. Close the Sketcher Enhancement- Intent Manager
window if it appears.
7. Create the section as shown in Figure 23. For additional references,

pick the axes and cylindrical surface of the barrel from the screen
as shown in Figure 23.
8. Close the REFERENCES dialog box when you have selected the
references needed for this sketch.
9. Sketch the two lines shown.

NOTES
Sketch these lines
Pick Axis A_2 as

a reference
Pick Axis A_5 as a

reference
Pick
Axis A_1 as a
reference
Pick the outside surface as a

reference
Figure 23: Sketch for Align Cross-Section
10. Click Sketch > Done to complete the section.
11. Pick axis A_1 in the right view as the axis to unfold around.
12. Press the middle mouse button to abort section arrow creation.
Task 4. Place a projection view to the right of cross-section A-A. After

placing the view, retrieve the model and modify the number of holes.
Return to the drawing to observe how the drawing updated and verify that
the cross-section is still valid.
1. Click Add View from the VIEWS menu, then click Projection >
Done . Locate the view to the right of Section A-A, as shown in
Figure 24.
Figure 24: Projection View Location

NOTES
Task 5. Retrieve the barrel part and modify the number of holes in the
barrel to verify that the cross-section updates correctly.
1. Open the barrel part.
2. Click Modify, pick one of the 5 patterned holes and pick the
parameter controlling the number of instances in the pattern.
3. Type [7] and click Regenerate .
4. View the updated drawing. Click Window > BARREL.DRW . There

are now seven holes and the align cross-section updated correctly.
5. Click Window > BARREL.PRT and change the number of holes

back to five
6. Set BARREL.DRW active.
Task 6. Create a detailed view that displays the geometry of one of the
oval shaped slots.
1. Create a detailed view that displays one of the slots in the first
view. Click Views > Add View > Detailed , accept the defaults
and click Done .
2. Locate the view in the lower left corner of the sheet, as shown in
Figure 25. Type [2] as the scale.
Figure 25: Detailed View Location

NOTES
3. Specify the center point for the detail on an existing view. Pick the
edge of one of the oval slots in the first view.
geometry for the detailed view. Click the middle mouse button to
complete the spline.
5. Type [1] as the name of the detailed view.
6. To define the callout to use for this detailed view, click Circle and
locate the note for the detail to the lower left of the circle.
7. Save the drawing and close all windows.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create different view types on a drawing.

• Views can contain all of the model geometry, a portion of the
geometry, or a planar section of the geometry.
• Drawing views are associative and will update to reflect changes in the
model.

Module
Assembly and Multi-Model Drawings

In this module, you learn how to create a drawing of an assembly
model. You also learn how to create a drawing with two or more
models in the same drawing.
Objectives
• Create a drawing of an assembly and display exploded views in the

drawing.
• Create a drawing to display views of more than one model in the
same drawing.
Page 3-1
NOTES
ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
To create a drawing of an assembly, you must specify an assembly as the
model for your drawing. The system then displays the name and type of
the model along the bottom of the window.
Adding Exploded Views

When placing an exploded view of an assembly, you can place it in the
default explode state, as shown in Figure 1. However, if the assembly has
multiple explode states, the system allows you to specify which one to
display. If you place the default exploded view on the drawing, it
automatically updates with any changes that you make to the explode state
in the assembly. You can also modify the exploded view on the drawing.
Figure 1: An Exploded View
MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS
In some cases, you may need to use two or more models on the same
drawing, as shown in Figure 2. For example, you may want to create a
drawing of a component and the assembly in which it is used. By creating
a multi-model drawing, you can display an assembly and all of its
component parts. You can also do the following:
• Clearly show all part and assembly dimensions in the same drawing.

NOTES
• Display several members of the same family with different sets of

features.
• Work with detail items, tables, repeat regions, and so on, that belong to
any one of the models.
Figure 2: Multi-Model Drawing
Adding the Model to the Drawing

Before you can use a model in a view, you must add it to the drawing;
however, adding a model to a drawing does not place a view of that
model—it only enables the drawing to reference the model so that you can
place a view. After you add the model, the system retrieves the part or
assembly when you retrieve the drawing.
Setting the Active Model

To add views of a particular model, you must set that model as active, but
only one model on the drawing can be the active model at any given time.
The system references the active model any time that it needs a default
model to perform an operation, such as when you add views or regenerate
a model. The last model that you add to a drawing becomes the current
model.
The system sets the drawing scale of each model independently. You may
notice the scale value at the bottom-left corner changing when you set
different models. To modify the scale for each model, it must be active.
Ass embl y and Mult i Mo del D ra wing s Pag e 3- 3

NOTES
Tips for Working with Multiple Models in a Drawing

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to use as many models on a drawing as you
need; however, you must add all models that are shown in the drawing to
the drawing before you can display them as views.
When working with multi-model drawings, keep in mind the following:
• The system retrieves all part and assembly files when it retrieves the
drawing. This may dramatically increase your retrieval time for the
drawing.
• Deleting the views of a model does not disassociate the model from
the drawing. Once you add a model to a drawing, the system associates
that drawing to it, regardless of whether any views are showing. To
disassociate a model, you must delete that model from the drawing.
• When you add relations, the system adds them to the current model;
therefore, you should select a model before adding a relation.

NOTES
Goal
To create drawings of assembly models and drawings with more than
one model.
Method
This exercise creates a new drawing of an assembly and creates the
drawing views including exploded views. We also add a second model to
the drawing and create views of second model.
EXERCISE 1: Displaying Multiple Models in a

Drawing
Figure 3: Upper Housing Drawing

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve the end cap part and the upper housing assembly to
view the models that you are going to include in this drawing.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_CAP.PRT and become familiar with its

geometry.
2. Shade and spin the model to view all sides of the part.
4. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.ASM and become familiar with its

geometry.
5. Shade and spin the model to view all sides of the part.
Task 2. Create a new drawing called UPPER_HOUSING that includes

the upper housing assembly and the end cap part, as shown in Figure 3.
1. Type [UPPER_HOUSING] as the drawing name. Clear the Use

default template check box. Confirm that
UPPER_HOUSING.ASM is the drawing model and specify a C-
size sheet and landscape orientation.
Task 3. Place a cross-sectional exploded view of the upper housing

assembly on the drawing. The cross-section should be planar and pass
through the middle of the housing.
1. Click Views > Section > Exploded > Done . For the cross-section
type, accept the defaults and click Done .
2. Place the view in the bottom right corner of the sheet and select the
default exploded view. From the SEL STATE menu, confirm that
the Default check box is selected and click Done .

NOTES
Figure 4: Exploded View
3. Once you have placed the view, orient it to look like the view
shown in Figure 4. From the ORIENTATION dialog box, click
Saved Views to display any views that have been. From the list of
saved views, select SIDE and click Set > OK .
4. Create a new cross-section that passes through the middle of the

assembly parallel to the screen. Click Create , accept the defaults,
and click Done . Type [A] as the cross-section name. Pick datum
plane ADTM3 to create the cross-section. Select ADTM3 by
clicking Sel By Menu > Sel By Menu > Datum > Name >
ADTM3 .
5. Do not display arrows on the drawing at this time. Press the middle
mouse button to continue drawing creation without displaying any
cross-section arrows for section A-A.
6. After you have placed the view on the drawing, turn off the display
for the datum planes and coordinate systems.
Task 4. Place a projection view of the upper housing assembly to the

left of the first view. Explode the view without a cross-section. Place a
second projection view directly above section A-A. Unexplode the view
without a cross-section.
1. Create an exploded projection view to the left of section A-A, as

shown in Figure 5. Click Add View > Exploded > Done . Locate
the view to the left of section A-A.
2. Create an unexploded projection view above section A-A, as

shown in Figure 5. Click Add View > Done . Locate the view
above section A-A.

NOTES
Figure 5: Projection Views
Task 5. Add the plunger cap part as a second model to the drawing.
Place a general view of this model in the upper left corner of the drawing
and orient the view, then place a projection view to the right of the first
view of the plunger cap.
1. Click Dwg Models > Add Model . A dialog box lists all of the
parts and assemblies in the current directory. Select
PLUNGER_CAP.PRT and click Open .
2. Add a general view of the plunger cap to the drawing. Place the
view in the upper left corner of the sheet. Click Add View > Done .
Locate the view in the upper left corner of the sheet.
3. Orient the view as shown in Figure 6. From the REFERENCE 1

drop-down list, select BACK and pick DTM2 on the screen. From
the REFERENCE 2 drop-down list, select RIGHT and pick DTM1.
After orienting the view correctly, click OK .

NOTES
Figure 6: Plunger Cap
Note:
Although you turned off the display of datum planes earlier,
the system temporarily turned them back on when orienting
the view. After you place the view, the system automatically
turns off the datum plane display.
4. Create a projection view of the plunger cap to the right of the first
view, as shown in Figure 7. Click Add View > Done . Locate the
view to the right of the first view of the plunger cap.
Figure 7: Projection View

NOTES
Task 6. Add a 3-D view of the upper housing assembly by setting the
upper housing as the active model. Any views that you add to a drawing
are for the active model only.
1. Click Dwg Models > Set Model . Select UPPER_HOUSING from

the list of models associated with the drawing. It is now the active
model.
Note:
You can only add views of the active model. Before placing a
view on a drawing that contains multiple models, make sure
that the correct model is active. Pro/ENGINEER displays the
name and type of the active model at the bottom of the screen.
2. Create an exploded view in a 3-D orientation, as shown in

Figure 8. Click Add View > General > Exploded > Scale >
Done .
Figure 8: 3-D View Location

NOTES
3. Place the view on the left side of the sheet and select the default
exploded view. Locate the view on the left side of the drawing.
From the SEL STATE menu, confirm the Default check box is
selected and click Done . Type [.75] as the view scale.
4. Retain the view in the default orientation. From the ORIENTATION

dialog box, click OK .
5. Save the drawing and close the window.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a drawing of an assembly and display exploded views

in the drawing.
• You can create a drawing to display views of more than one model in
the same drawing.

Module
Modifying Views
In this module, you learn about various ways to modify drawing
views.
Objectives
• Change view location, orientation, and origin.

• Remove views from a drawing.
• Modify view boundaries and callouts.
Page 4-1
NOTES
MANIPULATING VIEWS
After you initially place views in your drawing, you should manipulate
them so that they accurately reflect the associated part and dimensions.
Changing View Location, Orientation, and Origin

Often, you must change the location, orientation, or origin of a view in
order to improve the appearance of your drawing.
Location
You can easily move a view from one place to another within a drawing;
however, you should consider if it is a parent or child of any other view in
the drawing. By default, moving the parent view will cause the child view
to move accordingly. In version 2000i2, you can unalign projected views
and move them away from the parent view. This may be useful in cases
where there is limited space on the drawing.
Alignment
You can now align a general view to another general view or projection
view. This will establish a parent/child relationship between the views and
cause them to move together.
Orientation
You can change the initial orientation of a general view at any time after
you create it, but keep in mind that the change also affects the orientation
of any dependent views. When reorienting a general view,
Pro/ENGINEER warns you that the change is also going to affect the child
views as well and highlights them on the screen.
Note:
When you reorient a general view that has a cross-section, the
cross-section must remain parallel to the screen. If the change
in orientation does not allow for this, Pro/ENGINEER does not
reorient the general view.

NOTES
Origin
Every view has an origin, which controls how the system moves and
locates the view, and how the view is affected by changes in the model.
By default, the origin of a drawing view is at the intersection of the two
diagonals connecting the corners of the view extent, as shown in Figure 1.
View origin
Figure 1: View Origin
As an example, you may want to prevent a projection view from

overlapping other views when the size of the model changes, as shown in
Figure 2. To set the origin of a drawing view, you can parametrically
reference model geometry and the selected point on the model will remain
fixed as the view changes.
Note:
The setting of the view origin does not change the current
position of the view. The change in origin is only noticeable
when views update to changes in the model geometry.
Original views
Views have no overlap with edge set as origin

Views overlap with default
Origin set
at edge
Figure 2: Changing the View Origin
Modify ing Vi ews Pag e 4- 3

NOTES
When specifying a new view origin, keep in mind the following:
• For a general view, the point on the geometry becomes fixed.

• If the feature you reference becomes suppressed or deleted, the system
automatically issues a warning and indicates the name of the view with
the missing origin.
• For a projection or auxiliary view, the system transfers the selected
point onto a ray passing through the origin of the parent view in the
direction of the projection. This projected point becomes the origin of
the view.
• You should control the location of the view origin when entities are
related to a view. For example, if draft geometry is related to a view,
locate the geometry with respect to the view origin, not the geometry
of the model in the view.
Controlling Hidden Line Display

The prefered method for controlling hidden and tangent line display on
your drawing views is to manually set the display of the individual views.
This will allow you to override the environment display settings, which
may vary each time the drawing is opened, Figure 3.
Hidden Line No Hidden

Wireframe
Tangent Centerline Tangent Phantom
Tangent Solid
Figure 3: Display Modes
Removing Views from a Drawing

You can remove views from a drawing by either permanently deleting
them or temporarily erasing them from the display. You can only delete a
view if it does not have any child views dependent on it.

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

Erasing and resuming views is an effective technique for
improving the view regeneration and repaint times of
complicated drawings.
When erasing views, keep in mind the following:
• If a note or symbol is attached to the erased view as well as other

views, the system also erases the leaders attached to the erased view.
When you resume the view, the leaders reappear.
• You cannot show dimensions on another view if you showed them on
the erased view.
• If you erase the parent of a detailed view that contains a local area
cross-section, the system transforms the local cross-section in the
detailed view into a full cross-section.
Modifying the View Scale

When you place a view on a drawing, the system controls the scale in one
of two ways: by giving it its own separate scale value or by using the
drawing scale. Pro/ENGINEER uses the drawing scale in the lower left
corner of the screen to control all views that are created without an
independent scale. Modifying this global value will cause all views using
it to update automatically. In addition, when you create any new views
using the drawing scale, the system uses this value.
When placing a detailed or a general view, you can specify a separate

scale value to control only that view and any associated child views.
Modifying View Boundaries and Callouts

Using various methods, you can change the:
• Boundaries of a detailed view, partial view, or local cross-section to

show more or less detail.
• Shape of the detailed view callout.
• Geometry that the view displays.
Changing the Boundary

By redefining the boundary, you can modify a view to show more or less
geometry. In addition, you can also show the boundary in the detailed or

NOTES
partial view or erase it from those views. Figure 4 shows one detailed view
with the outer boundary and another without it.
Outer boundary shown Outer boundary erased
Figure 4: Manipulating the View Boundary
Changing the Callout

The size of the spline that you use to create the detailed view determines
the size of the callout. Therefore, to modify the size of the callout, you
must modify the spline. You are presented with several options to define
the shape of the callout to be used, Figure 5.

NOTES
Figure 5: Detailed View Callout
Moving the Reference Point

You can move the reference point of the view to a new location to change
the geometry that is displayed in the view. The reference point is attached
to specific model geometry; if the geometry moves, the view boundary
moves with it.
Changing a Cross-Section
In Pro/ENGINEER, you can modify cross-sections in the following ways
to achieve the correct display:
• Change the boundary, reference point, and outer display of a local

cross-section to show greater or lesser detail of a particular area.
• Remove it from the view entirely or replace it with another cross-
section.
• Change the direction in which the cutting arrows point.
• Add a cross-section to a view that was originally placed without one.
• Change the cross-hatching to display correctly for the material to be
used for this model.

NOTES
Changing Cross-Hatching
You can modify the cross-hatching displayed for a cross-section by
changing the angle, spacing, line style, and offset distance between the
lines, as well as adding or removing lines. After you have defined a cross-
hatching pattern, you can save it in a library for future use on other
drawings.
Assembly Cross-Hatching
When modifying the cross-hatching in an assembly view, you can alter the
cross-hatching displayed for each component intersected by the cutting
plane, Figure 6.
Figure 6: Modified Assembly Cross-Hatching
Altering Assembly Views

In many cases, you many need to create a drawing of an assembly or show
a view of the assembly on a part drawing in order to visualize the part.
When you alter an assembly view for this purpose, keep in mind the
following:
• The system must now retrieve every model that it uses in the assembly
when it retrieves the drawing. If the assembly is large, the retrieval
time could be significant. To avoid this problem, you can create a
snapshot.

NOTES
• The view may be cluttered by too many hidden lines, which could
make it more difficult to visualize the model. To change the line
display, you can use several options.
• You may not be able to view the components on the default exploded
view, but you can modify an exploded assembly view.
Creating a Snapshot
When you want to show an assembly view on a part drawing without
having to retrieve the assembly and all of its parts, you can convert the
assembly view to a snapshot—a collection of 2-D draft entities that are not
associated to the corresponding model. You can then delete the assembly
model from the drawing because none of the drawing views reference it.
When you convert a view into a snapshot, the following changes occur:
• All visible geometry, axes, datums, and other entities in the view
become draft entities.
• All draft entities that were previously associated to the view become
free.
• All attached drawing items (notes, gtols, symbols, draft dimensions,
etc.) become unattached.
• All visible model dimensions become draft dimensions.
• The system deletes the original view from the drawing.
• If you select a view that has child views, the system also makes those
into snapshots and deletes the original views.
• If you select a view that has erased children, the system deletes those
as well.
Note:
Once you convert a view to a snapshot, the system no longer
parametrically associates it to the original model in any way.
Therefore, if you change the model, the snapshot geometry
does not update to reflect the changes.
Removing Entities
You can remove entities from a view by controlling the display of
members in an assembly or by using Z-Clipping to exclude geometry
behind a specified plane.

NOTES
Controlling the Display of Assembly Members

By setting the display for each component in an assembly individually, as
shown in Figure 7, you can display some members in Hidden Line mode
and others in No Hidden mode, as well as blank individual components
from the screen. You can also manipulate individual edges of the model
by blanking them or changing their display.
Original assembly Assembly members changed to

Phantom Transparent
Figure 7: Changing Member Display
Excluding Geometry Behind a Specified Plane

Using Z-Clipping, you can modify the view display by excluding all the
geometry behind a specified plane. This technique is useful if you want to
see some of the hidden lines but not all of them, as shown in Figure 8.
Using Z-Clipping, you can remove many background lines quickly. When
you perform Z-Clipping in a view, keep in mind the following:
• If the system cannot regenerate the reference for the clipping plane, Z-
Clipping does not take effect for the view (it displays an error
message).
• You cannot perform Z-Clipping in the following types of views:
unfolded cross-sectional, area cross-sectional, exploded, and
perspective.

NOTES
• The Z-Clipping of a detailed view is always the same as that of its

parent. You cannot modify it individually.
• You can place the Z-Clipping reference point on any view.
Complex fan assembly before applying plane Complex fan assembly after applying plane
Figure 8: Using a Z-Clipping Plane
Creating Exploded Views

When you place an assembly view on a drawing, you can place it in a
default-exploded state. In Drawing mode, you control which components
explode, as well as the actual explode distance, as shown in Figure 9.
Default explode View after modification
Figure 9: Assembly Explode Modification

NOTES
When modifying an exploded view, you must specify preferences, the

direction of movement, and the components to move:
• Setting up preferences – Preferences enable you to control whether

the components move incrementally or smoothly, the number of
components to move at a time (one or many), and whether child
components should move with the parent components.
• Controlling the direction of movement – While changing the
explode distances for a component, you can select a variety of model
references to set the explode direction.
• Specifying the components to move – You can drag all components
to a new location at the same time so that the system offsets them at
the same explode distance.
Note:
If you modify an exploded view in the drawing, the view
becomes independent of the exploded view of the assembly. If
you make changes to the exploded state in the assembly, the
system does not reflect them in the modified drawing view.

Table 1 lists the available configuration file options that you can use to
modify views in a drawing.

NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Controlling View

Modification
drawing_view_origin_csys none Specifies a coordinate
name of CSYS system as the origin of a
newly created view.
hlr_for_quilts no Includes or excludes quilts
yes from the hidden line
removal process (not
cross-sectional views).
pro_crosshatch_dir directory path Specifies the default
directory for a library of
cross-hatching patterns.
variant_drawing_item_ no If set to “no,” all items
sizes yes moved or copied to a
different sheet retain the
same size on paper.
If set to “yes,” some items
scale and/or reposition to
be the same size or
position on the paper,
while other items scale
and/or reposition to be the
same size or position on
the screen.

Table 2 lists the available drawing setup file options that you can use to
modify views in a drawing.

NOTES
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Controlling View

Modification
axis_line_offset 0.1 Sets the default distance
value that a linear axis extends
beyond its associated
feature.
circle_axis _offset 0.1 Sets the default distance

Value that a circular cross-hair
axis extends beyond the
circular edge.
datum_point_shape cross Controls the shape of a

dot datum point.
circle
triangle
square
datum_point_size .3125 Controls the size of the
value datum points and sketched
2-D points.

NOTES
radial_pattern_axis_circle no Sets display mode for axes

yes of rotation that are
perpendicular to the screen
in radial pattern features. If
set to “no,'' displays axis
lines (Figure a). If set to
“yes,'' a circular shared
axis appears, and axis lines
pass through the center of
a rotational pattern (Figure
b).

NOTES
Goal
To improve the display and clarity of drawing views.
Method
In the first exercise, the drawing views of the plunger body are
manipulated. You move views, reorient views, and modify the cross-
hatching of cross-section views.
In the second exercise, the drawing views of the barrel are manipulated,
the scale of the sheet and individual views are modified, and the display of
each view in the drawing is made independent of the environment settings.
In the third exercise, you alter the display of views on a multi model and
assembly drawing by modifying the explode distances and cross-hatching.

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Manipulating Views
Task 1. Clean up the drawing display by changing the scale of the views
and repositioning the views and cross-sectional arrows.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
Note:
If you did not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrieve
PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW.

NOTES
2. If the datum planes and datum coordinate systems appear on the

screen, turn them off using the icons on the toolbar and repaint.
3. Click Modify from the DETAIL menu and pick the scale value in
the lower left corner of the screen. Type [2.00] as the new scale
value.
4. Reposition the views, as shown in Figure 10. Click Views > Move
View . Pick a view from the screen to move; the system highlights
that view and its child views. Place the views in the correct
position.
Tips & Techniques:

To access the ASYNCHRONOUS pop-up menu, hold down
the right mouse button. Select MODIFY ITEM and pick a
view. Pick the view again to move it.
5. Move the cross-sectional arrows displayed in the upper left view to

the positions shown in Figure 11. Click Move from the DETAIL
menu and pick one of the arrows. Move the arrows to the correct
position.
Figure 11: Cross-Section Arrow Locations
6. For Detail 1, Detail 2, Section A-A, and Section B-B, reposition

the view names to place them directly beneath the corresponding
views. Click Move and pick one of the view names. Place it
underneath the correct view.

NOTES
Task 2. To prevent the environment settings for the hidden and tangent
line display from affecting the drawing, set the display of each view.
1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Select the 3-D view, both
cross-sectional views, and both detail views, then click Done Sel
to display the DISP MODE menu.
Tips & Techniques:

To speed up the selection process, you can press the middle
mouse button instead of clicking Done Sel .
2. Click No Hidden > Tan Solid . Click Det Indep to set the display
mode of the detailed views differently from that of their parents
then click Done .
3. Pick the remaining views on the drawing and press the middle
mouse button. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done.
Task 3. Decrease the scale of the 3-D view of the plunger.
1. Click Modify View > View Type and select the 3-D view.
2. Click Scale > Done .
3. Type [.8] as the scale value.
Task 4. Modify the location of the tab in the upper-left view. Notice that
the detailed view no longer displays the correct geometry. Redefine the
reference point that you used for the detailed view so that it is attached to
the tab.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.PRT.
Note:
If you used PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW in this
exercise, retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.PRT
instead.
2. Modify the tab shown in Figure 12, change the horizontal 0.50
location dimension to [0.25], and click Regenerate .

NOTES
Modify the location

Figure 12: Modify the Tab Location of this tab
3. Click Window > PLUNGER_BODY.DRW . DETAIL 1 should

display as shown in Figure 13.
Note:
The tab is no longer centered in the detailed view because the
reference point for the boundary of that detail was not an
appropriate choice. You picked the side edge of the plunger
body instead of the edge of the tab.
Original reference
point
New reference
point
Figure 13: New Tab Location
4. Move the reference point of DETAIL 1 to the edge of the tab.

Click Views > Modify View > Ref Point and pick DETAIL 1 as
the view to alter. The original reference point displays in the upper
left view. Pick the edge of the tab as the new reference, as shown
in Figure 13. Click Done Sel > Done.
5. Activate the window for the PLUNGER_BODY.PRT.
6. Modify the location of the tab back to [0.50].

NOTES
7. Activate the window for the PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and notice

the change that occurred in DETAIL 1.
Task 5. Reduce the amount of geometry shown in the DETAIL 2 view.

Modify the view boundary to include only one of the flanges.
1. Click Views > Modify View > Boundary and pick DETAIL 2.
Figure 14: Original Detailed View
2. Press the left mouse button to sketch a spline around one of the
flanges. Use the middle mouse button to finish the spline
boundary. Click Done from the VIEW BNDRY menu. Repaint the
screen, if necessary. Click Done/Return from the VIEWS menu.
Figure 15: New Detailed View
Task 6. Modify the cross-hatching shown in Sections A-A, B-B, and

DETAIL 2. Create new cross-hatching and save it for future drawings.
1. Click Modify > Xhatching . Pick Section A-A and Section B-B,
then click Done Sel .

NOTES
2. Add a second line to the cross-hatching. Click Add Line , type [45]
as the angle, type [.1] as the offset value, type [.44] to define the
distance between each segment of the new line.
3. In the MODIFY LINE STYLE dialog box select CENTERLINE from

the STYLE drop-down list. Select DOTFONT from the LINE FONT
drop-down list. Click Apply > Close .
4. Decrease the spacing of the cross-hatching. Click Spacing and use

Half and Double to achieve spacing similar to that shown in Figure
16.
Figure 16: User-Defined Cross-Hatching
5. Save this cross-hatching for future use in other drawings. Click

Save , type [user_def] and click Done .
Note:
The system automatically updates the cross-hatching on
DETAIL 2 because a detailed view obtains its cross-hatching
from its parent view by default.
6. Decrease the spacing of the cross-hatching of DETAIL 2. Click

Xhatching , pick DETAIL 2, and click Done Sel .
7. The MOD XHATCH menu appears with most of the options

unavailable because the cross-hatching of a detailed view is the
same as its parent view by default. Click Det Indep to make the
detailed view independent of its parent view.
8. Click Spacing > Half . If the cross-hatching is acceptable, click

Done > Done/Return .

NOTES
Figure 17: Detailed View Cross-Hatching
9. Save the drawing and close all the windows.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Altering the Display of Views

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.DRW and change the scale of the sheet and
the detailed view. If the views are too close, move them to new positions.
Note:
If you did not finish the barrel drawing earlier, retrieve
BARREL_MOD_VIEWS.DRW.
1. Modify the scale of the sheet .to [1.25].
2. Modify the scale of DETAIL 1 to [2.5].
3. Position the view names directly beneath the views.
Task 2. Modify the cross-hatching in Section A-A, retrieve the cross-

hatching that you saved in the previous exercise and add cross-sectional
arrows to the view in the upper right corner of the sheet.
1. Click Modify > Xhatching . Pick Section A-A and click Done Sel .
2. Click Retrieve > user_def >Open . Click Done from the MOD
XHATCH menu.
3. Click Views > Modify View > Add Arrows . Pick Section A-A and
then pick the upper right view to place the arrows. Click
Done/Return .
4. Move the arrows so that they display as shown in Figure 19.
Figure 19: New Cross-Hatching and Arrows

NOTES
Task 3. Set the display of each view on the drawing so that it is

independent of the environment settings.
1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Select all of the views on
the drawing, then click Done Sel .
2. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done .
3. Save and close the drawing.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Modifying the Scale of Views

NOTES
Task 1. Set the display of each view on the drawing so that it is

independent of the environment settings using UPPER_HOUSING.DRW.
1. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.DRW. (If you did not complete this

drawing, retrieve UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.DRW.)
2. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Pick the two views of the
plunger cap and click Done Sel .
3. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done to display hidden lines in
these views and tangent lines as solid lines.
4. Pick the upper housing views and press the middle mouse button.
Click No Hidden > Tan Phantom > Done .
Task 2. Modify the scale of the views. Move some of the views to a
new sheet and change their positions.
1. Click Dwg Models > Set Model > PLUNGER_CAP >

Done/Return .
2. Click Modify and select the scale value in the lower left corner of
the screen, type [3.00] and click Done/Return to modify the sheet
scale for the plunger cap.
3. Make the UPPER_HOUSING assembly the active model.
4. Change the sheet scale for the upper housing to [1.25].
5. From the DRAWING menu, click Sheets > Switch Sheets , pick
the two plunger cap views and the 3-D assembly view, click Done
Sel > Done > Done/Return .
6. Click Move View and select a view to move. Position the views as
shown in Figure 20.
Task 3. Alter the right side projection of the plunger cap part to include
a cross-section. The cross-section should cut through the center of the part.
After you create the cross-section, change the cross-hatching.
1. Click Views > Modify View > View Type . Pick the right side
projection of the plunger cap part and click Section > Done .
2. If the datum planes do not appear, turn them on. Repaint the
screen.

NOTES
3. Click Full > Total Xsec > Done .
4. Click Create > Planar > Done .
5. Type [B] as the name, select DTM1 as the cutting plane and pick
the left view for the arrows.
Figure 21: Section B-B
6. Turn off the datum planes.
7. Click Modify > Xhatching . Pick Section B-B and click Done Sel .
8. Decrease the default spacing of the cross-hatching by half. Click

Spacing > Half , then click Done .
Task 4. Modify the orientation of the 3-D view of the upper housing
assembly. Retrieve the assembly and spin the model to an appropriate 3-D
view. Save the orientation as a named view and use it in the drawing.
1. Retrieve the UPPER_HOUSING.ASM . (If you retreived the

UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.DRW at the start of this
exercise, retrieve UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.ASM instead.)
2. Spin the model to an orientation similar to the one shown in Figure

22.

NOTES
Figure 22: New 3-D Orientation
3. Click View > Orientation . Expand Saved Views in the

ORIENTATION dialog box to display any saved views. Type [3D]
for the name and click Save > OK .
4. Click Window > Close Window . Click Window > Activate to

activate the drawing window.
5. Click Views > Modify View > Reorient .
6. Pick the upper 3-D assembly view to reorient. From the list of
saved views, select 3D and click Set > OK .
Task 5. Change the explode distances of the components in the upper

housing assembly. Set the preferences to allow the movement of all four
bolts at the same time.
1. Click Mod Expld , select the isometric view, and click Redefine >
Position .
2. Click Preferences, select MOVE MANY, and click Close .
3. Set the direction of movement to be normal to the top of the upper

housing part. From the MOTION REFERENCE drop-down list,
select PLANE NORMAL, click Query Sel , and pick the top surface
of the upper housing, as shown in Figure 23. When the correct
surface highlights, click Accept to finish.

NOTES
Select this top

surface to move
normal to the
plunger assembly
and the bolts
Locate the
plunger assembly
here
Figure 23: Plane Normal Surface
4. Reposition the plunger assembly below the upper housing. Click

Query Sel and pick the plunger assembly inside the cavity of the
upper housing. Click Next until the plunger assembly is selected,
then click Accept > Done Sel . Press the left mouse button and
drag the plunger assembly to a position similar to the one shown in
Figure 24.
Plunger cap
Normal surface
for the plunger Plunger assembly
cap
Figure 24: New Explode Positions in 3-D View
5. Pick the four bolt components and click Done Sel . Press the left
mouse button and drag the bolts to their new position.

NOTES
6. Move the plunger cap as shown in Figure 24. In the MOTION

REFERENCE area of the dialog box, click and pick a suitable
normal surface for the plunger cap.
7. Pick the plunger cap and click Done Sel . Drag the plunger cap to
its new position and press the left mouse button to finish the move.
Click Done Sel > OK .
8. Return to sheet one and move the views so they are evenly spaced
on the drawing. Click Sheets > Previous > Done/Return .
9. Modify the explode distances on the views of the upper housing

assembly. Click Modify View > Mod Expld , then pick the view in
the lower right corner of the drawing.
10. Click Redefine > Position .
11. Click Preferences , select MOVE MANY, and click Close.
Note:
The system does not save the preferences that you use to
modify an exploded view. You must redo the preferences the
next time that you modify explode distances.
12. Set the direction by picking a vertical edge on the plunger body
part. From the MOTION REFERENCE pull-down list select
ENTITY/EDGE, then pick the vertical edge of the plunger body part
Select this edge

for the motion
reference.
Figure 25: Vertical Motion Reference
13. Change the positions of the components as shown in Figure 26.

NOTES
Figure 26: New Explode Positions
Task 6. Modify the explode distances in the lower left view to match the
distances in Section A-A by changing the type of view to a general view
and then back to a projection view. The system recreates the projection
based on the new positions of the components.
1. Click Views > Modify View > View Type . Pick the view in the
lower left corner of the sheet, and click General > Done .
2. Click View Type and pick the same view again.
3. Click Projection > Done . Pick Section A-A as the view from
which to create the projection.
Figure 27: Exploded Projection

NOTES
Task 7. Modify the cross-hatching in Section A-A of the upper housing.

For the plunger part in the upper housing assembly, retrieve a saved cross-
hatching.
1. Click Modify > Xhatching , then pick Section A-A and click Done
Sel .
2. Click Next Xsec until you highlight the cross-hatching in the

upper housing part.
3. Click Spacing from the MOD XHATCH menu. Click Half twice
to decrease the cross-hatching spacing. Click Angle from the
MOD XHATCH menu and select 135 to change the angle of the
cross-hatching.
4. Click Next Xsec to make the plunger cap active. Click Spacing >
Value and type [0.055].
5. Click Next Xsec > Retrieve , select the USER_DEF hatching and
click Open > Done.
Figure 28: Section A-A Cross-Hatching

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can change view location, orientation, and origin.

• You can remove views from a drawing.
• You can modify view boundaries and callouts.

Module
Showing Dimensions
In this module, you learn how to show dimensions in a drawing and
manipulate their display.
Objectives
• Show detail items in a drawing.

• Change the location of dimensions and switch them to other views.
• Convert location dimensions to ordinate.
• Create a hole chart.
Page 5-1
NOTES
DRAWING DETAILS
You can show detail items created in Part mode or Assembly mode on a
drawing, keeping in mind the following:
• It is generally quicker to show a dimension on the drawing and move it

than to recreate the dimension.
• Because of Pro/ENGINEER’s associativity, you can modify the
dimension value at the drawing level and the system reflects it at the
part or assembly level.
• Drawing templates can be used to initially show dimensions, create
snap lines offset from the view border and perform Clean Dimension
operations.
Showing Detail Items

Before you create new dimensions in your drawing, you should show
dimensions (and other detail items) that were created at the part or the
assembly level.
Specifying the Type of Detail Item to Show

The SHOW/ERASE dialog box, as shown in Figure 1, allows you to show
different types of detail items in a drawing. You can show any number of
detail items at one time, but it easier to show one type in the drawing at a
time.

NOTES
Figure 1: Show/Erase Dialog
Specifying Items to Show

• Feature – Shows detail items for a selected feature in a view
determined by the system. This option is useful if you did not build the
model yourself. You can use the MODEL TREE to make sure that you
select every feature.
• View – Shows detail items for a selected view.
• Feat & View – Shows detail items for a selected feature and view. This
option gives you the most control in displaying items.
• Part – Shows detail items in specific parts within an assembly
drawing.
• Part and View – Shows detail items in a specific part and view within
an assembly drawing.
• Show All – Shows all detail items in all views. If you use this method
to show items, you should also preview the drawing.
Note:
When showing part dimensions in an assembly drawing, the
View and Show All options do not display part dimensions.
Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s Pag e 5- 3
NOTES
Using Filtering Options

• Erased – Show only items that have been previously erased from the
drawing, without showing items that have never been shown before
• Never Shown – Show items that have never been shown on the
drawing.
Previewing Detail Items

You can view detail items in the drawing and decide if you want to show
them. You can show all of them, erase all of them, or select individual
items to display.
Manipulating Detail Items

After you show detail items in a drawing, you can erase them, change their
location, and locate them on snap lines.
Erasing Detail Items

To erase dimensions and other detail items from a drawing, you would use
the same technique that you use to show dimensions
Changing the Location

The quickest way to manipulate dimensions and other detail items is to
access the pop-up menu in an asynchronous mode
Using Snap Lines

You can define snap lines on individual drawings to locate detail items
such as dimensions, notes, geometric tolerances, symbols, and surface
finishes. The system positions the snap lines relative to the view outline,
or a selected model edge or datum plane.
You can manipulate snap lines by changing the offset distances,

modifying the length, or deleting them from the drawing.
When working with snap lines, keep in mind the following:
• You can place snap lines on layers and blank them, but once you blank
them, you cannot add new items to them. Existing items continue to
snap.

NOTES
• When you delete a view, the system deletes its snap lines also.
• You cannot add entities of one view to another view’s snap line.
• If you place a dimension at the intersection of two snap lines, you can
snap to either or both of the snap lines.
Changing the Display of Dimensions in a Drawing

Cleaning Up the Display of Dimensions
You can improve or clean up a cluttered display of linear dimensions in a
drawing. You can use this option after you initially display dimensions on
a drawing to move those that are overlapping one another or to move them
off the model itself. You can also use this technique to automatically
locate your dimensions according to exact specifications such as the
following:
• A certain distance away from a view.

• A certain distance away from each other.
• Centered in between the witness lines.
You can also use the CLEAN DIMENSIONS dialog box to flip the
dimension arrows and create snap lines where the dimensions are located.
Note:
The Clean Dims option only affects linear dimensions. You
cannot use it to modify the display of diametric, radial, or
angular dimensions.
Using Dual Dimensioning

Dual dimensioning allows you to show dimensions in English and metric
units at the same time. Through the drawing setup file, you can set the
dimensions to dual and specify their format. The following drawing setup
file options affect dual dimensioning:
• dual_dimensioning
• dual_secondary_unit
• dual_digits_diff
• decimal_marker
• dual_dimension_brackets
NOTES
Placing Dimensions as Ordinate

You can place your dimensions in the drawing as ordinate dimensions or
convert them after you place them. Ordinate dimensions use a single
witness line with no leader, and are associated with a baseline reference,
as shown in Figure 2. When converting dimensions, you can also add a jog
to the witness line to improve the spacing of the dimensions.
Figure 2: Ordinate Dimensions
Changing the Display of Ordinate Dimensions

The drawing setup file option iso_ordinate_delta improves the
display of the offset between an ISO-ordinate dimension and the witness
line. If you set it to yes, the system uses the drawing setup file option
witness_line_delta. If you set it to no, the offset differs by
approximately 2 mm. The default value is no to preserve old drawings. To
specify the orientation of ordinate dimensions, you can set the drawing
setup file option orddim_text_orientation to parallel or
horizontal.
Adding Text to a Dimension

Using the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box, you can add a prefix (R) or
postfix (TYP) to a dimension, and change the dimension symbol. You can
also specify that the system always show the symbol, regardless of the
other dimensions, by changing the dimension text from @D to @S. This
would be useful, for example, if you wanted to indicate the direction of the
width of the model. You could change the symbol to width and specify
that Pro/ENGINEER always show the symbol instead of the value.

NOTES
Manipulating Dimension Arrows and Extension Lines

After you clean up the dimension display on a drawing, you can also
manipulate the arrows and extension lines in the following ways:
• Flip arrows – You can change the direction of linear, radial, and
diametric dimension arrows, as shown in Figure 3.
Arrows flipped
Figure 3: Flipping Arrows

• Clip the extension lines – Pro/ENGINEER automatically determines
if it should clip extension lines when it performs an overlap check
when plotting, as shown in Figure 4. To check if extension lines are
properly clipped, you can plot to the screen.
Figure 4: Clipping Dimensions

• Make jogs – You can jog the extension line of dimensions or the
leader of a note, as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5: Making a Jog

• Add breaks – You can add simple breaks in individual extension lines
and cutting lines as shown in Figure 6, or create parametric breaks
NOTES
around other extension lines so that they update when the model
changes.
Break added around

geometry
Figure 6: Simple Break

• Align sets of dimensions – You can line up sets of dimensions and
move them as a group. This option is very useful when working with
ordinate dimensions.
• Change the dimension type – You can change a diameter dimension
to a linear dimension, or vice versa, as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7: Changing the Diameter Type
• Erase the witness lines – The system automatically displays

dimensions with witness lines, but you can easily remove them to
reduce the clutter, as shown in Figure 8.

NOTES
Figure 8: Line Display

• Change the arrow style – You can remove the dimension arrow, or
change it to a dot, double arrow, slash, integral, or box, as shown in
Figure 9.
Figure 9: Various Arrow Styles
Hole Charts
You can now automatically create hole charts that relate to drawings. In
addition, you can create tables for axes and datum points. This new
functionality automatically creates a table for drillable hole features in a
specified view.
Hole charts include:

• List Type: Holes, Datum Points, Datum Axes
• Location in X and Y coordinates (Z for datum points).
• Sort Setup: X, Y, Diameter, Default.
NOTES
• Hole Naming: Numerical versus Alphanumerical.

• Ability to add additional columns for user-defined parameters.
• Ability to paginate tables.
Figure 10: Hole Chart

NOTES
Goal
To show and manipulate dimension on a drawing.
Method
In the first exercise, dimensions are shown for features in any view and for
features in a selected view. After the dimensions are shown, they are
switched to different views, moved, and the default display is enhanced.
In the second exercise, dimensions are shown in their symbolic form and
the default symbolic name is modified.
In the third exercise, the dimensions on a multi-model and assembly

drawing are displayed as dual dimensions.
Sh o wing Di mens ions Pag e 5- 11

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Showing Dimensions on a Drawing
Figure 11: Plunger Drawing
Task 1. Show dimensions on the plunger body drawing for a selected

feature in any view.

NOTES
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_SHOW_DIMS.DRW.
2. Turn off all datum features.
3. Click Show/Erase . Accept Show, click , and accept

Feature as the Show By option.
4. Show the dimensions for the first protrusion. Click Query Sel and
pick the outside surface of the cylinder in the front view, as shown
in Figure 12.
5. When the system highlights the correct feature, click Accept .
First protrusion
Inside cut
Small hole
Figure 12: Front View
6. Click Query Sel and pick the inside cut in the front view, as
shown in Figure 12. When the system highlights the correct
feature, click Accept .
7. Repeat this for the small hole in the front view.
8. Show the dimensions for the small hole and the flat cut in the
upper left view, as shown in Figure 13.
9. Click Done Sel > Accept All > Close .

NOTES
Small hole
Flat cut
Figure 13: Small Hole
Task 2. Manipulate the dimensions shown by switching them to other

views and changing their location on the sheet.
1. Click Move from the DETAIL menu and pick the .750 dimension
in the front view. Move it to its new position, as shown in Figure
14, and press the left mouse button to place it.
2. Pick the 1.50 dimension. While moving the dimension, press the
right mouse button to flip the arrows. Move it to its new position
as shown in Figure 14 and press the left mouse button to place it.
3. Repeat this for the 1.125 and .250 diameter dimensions.
Figure 14: Dimension Locations
4. Pick the 3.00 dimension. Move it to its new position, as shown in

Figure 14.
5. Repeat this for the .100 and the .300 linear dimensions.

NOTES
6. Click Move Text and pick the .100 linear dimension to move the
text to the other side of the elbow.
7. Click Move and pick the .100 diameter dimension. Move it to its
new position, as shown in Figure 14 and press the left mouse
button to place it.
8. To move the dimension text to the other side of the leader, click
Move Text and pick the dimension.
9. Switch the remaining dimensions in the lower left view to Section

A-A. Click Switch View and pick both dimensions. Press the
middle mouse button and pick Section A-A.
10. Once you have moved the dimensions to the new view, reposition
them as shown in Figure 14.
11. Click Flip Arrows and pick the remaining dimensions as necessary
so the drawing looks like Figure 14.
Task 3. Show dimensions for a selected feature in a selected view on the

drawing.
1. Click Show/Erase and select Feat_View .
2. Show the dimensions for the holes in Section B-B. Click Query
Sel from the menu and pick the surface of the through hole. Click
Accept when the correct feature highlights.
3. Repeat this for the counterbore hole in Section B-B, as shown in

Figure 15.
Counterbore hole
Through hole
Figure 15: Section B-B

NOTES
4. Click Query Sel from the menu and pick the surface of the tab
from DETAIL 1, as shown in Figure 16. Click Next until the correct
feature highlights, then click Accept .
5. Repeat the previous step for the surface of the round in DETAIL 1,
as shown in Figure 16. Click Done Sel > Sel To Remove . Pick the
.500 dimension. Click Done Sel to finish the selections.
6. Clear the With Preview check box.
Tab
Round
Figure 16: DETAIL 1
Task 4. Use the asynchronous pop-up menu to move the dimensions

displayed in Section B-B and DETAIL 1 to the locations shown in
Figure 17.
1. Press the right mouse button, click Modify Item , and pick a
dimension.

NOTES
2. Experiment with the dimension handles that are available for the
different dimension types.
3. Display the .05-radius dimension on the other side of the tab.

While the asynchronous pop-up menu is still active, pick the .05
dimension.
4. Press the right mouse button and click Mod Attach . The system
displays all possible locations in magenta. Pick the round surface
on the other side of the tab and press the middle mouse button to
finish.
5. Move the dimension to the correct position and click Flip Arrows
to display the arrows correctly. Press the middle mouse button to
exit the asynchronous pop-up menu.
6. Move and flip the arrows on the remain dimension for DETAIL 1
and SECTION B-B so the drawing looks like Figure 17.
Task 5. Show the dimensions for the flanges in the upper left view.
1. Click Show/Erase > Show > . Select FEAT_VIEW. Pick

the flange shown in Figure 18 to show the dimension, then close
the dialog box.
Pick this flange

to display
Pick this dimensions
witness line
as the
baseline
Figure 18: Flange Dimensions
2. Move the dimensions to the positions shown in Figure 18 using the

techniques discussed earlier.
3. Click Switch View to display the .05 thickness dimension in

DETAIL 2, then reposition it as shown in Figure 18.

NOTES
4. If the witness lines are extending too far, clip them back. Click
Clip and pick the .05 dimension.
5. Press the middle mouse button to finish selecting. Drag one of the
witness lines to a more appropriate position and use the left mouse
button to place it.
6. Repeat the previous step for the second witness line.
Task 6. Convert the .650 and 1.700 dimensions in the upper left view to
ordinate.
1. Click Modify > Dim Params > Dim Type > Ordinate Dim .
2. Accept the default of Create Base and pick the 1.700 dimension.
Specify a baseline by picking the witness line on the left side.
3. Pick the .650 dimension to convert it to ordinate.
4. Show the dimensions for the other flanges as ordinate dimensions.

Click the Options tab and select SWITCH TO ORDINATE.
5. Pick the .00 as the ordinate baseline dimension and press the
middle mouse button to finish. Pick each flange to display the
dimensions as ordinate. Close the dialog box.
6. Click Align and pick each ordinate dimension. Use the middle
mouse button to finish selecting and place the dimension above the
view.
7. Create a draft grid to locate some jog points. Click Modify > Grid
> Draft Grid > Grid On .
8. Click Grid Params > X&Y Spacing and type [.2].
9. To turn the grid snap on, click Utilities > Environment . In the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box, select Snap to Grid and click OK .
10. Create jogs in the ordinate dimensions to increase the space

between them. Click Make Jog and pick the .650 dimension. Pick
a point on the witness line to start the jog and another to finish it.
11. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the jog. Create
jogs on the ordinate dimensions as shown in Figure 19.

NOTES
Note:
Once you have created jogs, you can use the Move option to
change the locations of the points.
Figure 19: Ordinate Jog Locations
12. Turn off the grid and the grid snap. Click Modify> Grid > Draft
Grid > Grid Off > Done/Return to turn off the grid.
13. Click Utilities > Environment , then clear the Snap to Grid check
box and click OK .
Task 7. Show dimensions for any feature in a selected view only, then
use the Clean Dims option to clean up the dimension display quickly.
1. Click Show/Erase then select View for the SHOW BY option.
2. Pick the view in the upper left corner and the view in the lower left
corner of the drawing. Close the dialog box.
3. Clean the dimension display by moving the dimensions off of the

views and one another. Click Tools > Clean Dims .

NOTES
4. Pick the upper and lower left views as the views to clean. Press the
middle mouse button to finish selecting.
5. Click Apply to apply the default settings and close the dialog box.
6. Using the options that you used earlier in this exercise, manipulate
the dimensions so that they display as shown in Figure 20. You
must erase some of them.
7. Click Erase and select SELECTED ITEMS for the Erase By

option. Pick the dimensions to erase, then click Close .
Tips & Techniques:

When you place a dimension near two snap lines, the system
prompts you to specify a snap line to which it should snap the
dimension. You can use the Next option to highlight one or
both snap lines and then click Accept .
Task 8. Append text to the dimensions in DETAIL 2 to annotate them

as being typical.
1. Click Modify > Dimension , then pick the .050 and .125
dimensions in DETAIL 2. Click Done Sel to finish selecting.

NOTES
2. Click the Dim Text tab, then type [ TYP] in the POST FIX area.
3. Click OK .
4. Click Delete from the DETAIL menu and pick any unused snap
lines.
5. Click Done Sel to finish.
6. Turn off the display of the snap lines. Click Utilities >
Environment . Clear the Snap Lines check box, click OK to close
the dialog box and repaint the screen.
Note:
The system does not plot snap lines, regardless of whether they
display on the screen.
Task 9. Show the datum axes for the holes on the drawing, and then
manipulate them to display them in the correct sizes.
1. Show axes by view. Click Show/Erase > Show > . Click

if it is currently selected. Select View for the SHOW BY
option. Click the Preview tab and click With Preview .
2. Pick the upper left view, then click Accept All .
3. Pick Section B-B. The system shows two axes, one on top of the
other. Click Sel To Keep , pick one of the axes to retain, and click
Done Sel .
4. Pick DETAIL 1 and click Accept All .
5. Show the axes for the first protrusion. Select Feature for the
SHOW BY option, pick the first feature protrusion listed in the
MODEL TREE, then click Done Sel .
6. Click Sel To Remove and pick the axes in the 3-D view.
7. Show the axes for the tabs in the front view and the left side view.
Select Feat_View for the SHOW BY option, pick the two tabs
displayed in the front view, and click Done Sel . Click Accept All
to retain the displayed axes.
8. Repeat this for the axes of the tabs in the left side view.

NOTES
9. Show the axes for the .100 diameter hole in Section A-A and the
left side view. Pick the hole and click Done Sel . Pick Section A-A
as the view in which to show the axes and click Accept All to
show them.
10. Repeat the previous step for the left side view. Turn off the
preview, click the Preview tab and clear the With Preview check
box. Close the dialog box.
11. Manipulate the lengths of the axis segments in the front view.
Click Move and pick the segment of the axis that you want to
move. Place the axis in the new position. Notice that you only
moved one segment.
Tips & Techniques:

To move all four segments of an axis perpendicular to the
screen, click Move and pick the name of the axis. The system
moves all four segments together.
12. Use the techniques discussed previously to change the lengths of

the axes on the drawing as shown in Figure 21 to turn off the
display of the axis names and repaint the screen.
Figure 21: Axis Locations

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Showing Dimensions in Symbolic

Form

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.DRW. Show the dimensions of the barrel by

using the Show All option, then switch them to the correct views.
Note:
BARREL_SHOW_DIMS.DRW.
1. Click Show > from the SHOW/ERASE dialog box. If

necessary un-select the axes icon. Select Show All from the SHOW
BY area. When the system asks you to confirm, click Yes , then
close the dialog box.
Note:
When you use Show All , Pro/ENGINEER attempts to show
the dimensions in the first view that you created on the
drawing. If it cannot show a dimension in that view, it then
attempts to show it in the second view, etc.
2. Switch the dimensions for the oval cut to DETAIL 1. Click Switch
View and pick the .10 and the 1.38 radius dimensions. Press the
middle mouse button to finish selecting, and pick the DETAIL 1
view. Note that the dimensions move to DETAIL 1, but they are
attached to a pattern instance outside of the view’s boundary.
3. Click Erase from the SHOW/ERASE dialog box and click

Selected Items . Pick the .10 and the 1.38 radius dimensions and
click Done Sel .
4. Show the cut dimensions in DETAIL 1. Click Show and select

Feat_View , then pick the oval cut in DETAIL 1. Close the dialog
box, then move the dimensions to the positions shown in
Figure 23.

NOTES
Figure 23: DETAIL 1 Dimension Locations
5. Switch the dimensions for the patterned holes to the view on the
right side of the drawing. Click Switch View and pick the 1.25,
.75, and 72.0 dimensions. Press the middle mouse button to finish
selecting, then pick the view on the right. Reposition the
dimensions as shown in Figure 24.

NOTES
6. From the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, click Erase > , and

accept Selected Items to erase the 90.0 dimension from the
drawing. Pick the 90.0 dimension.
7. Click Done Sel > Close to finish.
8. Reposition the remaining dimensions as shown in Figure 25.
Note:
The system does not display the width of the barrel and the
hole depth dimensions because it cannot show dimensions in
align cross-sections, and no other view is suitable for those
dimensions.
Task 2. Set part of the dimension to display in symbolic form, then

change the symbolic names of the dimensions so that they are more
meaningful.
1. Click Modify > Dimension , then pick the .75, and 4.00
dimensions. Press the middle mouse button to finish.
2. Click the Dim Text tab from the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box
to change the dimension text for the selected dimensions.
3. In the text area, remove the diameter symbol and change the @D
to an @S. Click OK to close the dialog box.

NOTES
4. Pick the dimension D7 in the upper right view and click Done Sel
to change the names of the displayed symbols.
5. From the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box, click the Dim Text tab
and type [CYLINDER_DIA] for the name.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box. Repeat this step to change D2 to

[BARREL_DIA].
Task 3. Show the datum axes for the holes on the drawing and then
manipulate them.
1. Click Show > from the SHOW/ERASE dialog box. Select

View from the SHOW BY area.
2. Pick the right side, left side, and DETAIL 1 views. Close the
dialog box.
3. Click Advanced > Draw Setup to change the axes to display at an

angled orientation with a pattern circle.
4. In the drawing setup file, change the setting of

radial_pattern_axis_circle to yes and click OK .
Repaint the screen to view the changes, as shown in Figure 26.
Figure 26: Axis Locations

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Displaying Dual Dimensions

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.DRW. Show the dimensions of

the end cap by using the By Feat option and selecting the features from
the MODEL TREE.
Note:
If you did not finish the upper housing drawing earlier, retrieve
UPPER_HOUSING_SHOW_DIMS.DRW.
1. Open the drawing and switch to sheet 2.
2. Click Views > Dwg Models > Set Model > PLUNGER_CAP to set
the plunger cap as the active model.
3. Click Show and ensure is the only item selected. Click

Show All > Yes > Accept All . Close the dialog box.
4. Click Tools > Clean Dims and pick the two views of the plunger
cap to clean the dimension display by moving them off the model.
5. Click Done Sel . Accept the default options and click Apply >
Close .
6. Reposition the dimensions as shown in Figure 28.

NOTES
Task 2. Show some dimensions of the parts in the upper housing

assembly and move them to other locations.
1. Switch back to Sheet 1.
2. Click Show > from the SHOW/ERASE dialog box. Select

PART_VIEW and pick the left bolt in the lower left view.
3. Select FEAT_VIEW and pick the outside surface of the plunger and
the tab on the upper housing in the lower right view.
4. Erase any dimensions that do not appear in Figure 29. Click Erase
then pick the dimensions. Click Done Sel to finish and close the
dialog box.
Figure 29: Showing Part Dimensions
Task 3. Convert the dimensions on this drawing to dual dimensions so

that you can display English and metric values for each dimension.
1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup to retrieve the drawing setup file.
2. For dual_dimensioning, select

PRIMARY[SECONDARY]from the VALUE drop down list.
Click Add/Change > OK .
3. Repaint the screen if needed.
4. Clean up the dimension display by moving dimensions, if

necessary.

NOTES
Figure 30: The Finished Drawing

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can show detail items in a drawing.

• You can change the location of dimensions and switch them to other
views.
• You can convert location dimensions to ordinate.

Module
Creating Dimensions
In this module you learn how to create various types of dimensions.
Objectives
• Create driven, reference and draft dimensions.

• Modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.
Page 6-1
NOTES
ADDING DIMENSIONS TO A DRAWING

Creating Driven Dimensions
If you want to view a specific dimension on a particular feature you can
create a driven dimension, which is driven by the model geometry and
reflects changes in the model. When you add them to a drawing, they do
not alter the design intent of the model and you cannot modify them.
Ordinate Dimensions
Ordinate dimensions can drive the model or the model can drive the
dimension. Pro/ENGINEER displays them in a drawing using a single
witness line without a leader. The system associates ordinate dimensions
with a baseline reference of .00. For all dimensions to reference the same
baseline, they must share a common plane or edge that you can use as a
baseline reference. You can erase the baseline reference from the drawing
to improve the appearance. You can also delete it if none of the drawing
dimensions are using it and you do not need it any longer.
Creating a Baseline Reference

You must have a baseline reference to show ordinate dimensions in your
drawing. To create a baseline, you must convert a linear dimension to
ordinate and pick one of its witness lines as the baseline reference. You
can then use it to show new dimensions in an ordinate form.
Tips & Techniques:

If a suitable baseline already exists, you can use it to convert
dimensions to ordinate. If you create another baseline on top of
an existing one, the system displays both of them on the
drawing.
You can convert dimensions that are already showing on the drawing to
ordinate, as well as convert ordinate dimensions back to linear at any time.
However, when converting ordinate dimensions back to linear, the system
does not automatically remove the baseline for that dimension from the
drawing. You must delete it manually.

NOTES
Driven Ordinate Dimensions

You can create a driven dimension in an ordinate form initially by using
an existing dimension to create the baseline. You can then use this
baseline to create any new driven dimensions as ordinate.
Note:
You can change a standard driven dimension to ordinate, but
you cannot convert an ordinate driven dimension back to
standard. To do this, you must delete it and create it again as a
standard dimension.
Creating Reference Dimensions

Reference dimensions behave in the same manner as driven dimensions
except that they do not show tolerances. You can denote a reference
dimension with parentheses ( ) or by appending REF after the dimension
value.
In some cases, reference dimensions already exist in the model. The

system automatically displays them when you use the SHOW/ERASE
dialog box to show dimensions. You can create new reference dimensions
at the part level by using the Setup option in the PART menu. If you
create them by setting up named views in the model, you can show the
reference dimensions in their true size.
Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme

To change the design intent of the model while in Drawing mode, you can
modify the dimensioning scheme of the model. You can modify the
dimensioning scheme, the shape of the section (of sketched features only),
the depth type, the feature’s direction, etc.
Any dimensions that you deleted from the feature’s section disappear from
the drawing. However, you must actually show any dimensions that you
created in the section; the system does not display them automatically.
Creating Draft Dimensions

Using the method to create driven dimensions, you can also create
reference, associative, or non-associative draft dimensions on a drawing to
C reat ing Dim ensio ns Pag e 6- 3

NOTES
dimension draft entities. The system displays reference draft dimensions

and reference dimensions in the same way.
Associative Draft Dimensions

To create an associative draft dimension, you can use one of the following
three methods:
• Set the drawing setup file option Associative Dimensioning

to Yes and pick draft entities to dimension.
• Set the configuration file option
Create_Drawing_Dimensions_Only to Yes and pick model
entities to dimension.
• Set the configuration file option Drawing_Models_Read_Only to
Yes and pick model entities to dimension.
Note:
If the dimensions are non-associative, you must perform the
procedures on them individually. If you move or rescale the
draft entity, the system does not update the dimension or move
it with the draft entity.
When a draft dimension is associative, you can perform the following

procedures on a draft entity and its dimension at the same time:
• Delete items.
• Switch items to another sheet.
• Translate and rotate items.
• Rescale items, including changing drawing format size.

Table 1 lists the available configuration file options that affect the creation
of dimensions on a drawing.

NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Dimension

Creation
create_fraction_dim no If set to yes, displays all
yes dimensions as fractions.
create_drawing_dims_only no If set to yes, stores
yes dimensions that you create
in the drawing in the actual
drawing. If set to no, stores
them in the part.
drawing_models_read_ no Makes the model in a
only yes drawing read-only.
Highlight_new_dims yes Highlights newly-created
no dimension in red; good for
drawings with many dims
parenthesize_ref_dims no If set to yes, displays
yes reference dimensions
within parentheses. If set
to no, appends the
dimension with REF.

NOTES
Goal
To create driven and reference dimensions on a drawing and modify the
dimensioning scheme of the model.
Method
In the first exercise, you learn how to create dimensions on a drawing and
learn when it is appropriate to do so. You erase some model dimensions
and create some driven dimensions. You also modify the dimensioning
scheme to change the design intent of the model.
In the second exercise, you modify the dimensioning scheme of the barrel
from within the drawing and show any new dimensions on the drawing.

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Dimensions on a Drawing
Figure 1: Plunger Drawing
Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW as shown in Figure 1, and

create a reference dimension for the cut in the upper left view. If you did
not finish the plunger body drawing earlier, retrieve
PLUNGER_BODY_CREATE_DIMS.DRW.
1. If the datum planes, datum coordinate systems, and axis names

appear on the screen, turn them off.
2. Select Create > Ref Dim and pick the edge shown in Figure 2 with
the black end of the pointer. Locate the dimension by pressing the
middle mouse button. Use Move to reposition it, if necessary.

NOTES
Select this edge

to dimension
Place
dimension
here
Figure 2: Reference Dimension
Task 2. Change the dimensioning scheme in the lower left view to

accommodate manufacturing needs.
1. Select SHOW/ERASE. Select Erase > to erase the

dimensions from the drawing that you no longer need, to avoid
changing the design intent of the part.
2. Pick the .300 dimension in the lower left view and the 1.750
dimension in the upper left view. Select Done Sel to finish
selecting and close the dialog box. This will remove these
parametric dimensions from view.
3. Move the .500 dimension on the left side of the upper left view to
the lower left view. Select Switch View and pick the .500
dimension. Press the middle mouse button to finish selecting, and
pick the lower left view as the view in which to display the
dimension.
4. Convert the .500 and 3.000 dimensions in the lower left view to
ordinate. Select Modify > Dim Params > Dim Type >Ordinate
Dim and pick the 3.000 dimension. Pick the left side witness line
as the baseline, as shown in Figure 3. Pick the .500 dimension to
convert it, as well.

NOTES
Select this
as the
baseline
Figure 3: Converting to Ordinate Dimension
5. From the DETAIL menu, select Align > Pick Many and create a
pick box around the two dimensions and the baseline to align the
ordinate dimensions. Press the middle mouse button to finish
selecting, then place the dimensions.
6. Select Create > Dimension > Ordinate and pick the .00 baseline
that you already created to create driven dimensions to locate the
cuts in the lower left view, as shown in Figure 4.
7. Pick the edge of the flat cut and press the middle mouse button
where you want to display the dimension. Pick the second edge
and press the middle mouse button where you want to display that
dimension.
8. Select Align from the DETAIL menu and align all of the ordinate
dimensions
Select this dimension
for the first driven Select this edge for
dimension reference the second driven
dimension reference.
.
Figure 4: Creating Ordinate Dimensions

NOTES
Task 3. To accommodate a change in the design intent, dimension the

tabs on the open end of the plunger body from the other tabs. Modify the
dimensioning scheme on the model and show any new dimensions on the
drawing.
1. Select Modify > Dim Params > Scheme . Select Query Sel and
pick the tab shown in Figure 5.
2. Select Next until the tab highlights, then select Accept . A sub-
window appears along with the dialog box for the tab elements.
Modify the
scheme of this
tab first
Modify the
scheme of this
tab second
Figure 5: Modify Dimensioning Scheme
3. Select SECTION and select Define . Select Sketch. Close any

information windows that appear.
4. Select Utilites > Sketcher Preferences , clear the Grid check box
and apply changes to turn off the sketcher grid display.
5. Select View > Default to change to the default view.
6. Select Sketch > Dimension >Normal and pick the center of the
sketched arc to create a new dimension to locate the tab to the
other tab on the left side of the model
7. Pick the cylindrical surface of the other tab on the front of the
model and place the dimension with the middle mouse button.
Select Center and Close from the TYPE dialog box. Delete the
.50 dimension.
8. Select Sketch > Done and OK to finish the section. Repaint the
drawing to show the changes.

NOTES
Note:
The .500 location dimension disappeared from the drawing
because you deleted it. The system does not automatically
show the new dimension. To display it, you must show it
again.
9. Repeat the procedure for the tab in DETAIL 1. After changing the
dimensioning scheme of the second tab, show the new dimension
on the drawing.
10. Select Show > and select FEAT_VIEW, then pick the tab
shown in Figure 6. Close the dialog box and move the dimension
Show dimensions
for this tab
Figure 6: New Dimensioning Scheme

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme
Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.DRW. The dimensioning scheme of the

radial holes in the barrel includes a linear dimension from the center axis
to the axis of the radial hole. Change the design intent to use a diameter
dimension instead.
Note:
BARREL_CREATE_DIMS.DRW.

NOTES
1. Select Modify > Dim Params > Scheme to change the

dimensioning scheme of the hole pattern from a linear dimension
to a bolt circle diameter
2. Select Query Sel and pick the hole shown in Figure 8.
3. Select Next until the hole is highlighted, then select Accept . A

sub-window appears along with the dialog box for the hole.
Modify the
scheme of this
hole
Figure 8: Hole Dimensioning Scheme
4. From the dialog box select Diameter for the PLACEMENT TYPE
drop-down menu. Select the green checkmark to accept.
Task 2. Create two driven dimensions in Section A-A for the barrel
width and hole depth.
1. Select Create > Dimension . Accept the defaults, then pick the
bottom edge of the barrel in Section A-A. Press the middle mouse
button where you want to display the dimension.
2. Pick the horizontal edge of one of the blind holes and press the
middle mouse button to place the dimension. Use Move to
reposition the dimension, if necessary.
3. Select Modify > Dimension then pick the 2.50 diameter dimension
and click Done Sel to change the dimension text that appears for
the new diameter dimensions.

NOTES
4. From the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box, select the DIM TEXT
tab. In the text area, remove the diameter symbol and change the
@D to @S. In the NAME area, type [CENTERLINE_DIA], then
close the dialog box.
5. Reposition the CENTERLINE_DIA dimension as shown in

Figure 9.
6. Select Create > Dimension and pick the axes shown in Figure 9
to create a driven dimension for the location of the patterned holes.
Use the middle mouse button to place the dimension and reposition
it, if necessary.
Pick this axis

from which to
dimension
Pick this axis from

which to
dimension
Figure 9: Angle Dimension

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create driven, reference and draft dimensions.

• You can modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.

Module
Creating Notes
In this module, you learn how to create a drawing note, add it to a
drawing, and manipulate it in various ways. You also learn how to
use style libraries to store text styles for your drawings.
Objectives
• Create notes on a drawing.

• Manipulate drawing notes.
• Use style libraries to store text styles.
Page 7-1
NOTES
ADDING NOTES TO A DRAWING

A drawing note is text that you add to a drawing as supporting
information.
Specifying the Content of a Note

Drawing notes are composed of text. You can include parametric
information in notes.
Dimensions and System-Defined Parameters

When you add model, reference, or driven dimensions, as well as system-
defined parameters (number of instances in a pattern) to a drawing note,
the system updates the note to reflect any changes that you make to the
associated model design. After you create a note in Pro/ENGINEER, the
dimensions and parameters automatically convert to their symbolic form.
User-Defined Parameters
To associate specific information to a model (such as the color, cost, or
vendor), you can create a user-defined parameter at the part, assembly, or
drawing level. To place a user-defined parameter in a drawing note, you
must precede the name of the parameter with an ampersand (for example,
&total_holes).
Drawing Labels
You can use the following drawing labels in a note, preceded by an
ampersand:
• &todays_date – Adds the date of the note’s creation. To control the

format of the date, set the configuration file option
todays_date_note_format.
• &model_name – Adds the name of the model used in the drawing.
• &dwg_name – Adds the name of the drawing.
• &scale – Adds the scale of the drawing.
• &type – Adds the model type (part or assembly).
• &format – Adds the format size.

NOTES
• &linear_tol_0_0 through &linear_tol_0_000000 – Adds linear

tolerance values for one to six decimal places.
• &angular_tol_0_0 through &angular_tol_0_000000 – Adds angular
tolerance values for one to six decimal places.
• &current_sheet – Adds the current sheet number.
• &total_sheets – Adds the total number of sheets in the drawing.
• &dtm_name – Adds the name of a datum plane.
User-Defined Symbols
You can add a user-defined symbol to a note such as electronic symbol or
welding symbols by entering [&sym(symbol_name)]. For example, to
include the symbol delta in a note, enter [&sym(delta)] using the
keyboard.
Special Symbols
You can add common drawing symbols to a note by selecting them from
the Symbol Palette tool displayed on your screen during the note creation
process.
Manipulating Notes
Once you have placed a note on a drawing, you can change it in various
ways.
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Notes

You can manipulate detail items using the Cut , Copy, and Paste
commands. These commands use a clipboard to allow a variety of detail
items, such as notes, symbols, draft entities, and tables to be copied to the
same sheet, a different sheet, or a different drawing.
The Cut , Copy, and Paste commands are located under the new EDIT
menu, or you can place them on the toolbar by customizing the screen.
Moving a Note
Using various techniques, you can change the location of a note in a
drawing at any time, depending on the note type. To move a free note or
one that has a standard leader, you can use the Move option to select the
C reat ing Note s Pag e 7- 3

NOTES
note text and move it to any location. If you created the note with a normal
or tangent leader, the system constrains the note leader to a particular
orientation, so when you select the text, you can only move it along the
leader line. To rotate the note, you must modify the attachment of the
arrow. Since the arrow must stay normal or tangent to the entity, if you
move the arrow, the note moves with it.
The quickest way to move a note is to access the pop-up menu in

asynchronous mode. Hold down the right mouse button and pick the note.
The system displays it in magenta and surrounds it with small "handles"at
various locations. Each handle represents a particular movement, as
illustrated in Figure 1. Press the right mouse button again to display a pop-
up menu of available options. The default option is Move .
Move
attachment
point of arrow
Move text
without moving
Free movement
Figure 1: Asynchronous Move
Changing the Content of a Note

You can use the following methods to change the text that composes a
note:
• Modify one line of text at a time – You can change a selected line of
text in the message area, but you cannot add or delete text lines in the
note.
• Modify the entire note through the system editor – Using the
system editor, you can modify an entire note, add lines, delete lines, or
change the content of any text line.
• Modify the entire note through an editor in Pro/ENGINEER –
Using the editor provided with Pro/ENGINEER, accessed through the
asynchronous menu, you can add lines, remove lines, or change the
content of any text line. You can also access the Symbol Palette tool,
eliminating the need to use ASCII character representations for
symbols.

NOTES
Attaching the Leader to Multi-Line Text

You can attach the note leader to any line of text by entering the
placeholder parameter @o (alphabetic character, not zero) at the beginning
of that line, as shown in Figure 2. Once you add this placeholder to a line,
the leader automatically attaches to that line. You can add the parameter to
the line as you create the note or add it later. If you add @o to more than
one line of note text, the system attaches the leader to the first line
containing it.
@o added to the
beginning of the
second line
Figure 2: Leader Attachment
Entering Superscripted and Subscripted Text

To add superscripted and subscripted text to a note, you can create it
separately or include it in a text line with regular text on either side of it.
However, you can superscript or subscript only plain text and special
symbols; you cannot do so with dimensions, instance numbers, other
parameter values, or geometric tolerances. The system positions
superscripted and subscripted text by reference to the closest line of
regular text, whether that text belongs to another note, or to the note that
you are currently creating.
• To create superscripted text, enter [@+text@#].
• To create subscripted text, enter [@-text@#].
• To create both super- and subscripted text, enter: [@+text@#@-

text@#]

NOTES
Creating a Box Around a Note

You can enclose a note in a box by entering [@[text@]] The system
encloses only the text that you enclose in the bracket. If you place the
brackets on different text lines, it encloses a box around each line, as
shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3: Boxed Note
Modifying the Text Style

Once you have placed a note on a drawing, you can change its text style.
However, Pro/ENGINEER sometimes selects more than just the text that
you specifically pick. For example, if you choose one word in the first line
of the note, the entire line might highlight because Pro/ENGINEER
separates the note into text fields that you can manipulate them separately
from the rest of the note, as shown in Figure 4. The system breaks up text
strings into portions wherever there is a new line of text or a parameter
(such as dimensions), and encloses each portion of the text in {} (braces),
giving it an integer label. Labels identify the initial order of the text, and
any attributes for that portion.
∅ 1.50 THROUGH HOLE {0:^An^B}{1:&d23}{2

:THROUGH HOLE}
ONE PLACE {3:ONE PLACE}
Figure 4: Text Fields
To break the note into smaller fields, you can add braces and an integer
label. When editing text or adding more lines, you can copy the attributes
of a portion of text by using the same integer label. If you do not want to
copy the attributes of any existing lines, use an integer label that you have
not used already.
The system separates the attributes that you can define into two groups:
those that only affect the selected fields and those that affect the entire
note, as shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Text Style Attributes

Attributes Affecting Attributes Affecting
Selected Fields the Entire Note

NOTES
Text font Line spacing

Text height Placement angle
Text thickness Justification
Text width Color
Slant angle Mirroring
Underlining
Saving Notes
To avoid having to retype standard notes, you can save them for future use
in other drawings. Using the configuration file option pro_note_dir,
you can set up a library of standard notes that contain parameters, special
symbols, and super- or subscripted text. However, you cannot include
information concerning characteristics such as text height, text width, text
angle, and slant angle. You must change this information manually after
placing the note. You can save a note using one of these methods:
• Use the same editor that you are using to modify it, but be sure to save
it as plain text with a .txt extension.
• Use the INFO pull-down menu at the top of the Pro/ENGINEER main
window to write it to a file. The system saves each selected note as a
separate file. When specifying the filename, do not add the
extension—Pro/ENGINEER automatically appends a .1 to a unique
filename. If you type the same filename, it increments this extension
automatically to avoid overwriting an existing file.
Creating Style Libraries

You often apply the same text style to many detail items on a drawing. To
save time, you should store predefined styles in a style library so that you
do not have to specify attributes each time that you begin a new drawing.
To define a style, you specify a name and attributes such as font, text
height, slant angle, etc. Pro/ENGINEER allows you to set up libraries on a
drawing-by-drawing basis; that is, you cannot use a style library on more
than one drawing. To use a style library from one drawing on another
drawing, you can either use a table that has text using the different styles,
or you can use a start drawing.
Using Tables to Access Styles

To use a style library from another drawing, create a table in a drawing
that uses the styles and save it; then retrieve it into the second drawing.
Once you have brought the table into the second drawing, you can use its

NOTES
styles. You should then place the table on a layer and blank it so that it
does not show on the drawing.

Table 2 lists the available configuration file options that control drawing
notes.
Table 2: Configuration File Options Affecting Note Creation

pro_note_dir directory_path Specifies a directory from which
to retrieve notes.
switch_dims_for_notes yes Displays dimensions in their
no symbolic format during drawing
note creation.
symbol_palette_input yes Controls display of the special
no symbol palette for note creation.

Table 3 lists the available drawing setup file options that control drawing
notes.
Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Note Creation

aux_font 1 filled Sets the auxiliary text font “#” as
# font index name the font identified in the
specified font index. Example:
“2 leroy”
default_font font Sets the default text font to those
font index name listed in the specified font index.
draw_attach_sym_height default Sets the height of leader line
value slashes, integral signs, and boxes.
If set to “default,” uses the value
set for “draw_arrow_width.”
draw_attach_sym_width default Sets the width of leader line for
value slashes, integral signs, and boxes.
If set to “default,” uses the value
set for “draw_arrow_width.”

NOTES
draw_dot_diameter default Sets the diameter of leader line

value dots. If set to “default,” uses the
value set for
“draw_arrow_width.”
yes_no_parameter_ yes_no Controls the display of “yes/no”
display true_false parameters in notes.

NOTES
Goal
To create and manipulate drawing notes.
Method
In the first exercise, you create parametric notes on the plunger body
drawing and manipulate the text style of other notes on the drawing.
In the second exercise, you add a prefix to the increment angle between
holes and also use a parameter to display the number of holes in the view
note.
EXERCISE 1: Creating Notes on a Drawing

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and create a note for the

holes in Section B-B. The note should include the diameter of the through
hole and the diameter and depth of the counterbore.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_CREATE_NOTES.DRW.
1. Create a note with a standard leader for the holes in Section B-B.
Click Create > Note > Leader > Make Note .
2. Accept the attachment defaults by clicking Done .
3. Pick the left side edge of the through hole in Section B-B.
4. Click Done Sel > Done . Locate the note as shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6: Note for Holes
5. Select the symbols from the SYMBOL PALETTE window and type
the text as shown in Figure 7. For example, you would enter &d63
to have the .100 diameter dimension appear.
Figure 7: Parametric Note Text

NOTES
6. Click Done/Return .
7. Change the note below Section B-B to include the word PARTIAL
in the second line. Hold down the right mouse button and click
Modify Item .
8. Pick the note below Section B-B. Hold down the right mouse
button again and click Edit Text .
9. In the ENTER TEXT dialog box, press the left mouse button at the
end of the first line, press <ENTER>, and type [PARTIAL] to add
the word PARTIAL in the second line of the note.
10. Click OK and press the middle mouse button to finish modifying
the note.
Task 2. Change existing text styles to generate your own libraries.

Create a new text style to use for the cross-section names.
1. Click Modify > Text > Style Lib then click New .
2. Type [sections] for the style name.
3. From the FONT drop-down list, select Filled .
4. For the height, clear the default check box and type [.25].
5. Type [15 ] for the slant angle.
6. Specify the justification for the text by selecting CENTER from the
JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list.
7. Click OK and then close the TEXT STYLE LIBRARY dialog box.
Task 3. Modify the text style for the word Section in the view notes.
1. Click Text Style and pick the word Section in the view notes for
Sections A-A and B-B. Click Done Sel .
2. From the STYLE NAME drop-down list, select SECTIONS. Select

Apply > OK to make the changes.
Task 4. Define a new text style by copying the text style that you just
created.
1. Click Style Lib > New .

NOTES
2. Type [sect_names] in the STYLE NAME area.
3. From the STYLE NAME drop-down list, select SECTIONS to copy

the settings.
4. Type [.35] in the HEIGHT text box. Click OK > Close .
Task 5. Modify the text style for the view names for Sections A-A and
B-B.
1. Click Text Style and pick A-A and B-B in the view notes for these
sections. Click Done Sel . From the STYLE NAME drop-down list,
select SECT_NAMES. Click Apply > OK .
2. Reposition the notes directly beneath the corresponding views.

Click Move and pick the view name Section A-A. Center it
beneath the view.
3. Repeat this for Section B-B.
Task 6. Create a note by reading in an existing text file from a library of

standard notes. Locate the note in the lower left corner of the drawing.
Change text in the first line of the note.
1. Click Create > Note > No Leader > File > Make Note.
2. Place the note in the lower left corner of the drawing.
3. Select note.txt. The note appears on the drawing. Click

Done/Return. Reposition the note, if necessary.
4. Click Modify, Text > Text Line to change the radius value in the
note. Pick the line of the note that includes the 0.10 callout. The
note appears in the message area.
5. Backspace over the 0.10”and type [0.15] in its place.
Task 7. Modify the view note for DETAIL 1. Add a new line that calls
out the number of places in which the tab exists on the model. Make the
note center-justified.
1. Click Modify > Text > Full Note .
2. Pick the view note for DETAIL 1. The system displays the note in
the system editor.

NOTES
3. Add a third line to the note and type [4 PLACES]. Close the editor
to finish the note.
Tips & Techniques:

Instead of using the Full Note option to add a new line, you
could use the Edit Text option in the asynchronous pop-up
menu.
4. Click Text Style and pick the view note for DETAIL 1. Select
CENTER from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list. Click Apply >
Close to finish the modification.
5. Reposition the view note for DETAIL 1 directly beneath the view.
Task 8. Create a note for the 1.125 diameter cut in the center view. The
note should include the diameter dimension. Add the auxiliary font of
cal_grek to the drawing setup file and change the note to read µm instead
of mm. To do this, you must alter the default text fields.
1. Click Create > Note > Leader > Enter > Normal Ldr > Make
Note .
2. Click Arrow Head and pick the edge of the cut in the front view.
Locate the note and enter it as shown in Figure 8.
Figure 8: Note Location
3. Click Move to reposition the note, if necessary. When you pick the
note, you can only move it along the leader because the leader is
normal. To rotate the note, click Move and pick on the arrow point.

NOTES
4. Click Advanced > Draw Setup . Set aux_font to

[2_cal_grek], apply changes and close the PREFERENCES
dialog box.
5. Change the text fields so that the first “m” in 20 mm is in its own
separate text field. Hold down the right mouse button and select
MODIFY ITEM. Pick the new note. Press on the right mouse button
and click Edit Text .
6. Separate the first “m” into a new text field. Change {3:FINISH
SURFACE TO 20mm}, to {3:FINISH SURFACE TO
20}{4:m}{5:m}.
7. Modify the text style for the first “m” in the note in the front view.
Click Modify, Text > Text Style . Pick the first “m” in the note.
Click Done Sel . Select CAL_GREK from the Font drop-down list.
8. For Height, clear the Default check box and type [0.15]. Click
Apply > OK .

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Parametric Notes
Task 1. Retrieve BARREL.DRW and add a prefix to the increment

angle for the patterned holes to show the number of holes.
Note:
BARREL_CREATE_NOTES.DRW.

NOTES
1. Show the note for the patterned holes in the left side view. Click
Show/Erase . Click Show > > Show All . Click Yes to
confirm.
2. Obtain the symbol for the number of patterned holes. Click Info >
Switch Dims from the pull-down menu. Click Switch Dims again
to return to the numeric form.
3. Add a prefix to the 72-degree increment angle in the right side

view. Click Modify > Dimension , pick the angle dimension and
click Done Sel . Click Dim Text and type [&p0 x] in the PREFIX
area. Click OK .
Task 2. Modify the view note for DETAIL 1 to include the number of
holes in the barrel. Use the parameter for the number of holes so that the
note updates automatically if the number changes.
1. Add a third line to the view note for DETAIL 1 that calls out the
number of slots on the model. Hold down the right mouse button,
click Modify Item , and pick the view note for DETAIL 1. Hold
down the right mouse button again and click Edit Text .
2. Add a third line and type [&p0 PLACES]. Click OK to close the
dialog box. Press the middle mouse button to finish modifying.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create notes on a drawing.

• You can manipulate drawing notes.
• You can use style libraries to store text styles.

Module
Tolerances on Drawings
In this module, you learn how to work with linear and geometric
tolerances at the part and drawing level.
Objectives
• Change the format and values of linear tolerances.

• Create and modify geometric tolerances.
Page 8-1
NOTES
LINEAR TOLERANCES
When you create a model, Pro/ENGINEER assigns it a tolerance standard
of ISO (based on a set of tolerance tables) or ANSI (based on the nominal
dimension’s number of digits). If you have a license for Pro/DETAIL, you
can set the tolerance standard for your model.
Showing Linear Tolerances

The system determines the linear tolerances for a model when you create
it, but the configuration file options that you have established control the
format and the values. Pro/ENGINEER applies these settings to all
dimensions, so you should set them to the values that you usually use to
avoid having to change them later. Table 1 presents the four formats that
you can specify for linear tolerances.
Note:
When you change the configuration file, it only affects new
models. You must manually change existing models for each
dimension.
Table 1: Tolerance Formats

Limits Displays the dimensional
tolerance as the upper and
lower limits.
Nominal Displays the dimension as
a nominal dimension.
Plus Minus Displays the dimension
with a plus value and a
minus value.
Plus Minus Symmetric Displays the dimension
with a single ± value.
Note:
To show linear tolerances at the part or assembly level, you
can use the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. To show them at the
drawing level, you can use the drawing setup file. However,
the default tolerance format in all three cases depends on the
setting of the configuration file option tol_mode at the time
that you actually created the model.

NOTES
Changing Linear Tolerances

Every dimension on a Pro/ENGINEER model has a tolerance. If you
specify a new tolerance format and value at the part, assembly, or drawing
level, the system reflects that change in every mode of Pro/ENGINEER.
Therefore, the tolerance format for a dimension is the same in Part,
Assembly, and Drawing mode. To differentiate the tolerance format of a
dimension from others, you can control the display independently in
Drawing mode. As a result, you can show tolerances on a drawing without
having to view them in the part or assembly.
Note:
You should change tolerance values or formats at the drawing
level because you can see all of the dimensions at the same
time, and you can select more than one at a time. At the part or
assembly level, you can change only one dimension at a time.
GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES
You can use geometric tolerances (gtols) to specify the maximum
allowable deviation of a product from the exact size and shape specified
by designers. Geometric tolerances provide a comprehensive method of
specifying the location of the part’s critical surfaces, how they relate to
one another, and how the part should be inspected to determine if it is
acceptable.
When you store a Pro/ENGINEER geometric tolerance in a solid model, it

contains parametric references to the geometry or feature it controls—its
referenced entity—and parametric references to referenced datums and
axes. As a result, the system updates the gtol’s display when you rename a
referenced datum. It creates geometric tolerances as annotations, and
always associates them with the model. Unlike dimensional tolerances,
geometric tolerances do not have any effect on the part geometry.
Creating a Geometric Tolerance

You use the following procedure to create geometric tolerances in Part
mode, Assembly mode, or Drawing mode:
Tole ran ces on D raw ings Pag e 8- 3

NOTES
Setting Datums
You can change the name of a datum plane, set it for use in a gtol, and
control its placement. To set a datum, you can create a new one or modify
an existing datum plane or axis.
Note:
Renaming datums could affect any layouts to which you have
declared them.
The system displays a set datum on the screen regardless of the datum
display setting in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. In Drawing mode, you
can remove it from the drawing by erasing it from a particular view. In
Part or Assembly mode, you can place a set datum on a layer and blank it
to remove it from the display.
Specifying the Tolerance Type

To specify the geometric tolerance type, select a graphical symbol from
the GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE dialog box.
Defining the Model References

If you have only one model on your drawing, the system uses it as the
default, but if you have a multi-model or assembly drawing, you can
choose the model to use. You can also create a drawing-level gtol, which
the system stores in the drawing, but it can only reference draft geometry.
Reference Entity
After you have defined the model, you must specify the reference entity
(the geometry or feature that the gtol controls). The system does not use
the reference entity in place of a set datum or as an attachment type for the
gtol. The available reference entity types change based on the type of
geometric tolerance that you are creating.
Placement Entity
Once you have specified the type, the model, and the reference entity, you
can attach the gtol symbol to an entity on the model, known as the
placement entity. The following placement types are available, depending
on the gtol type:

NOTES
• Attaching it to a dimension, datum, or another gtol.

• Using a leader.
• Displaying it as a free note.
• Creating a dimension to which you can attach it (in Drawing mode
only).
Defining the Datum References

You can define a primary, secondary, and tertiary datum reference; a basic
and a compound datum; and a material condition; however, you do not
have to define all of these references. The system displays a message in
the dialog box informing you of the minimum number of references that
you must specify for the particular type of gtol that you are creating.
Specifying the Tolerance Value

You can define the tolerance value as an overall tolerance or base it upon
some unit. To specify the material condition, you can choose from the
following:
• Maximum (MMC )
• Least (LMC )
• Regardless of feature size (RFS )
• Regardless of feature size without a symbol (RFS/Default )
Specifying Additional Symbols

You can show the following symbols and modifiers in the geometric
tolerance.
• Statistical tolerance
• Diameter symbol
• Free state
• All around symbol
• Tangent plane symbol
In addition, you can also set up a projected tolerance zone to display inside
or below the gtol, and also specify a value for the zone height.

NOTES
After you have defined the geometric tolerance, you can place it on the
drawing and move it. You can either define another gtol immediately or
end gtol creation.
Geometric Tolerances in Assembly Drawings

In Assembly drawings, you can create a gtol in a subassembly, a part, or
the top-level assembly.
• Subassembly or part gtols – A subassembly or part gtol can refer

only to set datums belonging to that model itself, or to components
within it. It cannot refer to datums outside its model in some
encompassing assembly.
• Top-level gtols – When you create a gtol in the top-level model (such
as a part in a part drawing or the top assembly in an assembly
drawing), the system associates the tolerance with the view in which
you have specified a reference entity. Reference datums must belong
to the same top-level model, but you can select them in any view. You
can attach an assembly gtol to a dimension, datum, or another gtol,
provided they both belong to the same assembly.
Modifying a Geometric Tolerance

After you place a gtol on a drawing, you can move it; change its
attachment position, type, or tolerance value; or redefine the steps in the
gtol creation. You can modify every aspect of a gtol symbol, except items
on the Model Refs page.

Table 2 lists the available configuration file options that control linear
tolerances.
Table 2: Configuration File Options Affecting Linear Tolerances

tol_display no Displays dimensions with
yes or without tolerances.
tol _mode limits Sets default display of
nominal tolerances.
plusminus
plusminussym
linear_tol # tolerance Sets tolerance display for
linear and angular

NOTES
angular_tol dimensions. # is the

number of places after the
decimal point and
tolerance is the actual
value of the tolerance.
tolerance_standard ANSI Sets tolerance standard
ISO when creating the model.
display_dwg_tol_tags yes Controls display of the
no small tolerance block on
the screen.
tolerance_class medium Sets the default tolerance
fine class for ISO tolerance
standard models.
coarse
very coarse
tolerance_table_dir directory path Sets the default directory
for user-defined tolerance
tables for ISO tolerance
standard models.

NOTES
Drawing Setup File Options

Table 3 lists the available drawing setup file options that control linear and
geometric tolerances in drawings.
Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Linear and

Geometric Tolerances
blank_zero_tolerance no When set to yes, system
yes does not display a plus or
minus tolerance value that
is zero.
gtol_dim_placement on_bottom Determines the location of
under_value a geometric tolerances
feature control frame when
attached to a dimension
symbol that contains
additional text.
tol_display no Controls the display of

yes dimension tolerances. The
Environment dialog box is
not available in Drawing
mode.

NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Using Linear and Geometric
Tolerances
Goal
To show linear and geometric tolerances on a drawing.
Method
In this exercise, you show linear tolerances in Part and Drawing mode, and
modify the tolerance values and formats. You also create geometric
tolerances on the plunger body drawing.

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and part and turn on the
tolerance display in the part. Modify the format and values of some
tolerances.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW, as shown in Figure 1.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.DRW and
PLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.PRT instead.
3. Click Modify and pick the surface of the front tab to show the
dimensions for the front tab. The system displays the dimensions
in a nominal format, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2: Tab Dimensions in Nominal Format
4. Click Utilities > Environment , select the Dimension Tolerances

check box and click OK to turn on the tolerance display.
5. Modify the format of the 2.50 location dimension. Click

Dimension from the MODIFY menu and pick the 2.50 dimension.
Click Done Sel .
6. In the MODIFY DIMENSION dialog box, change the tolerance

format and the tolerance limits. Select PLUS-MINUS from the
TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list.

NOTES
7. Type [.02] in the UPPER TOLERANCE text box, and type [.03] in
the LOWER TOLERANCE text box. Click OK .
8. Modify the format and tolerance limit of the 0.100 location

dimension. Pick the 0.100 dimension and click Done Sel .
9. Select +- Symmetric from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down

list. Type [2] in the NUMBER OF DIGITS text box, then type [.02]
in the TOLERANCE text box. Click OK .
10. Close the window for the part and activate the window for the
drawing.
Task 2. Turn on the tolerance display in the drawing. Modify the format
and values of some tolerances.
1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup . In the drawing setup file, change
the setting for the tol_display option to yes .
Click Add/Change > OK .
2. Repaint the screen and click Done/Return .
3. Modify the tolerance format and values of the .250 dimension in

the upper left view. Click Modify > Dimension then pick the .250
dimension. Click Done Sel .
4. Change the tolerance format and the tolerance limits. Select PLUS-
Minus from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list.
5. Type [2] in the NUMBER OF DIGITS text box. Type [.02] in the
UPPER TOLERANCE text box. Type [.03] in the LOWER
TOLERANCE text box. Click OK .
6. Change any dimensions that appear in limits format to nominal.

Pick dimensions to modify and click Done Sel . Select Nominal
from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list and click OK . Click
Done/Return .
Task 3. Create a geometric tolerance for parallelism and display it on

the 3.00 dimension in the lower left view. Use datum A as a reference.
1. Use the toolbar icons to turn on the datum planes and coordinate
systems, and repaint the screen.
2. Reposition the datum planes appropriately in order to create gtols.

To do this, create a new datum plane through the left side surface

NOTES
of the lower left view. Click Create > Datum > 3D Datum to
display the DATUM dialog box.
3. Define datum plane A through the surface shown in Figure 3. Type

[A] in the N AME area of the dialog box and click On Surface .
4. Click Query Sel and then pick the surface. Click Next until you
highlight the side surface, then click Accept . Click -A- in the
TYPE area of the dialog box to set the datum. Select FREE and
click OK . Click Done/Return .
Datum A should
pass through this
surface
Figure 3: Datum A Location
5. Position the new datum as shown in Figure 3.
6. Click Move from the DETAIL menu, pick the datum, and relocate
it. Turn off the datum planes and repaint the screen.
7. Erase the extra datum flags from Section A-A and the upper left
view. Click Show/Erase . Click Erase > , and pick the datum
flags for datum A in Section A-A and the upper left view.
8. Click Done Sel and close the SHOW/ERASE dialog box.
9. Create the gtol for parallelism on the 3.00 dimension in the lower
left view. Click Create > Geom Tol > Specify Tol > Select
PLUNGER_BODY.PRT from the MODEL drop-down list.
10. Define the gtol for parallelism on the right side surface. Select
SURFACE from the REFERENCE TYPE drop-down list, then pick
the surface shown in Figure 4.

NOTES
11. Select DIMENSION from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list

and pick the 3.000 dimension.
Place the
tolerance on
this dimension
Pick this (end)

surface as the
tolerance
Figure 4: Parallelism References
12. Click Datum Refs , then select A from the BASIC drop-down list as
the primary reference.
13. Define the tolerance value and a least material condition. Click Tol
Value and type [0.006] as the overall tolerance value. Select LMC
from the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list. Click OK to
finish the gtol. The tolerance should appear as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5: Parallelism Geometric Tolerance
Task 4. Create a geometric tolerance for concentricity and display it on

the 0.250 diameter dimension in the center view. Use datum axis D as the
datum reference, which is the axis for this hole. You must rename the axis.
1. Use the toolbar to turn on the axis names and repaint the screen.
2. Change the name of datum axis A_32 and set it. Click Set Datum
from the GEOM TOL menu and pick axis A_32 in Section A-A. In
the DATUM dialog box, change the name of the axis to [D]. Select
FREE and click OK to place the datum with a free placement.

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

To remove the set datum axis from other views, set up a layer
for the axis name and blank it from the unwanted views.
3. Click Specify Tol to create the gtol for concentricity on the 0.250
diameter dimension in the front view.
4. Define the concentricity gtol for the surface of the hole. Click
and select PLUNGER_BODY.PRT from the MODEL drop-down list.
5. Select SURFACE from the REFERENCE TYPE drop-down list and

pick the surface shown in Figure 6.
6. Select DIMENSION from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list

and then pick the 0.250 dimension.
Specify this
surface as the
reference
Figure 6: Concentric References
7. Click Datum Refs and select D from the BASIC drop-down list as
the primary reference.
8. Define the tolerance value and a least material condition. Click Tol
Value and type [0.003] as the OVERALL TOLERANCE value.
Select LMC from the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list.
9. Define the tolerance to include the diameter symbol. Click

Symbols , select the DIAMETER SYMBOL check box, and click
OK . The tolerance should appear as shown in Figure 7.

NOTES
Figure 7: Concentric Tolerance
10. Repeat these steps to create the gtol for the 1.125 diameter
dimension for the cut. Reference the cylindrical surface of the cut
and attach the gtol to the 1.125 diameter dimension. The complete
gtol should appear as shown in Figure 8. Click Done/Return .
Figure 8: Concentric Tolerance for the 1.125 Diameter Dimension
Note:
The system displays the concentric gtol under the dimension
because the configuration file option
gtol_dim_placement controls its location.
Task 5. Modify the values and information in some of the geometric

tolerances that you just created.
1. Click Modify and pick the tolerance value to modify the gtol for
the 1.125 diameter. Type [.005].
2. Click Modify > Geom Tol and pick the gtol for the .250 diameter
hole. Select the Tol Value , then select MMC from the MATERIAL
CONDITION drop-down list. Click OK .

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can change the format and values of linear tolerances.

• You can create and modify geometric tolerances.

Module
Drawing Standards
In this module, you learn some of the different configuration file
options and drawing setup file options to create drawing to
standards.
Objectives
• Use configuration and drawing setup options to control the display

of items associated with drafting standards.
• Create drawings according to your company standards.
Page 9-1
NOTES
SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING STANDARDS

Before you use Pro/ENGINEER for the first time, you should select a
configuration file and drawing setup file to work with, and then make the
necessary changes to meet your established company standards.
Setting Up Your Configuration File

As an initial step in establishing your company standards for
Pro/ENGINEER, you should gather a group of users to review every
option available in the loadpoint configuration file. If the default setting of
an option meets your standards, you do not have to add it to your
configuration file. Likewise, if the default setting is not acceptable, you
should add it to your configuration file.
The loadpoint of Pro/ENGINEER has a text directory containing two

configuration files, config.pro and config.sup. You can override the
config.pro file with options in other configuration files, but you cannot
override the config.sup file with other options. Therefore, you must decide
if you want to allow users to override these settings when they start
Pro/ENGINEER. To override a setting, you can place an option that is in
the loadpoint config.pro in a config.pro file in the user’s home directory.
The only configuration file options that control Drawing mode standards
are allow_rfs_default_gtols_always, and
chamfer_45deg_dim_text.
Setting Up Your Drawing Setup File

As an additional step in establishing your company standards for
Pro/ENGINEER, you should gather a group of users to decide which
drawing setup file is the most appropriate for your needs. In the text
directory of the loadpoint, Pro/ENGINEER provides a variety of drawing
setup files that are set to certain standards. You should copy each file to a
new name and then make any necessary changes.
Note:
You should not accept the settings in the standard drawing
setup files as final standards. Instead, you should review each
option to determine if the setting is appropriate for your
company.

NOTES
After you change your drawing setup file, you should set it up so that all
new drawings use this setup file by default. To do this, specify the name
of your drawing setup file (FILENAME.DTL) as the value for the
configuration file option drawing_setup_file. Several drawing
setup file options control the appearance of items associated with drawing
standards. You can change the settings of these options at any time. If you
accept the default value, any changes are retroactive; it is, therefore,
important to make changes to the drawing setup file rather than the
individual items. Retaining the default settings makes is easier to update
the drawing later if the standards change.
Note:
You should not accept the values std_ansi, std_din, and
std_iso, etc., as final. Changes to the standards, and different
interpretations, can produce different results. Select the option
that produces the correct appearance in your drawing,
regardless of the name of the setting.

Table 1 lists the available configuration file options that you can use to set
drawing standards in Drawing mode.
D ra w in g St anda rd s Pag e 9- 3
NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawing

Standards
allow_rfs_default_gtols_ yes If set to yes, the system creates

always no RFS/Default gtols even if the
ANSI standard does not allow
it.
chamfer_45deg_dim_text ASME/ANSI Controls the appearance of
ISO/DIN dimension text of newly
created dimensions.
JIS

Table 2 lists the drawing setup file options that you can use to set the
standard for gtols, dimension and linear tolerance display, and view
geometry in a drawing.

NOTES
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Controlling Drawing

Standards
Options Controlling Geometric Tolerances
gtol_datums STD_ANSI Sets the drafting standard
STD_ANSI_MM for displaying reference
datums in drawings. The
STD_ISO display affects both axes
STD_JIS and datum planes.
STD_DIN
STD_ISO_JIS
STD_ASME
STD_ANSI_DASHED
new_iso_set_datums no If set to “yes,” set draft
yes datums conform to the ISO
standard.
Options Controlling Dimensions and Linear Tolerances
angdim_text_orientation horizontal Controls the placement of
horizontal_outside angular dimensions to
meet the ISO standard.
parallel_above
parallel_outside
parallel_fully_outside Horizontal
Horizontal Outside
Paralle Parallel
Fully
Parallel Above
NOTES
chamfer_45deg_leadestyle STD_ASME_ANSI Affects the display of the

STD_ISO leader in the drawing and
all 45-degree chamfer
STD_DIN dimensions.
STD_JIS
iso_ordinate_delta no Improves the display of the
yes offset between an ISO
ordinate dimension line
and the witness line. If set
to “yes,” the system uses
the “witness_line_delta”
value. If set to “no,” the
offset differs by about 2
mm.
ord_dim_standard STD_ANSI Sets the display standard
STD_ISO for ordinate dimensions.
When set to “STD_ANSI,”
STD_DIN shows dimensions without
STD_JIS a connecting line (figure
A). Otherwise, places
related ordinate
dimensions along the
connecting line (figure B).
tol_text_height_factor standard Sets the default ratio

number > 0 between the tolerance text
height and dimension text
height, when tolerance is
shown in “plus-minus”
format. For “standard,” the
system uses 1 for ANSI
and 0.6 for ISO standard.

NOTES
tol_text_width_factor standard Sets the default ratio

number > 0 between the tolerance text
width and dimension text
width, when tolerance is
shown in “plus-minus”
format. For “standard,”
the system uses 1 for
ANSI and 0.6 for ISO
standard.
Options Controlling View Geometry

axis_interior_clipping no When set to “no,” axes in
yes the drawing conform to
requirements of the ANSI
Y14.2M standard. If set to
“yes,” you can adjust each
axis individually by
clipping and moving, as
illustrated below.
cutting_line STD_ANSI When set to “std_ansi,”

STD_ANSI_DASHED uses the ANSI standard for
cutting lines. When set to
STD_DIN “std_ansi_dashed,” uses
STD_ISO dashed lines. Otherwise,
STD_JIS uses the DIN standard
cutting line. Displays its
STD_JIS_ALTERNATE thickened portion in white,
and its thin portion in gray.
NOTES
cutting_line_segment 0 Specifies the length in

value drawing units of the
thickened portion of a non-
ANSI cutting line. When
set to “0,” does not show
the thickened portion.
hlr_for_threads no Controls the display of
yes threads in drawings
depending upon whether a
drawing complies with
ISO or ANSI standard (set
by the “thread_standard”
option). When set to “yes,”
thread edges meet ANSI or
ISO standard for Hidden
Line display.
line_style_standard STD_ANSI Controls the text color in
STD_DIN drawings. Unless set to
STD_ANSI, all text is blue
STD_ISO and detailed view
STD_JIS boundaries are yellow.
thread_standard STD_ANSI_IMP Determines whether a
STD_ANSI threaded hole with its axis
perpendicular to the screen
STD_ANSI_IMP_ASSY is displayed as an arc
STD_ISO (ISO) or a circle (ANSI). If
STD_ISO_IMP set to “improved,” does
not display hidden thread
STD_ISO_IMP_ASSY lines if the environment is
set to No Hidden.
Displays them as leader
lines if the environment is
Hidden Line.
view_note STD_ANSI When set to std_din, does
STD_DIN not use the words
SECTION, DETAIL, and
STD_ISO SEE DETAIL in view-
STD_JIS related notes.
CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES

Using the new drawing templates, you can greatly improve the efficiency
of the drawing creation process. Once setup, these templates will automate
the process of laying out the views, setting view display, placing standard
notes, placing standard tables tables, creating snap lines and show
dimensions.

NOTES
Figure 1: A Template and the Resulting Drawing
Model Requirements
The drawing templates use standard view names in the models to locate
the views. For instance, you may specify that the first view placed in a
General view oriented to the FRONT view. The model using the template
must contain a view with this exact name, or the view can not be created
with the template.
Many companies utilize Start Parts or Start Mapkeys, which automatically

generate several standard views.
Template View Definition

These drawing templates are developed using the dialog box shown in
Figure 2.
NOTES
Figure 2: Template View Instructions Dialog Box
To define the first view for the template you will need to specify the
following information:
• Name of the template view

• Type of view to be placed
• The name of the Saved View that should be used to orient the model
• The location for the view
Optional information you can specify for the view:
• If a cross-section should be displayed for the view, and the cross-

sectional view name.
• Scale for the view.
• Name of the Explode State for the view.
• Name of the Simplified Rep to base the geometry on.
• The display setting for the view, such as No Hidden or Hidden Line.
• The display seting for tangent edges, such as Tan Phantom.
• If dimensions should be shown in the view. If dimensions are shown,
you can choose to specify:
½ If snap lines should be created
½ The number of snap lines created
½ The initial and incremental spacing of the snap lines

NOTES
Dimension and Balloon Priority

When you are automatically showing balloons or dimensions, you have
control over the view order the system uses for attempting to show the
dimensions.
View Symbol
By default, all views are represented by the same symbol on the template.
If desired, you can create additional symbols which can be used to
represent the different types of views.
NOTES
Goal
To use the drawing file setup options to create standard drawings.
Method
In this exercise, you learn how to use drawing setup file options to set
standards for your drawings by manipulating the display of detail items
such as dimensions, axes, and set datums.
In the second exercise, you create a drawing template.
EXERCISE 1: Setting Drawing Standards through

the Drawing Setup File
Task 1. Retrieve the drawing standards drawing and change some of the
settings that will affect dimensions.
1. Retrieve DRW_STANDARDS.DRW.

appear on the screen, turn them off.
Task 2. Change the display of ordinate dimensions.
1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup .
2. Select the ord_dim_standard option and select STD_ISO from the

VALUE drop-down list. Apply changes and close the
PREFERENCES dialog box. Repaint the screen. The ordinate
dimensions now appear as shown in Figure 3.

NOTES
Figure 3: Ordinate Dimension Standard
Task 3. Change the display of the chamfer dimensions in the drawing

by modifying the drawing configuration file.
1. In the drawing setup file, set the chamfer_45deg_leader_style

option to std_iso . Apply changes and close the PREFERENCES
dialog box.
2. Repaint the screen. The system displays the chamfer dimensions in

their new style. Repeat this step and change the setting to std_din
and std_jis as shown in Figure 4.
ISO standard ANSI-ASME standard

JIS standard DIN
Figure 4: Chamfer Dimensions
Task 4. Modify the drawing setup file to create a different dimensioning

scheme for the angular dimensions.
1. Set the angdim_text_orientation option to horizontal_outside .

Apply changes and close the PREFERENCES dialog box.
2. Repaint the screen. The system displays the angle dimensions in

their new style.
3. Repeat this step and change the setting to parallel_above and

parallel_outside .
NOTES
Task 5. Change the display of cross-sectional cutting lines, datum

planes, and axes.
1. Change the display of cross-sectional cutting lines. Set the

cutting_line to std_din.
2. Set the cutting_line_segment to [1.5]. Apply changes and close

the PREFERENCES dialog box.
3. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new cutting line style.
Change cutting_line_segment to [1.0] and note the difference,
ANSI standard DIN standard
Figure 5: Cutting Lines
4. Change the display of set datum planes. Set gtol_datums to

std_iso_jis. Apply the changes and close the PREFERENCES
dialog box.
5. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new datum style as
shown in Figure 6.
ANSI standard ISO-JIS standard
Figure 6: Gtol Datums
6. Change the display of datum axes. Set axis_interior_clipping to

Yes . Apply changes and close the PREFERENCES dialog box.

NOTES
7. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new axis style. Click
Move from the DETAIL menu and pick different locations on the
axes to move the outside ends.
8. Click Clip and pick different locations on the axes to move the
inside ends, as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7: Axis Interior Clipping
9. Change the settings of the drawing setup file options that control
arrow style, default font, text height, and text width.
Note:
Changing the drawing units affects many other settings in the
drawing setup file. The options that control text height and text
width, for example, are based on this setting.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating a Drawing Template

Task 1. Create a new drawing without any models associated to it.
1. Click File > New > Drawing .
2. Type [my_C_template] for the name.
3. Clear the Use Default Template check box and click OK .
4. Clear the Default Model box.
5. Check Empty in the SPECIFY TEMPLATE area.
6. Click OK .
Task 2. Initialize the template and define the first view for the template.
1. Click Applications > Template .
2. Click Views > Add Template . The Template View Instructions

window appears.
3. In the VIEW NAME box, type [ FRONT_1 ].
4. In the View Orientation box, accept the default of General .
5. In the Saved View Name box, accept the default of Front .
6. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select MODEL DISPLAY and select

HIDDEN LINE.
7. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select TAN EDGE DISPLAY and

select TAN PHANTOM.
8. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select DIMENSIONS. Type [.375]

for the Incremetal Spacing and type [.500] for the Initial Offset.
9. Click Place View and pick a location on the lower left side of the
drawing for the symbol.

NOTES
Figure 8: The First View
Task 3. Create a second view to generate a projection view.
1. In the TEMPLATE VIEW INSTRUCTION dialog box, click New .
2. In the VIEW NAME box, type [ SIDE_1 ].
3. In the View Orientation box, select PROJECTION.
4. In the PROJECTION PARENT VIEW box, select FRONT_1.
5. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select MODEL DISPLAY and select

HIDDEN LINE.
6. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select TAN EDGE DISPLAY and

select TAN PHANTOM.
7. In the VIEW OPTIONS area, select DIMENSIONS. Type [.375]

for the Incremetal Spacing and type [.500] for the Initial Offset.
8. Click Place View and pick to the right of the first view.
Task 4. Create a second projection view and an isometric view.
1. Create a third view with the following characteristics:

½ View Name = top_1
½ View Orientation = Projection
½ View Parent = FRONT_1
NOTES
½ Model Display = Hidden Line

½ Tan Edge Display = Tan Phantom
½ Use the same dimension offset values as before
½ Locate the view above the front view
2. Create a fourth view with the following characteristics:

½ View Name = iso_1
½ View Orientation = General
½ Saved View = ISO
½ Model Display = No Hidden
½ Tan Edge Display = Tan Phantom
½ Scale = .250
½ No dimensions should be placed in this view
3. Save the template and close the window.
4. Create a new drawing of the model BLOCK.PRT and use this new
template.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can use configuration and drawing setup options to control the
display of items associated with drafting standards.
• You can create drawings according to your company standards.
Module
Drawing Tables
In this module, you learn how to create and manipulate drawing
tables.
Objectives
• Create and manipulate drawing tables.

• Save drawing tables for use in future drawings.
Page 10-1
NOTES
PURPOSE OF DRAWING TABLES

You can use a table in a drawing for many purposes, such as to show a
Bill of Materials or to indicate different sizes for the same part. In
Pro/ENGINEER, you can create a table on your drawing, save it to your
hard drive, and use it later in other drawings. In addition, you can
manipulate table text, add dimension values, and manipulate the actual
table in different ways.
Creating a Drawing Table

To create a table in a drawing, you must define the direction of the table,
its location within the drawing, and the size of the rows and columns.
Table Direction and Location

You can specify the direction of a drawing table as ascending or
descending, and as rightward or leftward, as shown in Figure 1. The
options that you choose determine the default origin for the table and the
direction that the table grows if you add columns or rows. Therefore, you
should define a direction that would prevent the table from growing off of
the drawing sheet or into a drawing view.
Figure 1: Table Directions
The system prompts you to locate the first corner of the table based on the
direction that you have defined. If you have defined the table direction as
descending and rightward, for example, the system prompts you to locate
the upper left corner.
Row and Column Size

After specifying the direction of the table, you must define the size of each
row and column by specifying an actual size value or selecting the number
of characters that can fit in each cell.
Pag e 1 0- 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
• Entering a value – You must define a value for each column and row.
To specify the units, set the drawing setup file option
drawing_units.
• Selecting the number of characters – To select the number of
characters, you must pick an area on the number bar that appears on
the screen, as shown in Figure 2. Pro/ENGINEER automatically places
padding that is half of a character wide at each end of the cell which
means that if you pick the 7 in the number bar, you can only fit 6
characters in that cell. Therefore, you should place the cursor slightly
beyond the number that you actually want. For example, if you want 8
characters, you should pick between the 8 and the 9 in the number bar.
eft border of the table Pick here to fit eight

characters in the cell
Figure 2: Specifying Cell Size
Note:
After you select the number of characters to fit in a cell, you
can still enter more characters. If you add more characters than
the cell can accommodate, they overlap into neighboring cells.
Text does not automatically wrap and the cells do not
automatically grow.
Manipulating a Drawing Table

Once you have created a drawing table, you can manipulate it by doing the
following:
• Setting the justification for each column.

• Changing the size of columns and rows.
• Combining multiple cells into one.
• Changing the origin of the table.
• Removing individual cell borders.
D raw ing T able s Pag e 1 0- 3

NOTES
Setting the Justification for Each Column

Prior to entering text into a table, you should define the justification for
each column, as shown in Figure 3. The default justification setting is left
justified. You should specify the justification that you want to use for the
majority of the table cells. Later, you can change individual cells, if
needed.
Figure 3: Justification of a Table
Tips & Techniques:

When changing the justification of text in tables using the
TEXT STYLE dialog box, pick all of the text that should have
the same justification to avoid having to repeat the procedure.
Changing the Size of Columns and Rows

After creating the table, you can change the size of any column or row by
redefining the length or the number of characters that fit in the cell.
Combining Multiple Cells into One

You can combine table rows, columns, or a combination of both into one
cell by merging them together. A merged cell acts like any other cell, as
shown in Figure 4. If you later choose to split the cells apart, you can re-
mesh them into individual cells.
NOTES
Figure 4: Merging Cells
Changing the Origin of the Table

You can move the origin point of the table to any corner. This could be
useful if you move the table to the other side of the drawing and want to
prevent the table from growing off the sheet.
Removing Individual Cell Borders

You can blank individual cell borders from display to make it appear that
the cell has been merged with a neighboring cell, although the cells remain
separate, as shown in Figure 5. If you later decide to show the border
again, you can unblank it.
Notice cells are still Figure 5: Blanking Cells

defined
Adding Text to the Cells

You can add text to the cells in a table using the keyboard and the symbol
palette. You can also include dimension and parameter values, as you
would to create a parametric note. To include a dimension or parameter
value, you must place an ampersand (&) before the symbolic value. For
example, to include the numeric value for cost in a table, you would enter
[&cost] into the table.

NOTES
Changing the Content of a Cell

You can modify cell text using the following four methods, just as you
would modify a note:
• Re-enter text in the cell – Pro/ENGINEER overwrites the existing

text.
• Modify one line of text at a time – Existing line appears in the
message area for editing.
• Modify the entire text through the system editor – Using a system
editor such as VI or Notepad, you can add lines, delete lines, or change
the content of any text line.
• Modify the entire text through an editor in Pro/ENGINEER – Using
the asynchronous pop-up menu, you can edit the text using a PTC text
editor.
Modifying the Text Style

Once you have placed text in a table cell, you can change its style.
Figure 6: Modified Text
When picking text, keep in mind that table cell text acts like a note. As
discussed in an earlier chapter, Pro/ENGINEER actually breaks up the cell
contents into text fields that you can manipulate separately from the rest of
the cell text.
Repositioning Drawing Tables

You can reposition drawing tables in the following manners:
• Using the Table > Move command.

• Using the Sheets > Switch Sheets command.
• Using the Cut , Copy and Paste commands in the EDIT menu.
NOTES
Goal
To create a table in the drawing.
Method
In this exercise, you create a drawing table, and then modify the table size
and format. You also add text to the table and change the style of the table
text.
EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Drawing

Table
Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW as shown in Figure 7 and
switch some of the views to a new sheet
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_TABLES.DRW.

appear on the screen, turn them off and repaint the screen.
2. Switch the cross-section and detailed views to a new sheet. Click

Sheets > Switch Sheet , then pick the cross-section and detailed
views to switch. Click Done Sel > Done to finish.
3. Reposition the views as shown in Figure 7.
4. Return to Sheet 1 and move the views to new positions, as shown

in Figure 7.

NOTES
NOTES
Task 2. Create a drawing table that presents the revision history of the
drawing. The table should consist of three rows and three columns.
1. Click Table > Create .
2. Define the table so that it grows toward the bottom left of the
sheet. Click Descending > Leftward .
3. Pick near the upper right corner of the drawing for the table origin.
4. Using the left mouse button, pick immediately after the second
zero to create the first column (20 characters wide).
5. Pick immediately after the first zero to create the second column
(10 characters wide).
6. Pick immediately after the first 5 to create the third column (5

characters wide).
7. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the columns.
8. Using the left mouse button, pick immediately after the number 2
to create the first row (2 characters high).
9. Pick immediately after the number 1 to create the second and third
rows.
10. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the rows. The
table should appear as shown in Figure 8.
Note:
You may have to move the 3-D view of the plunger further
down on the sheet. Use the ASYNCHRONOUS pop-up menu
to move this view.
5 10 20
2
1
1
Figure 8: Table Size

NOTES
Task 3. Set up the columns of the table as left and middle-justified.

Add text to the cells in the table.
1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column . Click Left > Middle .
Pick all three columns of the table to set the justification.
2. Click Enter Text and pick the upper left table cell.
3. Type [REV] for the first line of text. When the system prompts you
to enter the second line of text, press <ENTER>.
4. Pick the upper middle table cell, type [DATE], and press <ENTER>.
5. Pick the upper right table cell, type [DESCRIPTION], and press
<ENTER>.
6. Repeat the process until the table appears as shown in Figure 9.
Figure 9: Adding Text to a Table
Task 4. Change the text style of the column headers. Increase the text
height, make the font bold, and center-justify the headers.
1. Click Modify > Text > Text Style . Pick the three column headers,
2. Select Filled from the FONT drop-down list.
3. Type [.30] in the TEXT HEIGHT dialog box.
4. Select Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list.
5. Click Apply > Close .
Task 5. Add a new row to the bottom of the table to indicate a new
revision.
1. Click Table > Mod Rows/Cols > Insert > Row .
2. Pick the bottom border of the last row.
Pag e 1 0-1 0 Fundament als of D ra wing

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

If you insert the row incorrectly, you can use the Remove
option to delete any unnecessary rows or columns.
3. Enter the text into the new cells as shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10: New Row Added to Table
Task 6. Create a new table on the drawing to display the release

information. The table should consist of three columns and four rows.
1. Click Create > Descending > Rightward > By Length .
2. Locate this table below the first table.
3. Create a table that is similar to the one in Figure 11.

½ For each column width, type [1.0].
½ For the height of the first row, type [1.0]
½ For the height of the second row, type [.5].
½ For the height of the third row, type [.8].
4. Define the justification of the cell. Click Mod Rows/Cols >

Justify > Column , then click Center > Middle . Pick all three
columns of the table to set the justification.
5. Merge the cells of the first row. Click Modify Table > Merge >
Rows & Cols , then pick the upper left cell and the upper right cell
of the table.
6. Merge the cells of the second row. Pick the left cell and the right
cell of the second row. The table should appear as shown in
Figure 11.

NOTES
Original cells Merged cells

Figure 11: Merged Cells
Task 7. Enter text into the table and manipulate the text style.
1. Click Enter Text and pick the top row.
2. Type [RELEASED PRINT] for the first line, [RESPONSIBLE

ENGINEERING ACTIVITY] for the second line, and press
<ENTER> to finish entering text.
3. Decrease the size of the top row of and change its justification.
Press the right mouse button, click Modify Item and pick the text
that you just created.
4. Press the right mouse button and click Mod Text Style . In the
TEXT STYLE dialog box, type [.1] in the HEIGHT text box.
5. Select Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list and Top
from the JUSTIFY VERT drop-down list. Click Apply > Close .
6. Change the height of RELEASED PRINT. Click Modify > Text >
Text Height . Pick the first line of text and click Done Sel . Type
[.15] as the height.
7. Click Enter Text and pick the second row. Type [REA ORG
CODE], then press <ENTER> to finish entering text.
8. Decrease the size of the second row of text and change its and
justification. Press the right mouse button, click Modify Item ,
Query Sel , and pick the text that you just created.
9. Click Next until the text highlights; then click Accept . Press the
right mouse button and click Mod Text Style . In the TEXT STYLE
dialog box, type [.1] in the HEIGHT text box.

NOTES
10. Select LEFT from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list and
MIDDLE from the JUSTIFY VERT drop-down list. Select Apply >
Close .
11. Enter text into the last row of the table. Click Enter Text and pick
the lower left cell. Type [REV], then press <ENTER> to finish
entering text.
12. Pick the lower middle cell, type [REL DATE], and press <ENTER>.
Pick the lower right cell, type [REL BY], and press <ENTER>.
13. Modify the text height and justification. Click Modify > Text >
Text Style . Pick the text that you just created for the last row and
click Done Sel .
14. Click Select Text , then pick the second line of text in the top row.
Change the vertical justification by selecting Bottom from the
JUSTIFY VERT drop-down list.
15. Click Apply > Close . The table should appear as shown in
Figure 12.
Figure 12: Release Table
16. Save this table for future use. Click Save/Retrieve from the
TABLE menu, then click Store and pick the table. Type
[RELEASE_INFO] as the table name.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that:
• You can create and manipulate drawing tables.

• You can save drawing tables for use in future drawings.

Module
Cosmetic Features
In this module, you learn how to create cosmetic features on a part.
Also, you learn how to use User Defined Features (UDF’s) to
automate the creation of cosmetic threads.
Objectives
• Create sketched cosmetic features.

• Create cosmetic threads and show the parameters on a drawing.
• Create cosmetic threads, countersinks, counterbores, and tapping
automatically using the Standard Hole functionality.
Page 11-1
NOTES
COSMETIC SKETCHES
Sketched cosmetic features are features that you draw on the surface of a
part, such as company logos or serial numbers that are stamped on an
object. Other features cannot reference sketched cosmetic features.
You do not have to regenerate or dimension sketched cosmetic features;

instead, you can simply sketch in the geometry without defining the size
or location. However, keep in mind that the cosmetic sketch is in a non-
parametric state, so you cannot modify the section size or location. To
create a parametric cosmetic sketch, you should dimension the section
fully, as you would any other sketched feature.
Unlike solid features, you can set the color, font, and line style of cosmetic
sketched features. You can set each individual geometry segment, whether
it is a single feature or a pattern, to a line style. In addition, you can also
assign a different line style to each segment. However, when you redefine
a cosmetic feature, you cannot change the line style.
Working with Regular Sections

A regular section cosmetic feature remains on the sketching plane. It is a
flat feature that Pro/ENGINEER locates directly on the plane on which
you sketched it.
You can cross-hatch regular section cosmetic features when you create
them. The cross-hatching displays in all modes of Pro/ENGINEER, but
you can only modify it in Drawing mode.
Working with Projected Sections

With Projected sections, a user can sketch the section on a datum plane or
planar surface and then project it onto a part surface, as shown in Figure 1.
However, projecting it onto the part surface does result in some distortion
in the shape of the feature.
NOTES
Sketch
Resulting
feature
Projection
surface
Figure 1: Projected Sketch
Showing Cosmetic Sketches on a Drawing

Using the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, you can show a cosmetic sketch on a
drawing in the same way that you would show a dimension, and then
manipulate the line style of the segments or the sketch. You can show or
erase the cosmetic sketch in the drawing views individually.
COSMETIC THREADS
A cosmetic thread uses a magenta halo to represent the diameter of a
thread. Unlike other cosmetic features, you cannot modify the line style of
a cosmetic thread, and hidden line display settings in the ENVIRONMENT
dialog box do not affect them.
Creating Cosmetic Threads

When you create a cosmetic thread, you must define the surface on which
to create it, the surface on which to start it, the thread depth, and the thread
diameter:
• To specify the starting surface, you can pick a quilt surface, regular
Pro/ENGINEER surface, or split surface (such as a surface that
Cosm etic Feat ures Pag e 1 1- 3

NOTES
belongs to a revolved feature, chamfer, round, or swept feature). You

must then specify the direction of the thread.
• To define the thread depth, you can use Blind , Upto Pnt/Vtx , Upto
Curve , and Upto Surface . You must then specify a value or reference.
• To define the thread diameter, you can accept the default value that the
system provides based on the diameter of the thread surface. The
geometry of the thread surface determines if the thread is external or
internal. If it is a shaft, the thread is external. If it is a hole, the thread
is internal. For an internal thread, the default diameter value is 10
percent larger than the hole diameter. For an external thread, the
default diameter value is 10 percent smaller than the shaft.
Note:
A blind external cosmetic thread fails if the major diameter is
equal to the diameter of the placement surface.
Table 1 lists the parameters that you can define for a thread. You can
define some of them when you initially create the thread. For example, the
system bases the major diameter and placement on the values that you
specify for the diameter of the thread. In Table 1, pitch is the distance
between two threads.
Table 1 Parameters for Thread Definition

Parameter Name Parameter Parameter Description
Value
MAJOR_DIAMETER Number Thread major diameter
THREADS_PER_INCH Number Threads per inch (1/pitch)
THREAD_FORM String Thread form
CLASS Number Thread class
PLACEMENT Character Thread placement (A-external, B-internal)
METRIC TRUE/FALSE Thread is metric
You can manipulate thread parameters just as you would manipulate other
user-defined parameters, (add, modify, delete, or display them).
Working with the Parameter File

The parameter file lists all of the information concerning the thread
parameters, and you can edit it as needed. For example, the system
prompts you twice for information about the diameter. One benefit of this
redundancy is that you can place a metric thread on an English unit part,
and vice versa.
NOTES
When specifying parameters directly in the parameter file or as you

actually create the cosmetic thread, keep in mind the following:
• If you can specify an option in both the parameter file and the creation
user interface, the system displays the values from the creation user
interface by default. If you change these values, or if you read in
another parameter file, these new values remain in the file. However,
the values in the creation user interface remain unchanged. For
example, if you specified a thread diameter of 2.5, then change the
parameter file so that the diameter is 3.5, the thread diameter remains
2.5. Note that if you modify the values in the parameter file, they lose
their associativity with the model.
• The associativity between the parameter file and the creation user
interface exists only during feature creation. Once you accept the
default values, or make changes to the parameter file, these values
remain the same until you select NOTE PARAMS from the SEL
ELEMENTS menu. Even if you redefine the feature and the diameter
or the thread type, the parameter file remains unchanged unless you
manually change it.
• Pro/ENGINEER calculates the thread placement value in the
parameter file based on whether the thread is external (surface
geometry is a shaft) or internal (surface geometry is a hole).
• The system displays the values of the feature in the dialog box, which
may not be the same as the values in the parameter file. However, if
you choose Feat , Pro/ENGINEER displays the values that you
specified during feature creation and the values in the parameter file.
Displaying Cosmetic Threads on a Drawing

Once you create a cosmetic thread on a part, it appears on the associated
drawing; you do not need to show it manually as you would with a
cosmetic sketch. The system displays it by default in magenta, just as it
would display a surface feature, and hidden line display does not affect it.
To control the effect of hidden line removal on cosmetic threads, set the
drawing setup file option hlr_for_threads to Yes or No ,
accordingly.
To show cosmetic thread parameters, you can select FEAT & VIEW from
the SHOW page of the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, and then pick the thread
in the view for which you would like to show the note. The note appears in
the drawing in the format shown in Figure 2.

NOTES
Form Class
Major diameter
Placement
Threads per inch
Figure 2: Thread Note
Changing the Format of a Thread Note

The note shown in Figure 2 may not be in the appropriate format for your
drawings. Using the following techniques, you can modify the format of a
thread note to meet your requirements:
• Change the major diameter to a fraction or remove the leading

zero – Delete the parameter for the major diameter and re-create it as a
string. This breaks the associativity with the diameter dimension, but
allows you to display a fraction in the note or display it as .450.
• Change the note format to remove unnecessary spaces – Create a
new note attached to the cosmetic feature and include spaces and
dashes where they should display in the note, as shown in Figure 3.
• Control the number of decimal places for the threads per inch
parameter – Add [.#] after a parameter, where # is the number of
decimal places desired, as shown in Figure 3.
&MAJOR_DIAMETER:att-&THREADS_PER_INCH:att[.0] &FORM:att-&CLASS:att &PLACEMENT:att
[.0] controls the number of

digits for the parameter
:att uses the parameter for the feature
to which the note is attached
Figure 3: Note Format for Thread Parameter
You can save this note as a text file by adding the postfix :att after each
parameter to ensure that the system uses the parameters of the feature to
which you attach the note. You can then use it on future drawings that
include cosmetic thread features and display the information for the new
feature.
To simplify this process, you can use a user-defined feature (UDF) for the
cosmetic thread. This allows you to preset the parameter format (that is,
the fraction for the major diameter) so that you can use it every time you
use the UDF. Once you place the UDF on the model, you can create the
note on the drawing using the text file with the proper format.
NOTES
Creating Cosmetic Threads using Standard Hole

As an alternative, cosmetic threads can be created using the Standard Hole
option. The Standard Hole option allows for standard UNC, UNF and ISO
holes to be created. Counterbores, countersinks, and tapping can be
included, and default sizes are included.
In tapping a hole, a cosmetic thread can be included automatically, as

shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4: Standard Hole Dialog Box
The Standard Hole automatically generates a 3D note as a callout, as

shown in the Hole Note Preview at the bottom of the dialog box in
Figure 4. This note can be shown on a drawing, but is not parametric.
Note:
The note created by the Standard Hole is not parametric – that
is, the values in it cannot be modified directly. To change the
values in the note, the feature must be Redefined and
modified via the dialog box.

NOTES
USER-DEFINED FEATURES
To establish a library of common geometry that you can save for future
use, you can create user-defined features (UDFs)—groups of features,
their references, and dimensions. Figure 5 shows screw boss geometry as
an example of a UDF.
1 Protrusion
1 Hole
4 Ribs
Draft
Figure 5: Screw Boss Geometry
Once you create and save a UDF, you can reuse it quickly on future
models, as well as display cosmetic thread notes according to your
company standard. If you set up the thread parameters so that they display
correctly in the UDF, the note then displays correctly wherever you use
the UDF.
Creating a UDF
To create a UDF, you must first model the geometry that you want to save.
As you create the geometry, you should be aware of the parent/child
relationships that you are defining. You should define the features using
common external references or references to one another. Once you have
defined the geometry, you can define the UDF. This section discusses the
steps that you should follow to create a UDF of the cosmetic thread shown
in Figure 6:
• Begin the definition and specify an option for storing it.

• Store reference parts.
• Name the group.
• Select features.
• Create external reference prompts.
NOTES
• Define variable dimensions and elements.

• Complete the definition.
Figure 6: Cosmetic Thread
Subordinate / Standalone UDFs

UDFs are classified as either Subordinate or Standalone. If a UDF is
stored as a standalone feature, the system stores all of the information that
it needs to create the UDF feature in the UDF file itself. If you store it as a
subordinate feature, the system uses some of the information from the
current model for the UDF features.
Note:
For a subordinate feature, if the current model is not present
when you later access the UDF, the system cannot retrieve the
UDF.
Storing Reference Parts

When creating a standalone UDF, you can store a reference part to use
later in placing the UDF on a new model. The system creates a copy of the
current part and assigns it the name UDFNAME_GP.PRT. If you store the
UDF as a subordinate feature, the current model automatically becomes
the reference part.

NOTES
Naming the Group

The name that you assign to a UDF should be a valid filename that is
independent of the model from which you created it, unique and
descriptive, (to ensure that it is easily identifiable). When the system
stores the file, it appends the file extension gph. In some cases, your
company standards specify the naming convention that you should use for
UDFs.
Selecting Features
To assist you in selecting the appropriate model features to include in the
UDF, you can use Query Sel or the MODEL TREE.
Creating External Reference Prompts

Once you have finished selecting the features to include in the UDF, you
should define prompts for the external references (that is, references to
parent features other than those contained in the UDF group) to appear in
the message area, as shown in Figure 7. You should create descriptive
prompts that can assist the user in placing the feature, especially if you are
using a standalone UDF that does not have a reference model.
Note:
You must define any parent/child reference that you create
with geometry other than the features of the UDF.
Upto surface
Start surface
Thread surface
Figure 7: External References for Cosmetic Thread

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

For each reference that you create for a UDF, you must specify
a prompt, and then specify a corresponding reference for it
when placing the UDF on a new model. Therefore, when
creating features for the UDF, you can save time by creating as
few references as possible.
Defining Variable Dimensions and Elements

As you select features for the UDF, you can define variable dimensions,
variable elements, and predefined variations of the UDF. Specifically, you
can do the following:
• Make some or all of the driving dimensions variable – You must

specify a descriptive prompt for each variable driving dimension to
indicate what it controls. For any dimensions that you do not select,
the system uses the same values as you assigned to the UDF when you
stored it.
• Increase its flexibility – You can define variable elements for the
UDF as well. For example, you can change the depth of the hole from
Blind to Thru All , etc.
• Define prompts and logic statements – Using Pro/PROGRAM, you

can define prompts and logic statements within the UDF.
• Create predefined variations of the UDF – Using family tables, you
can store geometry sets of various sizes internal to the UDF instead of
requiring the user to enter a set of dimensions.
Completing the Definition

Once you have defined all of the UDF elements, you can select OK from
the dialog box to automatically save the UDF and the reference part to the
hard drive. The system assigns the UDF the name UDFname.gph. You
may then want to move the file to a common group directory to give all
users in your company access to the new feature that you have defined.
Placing a UDF
When you place a UDF on a new model, the system creates a group within
the new model containing the UDF features. To retrieve the geometry
from within a new model, you can choose Feature , Create , and User
Defined or Feature , Group , Create , and From UDF Library . After you
select a UDF file, you should place it by following these steps:

NOTES
• Select the driving options to control the geometry – To control the

geometry after placing it, you can define it as either independent or
UDF-driven.
• With independent placement, the system makes the group that you
created in the current model completely independent of the UDF file.
½ With a UDF-driven placement, the system associates the group
to the UDF file. As a result, if the UDF file changes, the group
in the new model changes when you select UPDATE from the
GROUP menu. You can use this method to enforce company
standards.
½ Retrieve a reference part to assist you in placing the UDF, if
necessary. If you retrieve a reference part into a subwindow,
you can use it as a visual aid. As the system prompts you for
geometry, it automatically highlights the equivalent of the
reference part.
• Specify values of any variable dimensions that you created and
placement references – Figure 8 illustrates how to choose references
for UDF placement.
Upto surface
Thread surface
Start surface
Figure 8: Choosing References for UDF Placement

• Specify the display for invariable dimensions – The system does
not prompt you for invariable dimensions when placing the UDF. You
can specify the display as Normal , Read-Only, or Blank .
• If you select NORMAL, the system displays dimensions as standard
dimensions, using the values from the UDF, but you can modify them.
This option is available only if you created the UDF as Independent .

NOTES
½ If you select READ ONLY, the system displays the dimensions

as normal dimensions using the values from the UDF file, but
you cannot modify them.
½ If you select BLANK, the system does not display the
dimensions in the new model, as shown in Figure 9.
Figure 9: Invariable Dimensions Blanked

• Define any optional elements – As optional elements, you can only
select those elements that you already defined in the UDF. For
example, if you had only selected Blind and Thru All , when you place
the UDF, the system would only provide you with those two choices.
• Finish the placement – Before finishing the placement, you can
preview the UDF by selecting PREVIEW from the dialog box, then
click Done . If you do not need to preview it, you can choose OK to
complete it.
Summary of Technique for Creating Cosmetic

Threads
In summary, you should follow these steps to use a UDF to create a
cosmetic thread and display the thread note in the correct format on a
drawing:
• Create the cosmetic thread.

• Delete and recreate the major diameter parameter as a string with the
correct format.
• Create a UDF for the cosmetic thread.
• Create a note on the drawing with the correct format and save it to a
text file for future use.

NOTES
Goal
To create cosmetic features on the part and display them on the drawing.
Method
In the first exercise, you create a cosmetic sketch on the plunger body part
consisting of the letters PTC to represent a logo on the model. In addition,
you display the sketch on the drawing of the plunger body.
In the second exercise, you create a cosmetic thread on a bolt by creating a

user-defined feature so that you can display the thread information
differently on the drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cosmetic Sketch

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_PRT and create a cosmetic sketch
using the letters PTC. Project it onto the top surface (Figure 10), of the
part and locate it with dimensions.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_COSMETIC_FEATURES.PRT.
1. Click Feature > Create, >Cosmetic > Sketch . Click Project Sec
> No Xhatch > Done .
2. When the system prompts you to pick the surface on which to

project the sketch, pick the surface shown in Figure 10. Click
Done Sel > Done Refs .
Select this
surface onto
which to project
the sketch
Figure 10: Projection Surface

NOTES
3. Define the sketching and reference planes for the cosmetic sketch.
Pick DTM2 as the sketching plane for the feature and click Okay
to accept the default viewing direction.
4. Click Bottom and pick DTM3 so that the yellow side of DTM3
faces toward the bottom of the screen.
5. Specify the references for the text. Pick DTM2 and DTM3 as the
sketcher references.
6. Close Intent Manager Help if it appears. Sketch the letters PTC in

the position shown in Figure 11.
7. Click Sketch > Text and pick the start and second point as shown
in Figure 11. Type [PTC] as the text line. Type [.2] for the Aspect
Ration. Change the font if you would like. Close the text dialog
box.
Second Point
Start Point
Figure 11: Text Location
8. Click Sketch> Done to finish the feature.
9. Save and close the window.
Task 2. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and erase the cosmetic
sketch from some of the views on the drawing.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_COSMETIC_FEATURES.DRW.
2. Use the toolbar icons to turn off the display of datum planes and
repaint the screen.
3. Erase the cosmetic sketch from every view except for the one in
the upper left corner of the sheet. Click Show/Erase > click Erase
> and select VIEW. Pick every view on Sheet 1 except the
upper left view.

NOTES
4. Erase the cosmetic sketch from the views on Sheet 2. Click

Window >New and type [2] as the sheet to view. Erase the
cosmetic sketch in Section A-A. Close the window for Sheet 2, and
activate the window for Sheet 1.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Cosmetic Threads

Task 1. Retrieve THREADED_BOLT.PRT and create a cosmetic thread
on the shaft portion of the bolt.
1. Click Feature > Create > Cosmetic > Thread . Pick the
cylindrical surface of the bolt as the thread surface, as shown in
Figure 12.
Thread surface
Start
surface
Figure 12: Thread Surfaces
2. Define the thread so that it starts at the end of the bolt. Pick the
surface at the end of the bolt, as shown in Figure 12, as the start
surface.
3. Define the direction of feature creation to be toward the head of the

bolt. Click Flip until the arrow points in the correct direction, then
select OK.
4. Define the depth of the thread as 1.00 and the diameter as 0.45.
Click Blind > Done . Type [1.00] as the depth value. Type [0.45]
as the thread diameter.
5. Modify the thread parameters to define the class, form, placement,

and threads per inch. Click Mod Params .
6. Set the values for the thread parameters. Type the values as shown
in Table 2.

NOTES
Table 2: Values for Thread Parameters

MAJOR_DIAMETER 0.45
THREADS_PER_INCH 15
FORM UNC
CLASS 2
PLACEMENT A
METRIC False
7. Click File >Exit . Click Done/Return > Preview > OK to create the
feature.
Task 2. Retrieve THREADED_BOLT.DRW and show the note for the

cosmetic thread. Alter the display of the thread and the note.
1. Change the display of the cosmetic threads so that the hidden line
removal process affects them. Edit the drawing set-up file
(Advanced / Draw Setup ) and set HLR_FOR_THREADS to [yes].
Update and apply changes.
2. Show the thread note on the drawing in the upper left view. Click
Show/Erase . Click Show > and select FEAT_VIEW. Pick
the thread in the upper left view and close the dialog box.
3. Position the note as shown in Figure 13. Click Move , pick the note,
and press the left mouse button to place it. To change the arrow
position, click Mod Attach and pick the note.
4. Click Same Ref to move the arrow along the current attachment
reference or click Change Ref to pick a new reference to which to
attach the arrow.
Figure 13: Default Note Format

NOTES
Task 3. Change the format of this note so that the major diameter
displays as a fraction. Also, change the spacing and the number of digits
in the note.
1. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT to return to the part window.
2. Delete the major diameter parameter. Click Set Up > Parameters

> Feature , then pick the cosmetic thread.
3. Click Delete , select MAJOR_DIAMETER, and click Done .
4. Click Create > String to create a new string parameter called

MAJOR_DIAMETER. Type [MAJOR_DIAMETER] as the
parameter name and [7/16] as the parameter value.
Tips & Techniques:

The new major diameter parameter is not associated with the
diameter of the cosmetic thread. If you modify the thread
diameter, this parameter does not automatically update. To
make the new parameter associative to the diameter
dimension, you can use some advanced relations to convert the
dimension to a fraction.
5. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.DRW to return to the drawing

window. The note no longer displays the major diameter.
6. Modify the thread note to use the new major diameter parameter.
Press the right mouse button, click Modify Item , and pick the note.
Press the right mouse button and click Edit Text .
7. Replace *** in the first field of the note by entering

[&major_diameter:fid_#], where # is the same number
displayed for the other parameters.
8. Remove the spaces around the dash between the major diameter
and the threads per inch. Remove the spaces around the dash
between the form and the class.
9. Remove the space between the class and placement. Click OK to

finish the change.

NOTES
Note:
The system displays FID_238 after all of the parameter names,
where Fid is the feature ID and 238 is the cosmetic thread ID.
Since these parameters are feature parameters, they must call
out the feature using this format.
10. Modify the number of digits for the threads per inch parameter.
Click Modify > Num Digits and type [0] as the number of digits to
display.
11. Pick the number 15.000 in the note and click Done Sel . The new
note should appear as shown in Figure 14.
Figure 14: New Note Format
Task 4. To avoid having to make these changes every time you use a
cosmetic thread on a drawing, create a UDF for the cosmetic thread.
Create some feature parameters to use with the thread to display the note
differently.
1. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.PRT to r eturn to the part

window.
2. Create a UDF for the cosmetic thread. Click Feature > UDF
Library > Create . Type [COSM_THREAD] as the name.
3. Define the UDF so that changes to the geometry on the original

model do not affect it. Click Stand Alone > Done .
4. When the system prompts you to include a reference part, enter

[yes]. The system creates a copy of the current part and gives it
the name COSM_THREAD_GP.PRT.

NOTES
Tips & Techniques:

When creating the geometry for the UDF, use a very simple
part so that the reference part will be small and easy to
interpret.
5. Click Done Sel > Done > Done/Return to specify the features to
include in the UDF. Pick the cosmetic thread feature.
6. Provide prompts for the external references, as shown in Figure 15.

These are references to features other than those contained in the
UDF.
7. When the system highlights the cylindrical surface of the bolt, type
[Thread Surface] as the prompt.
8. When it highlights the flat surface at the end of the bolt, type
[Start Surface] as the prompt. Later, when you place the UDF,
these prompts appear in the message area.
Start surface Thread surface
Figure 15: Reference Prompts
9. Verify the accuracy of the prompts. As Pro/ENGINEER highlights

a surface on the screen and displays the prompt in the message
area, click Next to view the next prompt or click Enter Prompt
and type the correct prompt.
10. After setting all of the prompts, click Done/Return to finish.
11. Define the depth and the note parameters of the cosmetic thread as
variable. Select VAR ELEMENTS and click Define , then pick the
cosmetic thread. Select DEPTH and click Done > Done .
12. Define the diameter of the thread as the only variable dimension
specifying the prompt for the dimension as Thread Diameter.
Select VAR DIMS and click Define . Pick the .45 diameter
dimension, and type [Thread Diameter] as the prompt.

NOTES
13. Save the model and quit the windows. Click Window >
THREADED_BOLT.DRW , then click Window > Close Window .
14. Activate the part window, click Window > Activate . Save the part
and close the window.
Task 5. Retrieve SCREW.PRT and place the cosmetic thread UDF on it.
Retrieve the screw drawing and create a note for the thread.
1. Place the cosmetic thread UDF on the screw part. Click Feature >
Create > User Defined . Select COSM_THREAD.GPH and click
Open . Select yes to retrieve reference part.
2. Click Independent > Done to define the new thread as completely

independent of the UDF file.
3. The system displays the SCALE menu with options for retaining
the dimensions or using a scale. Click Same Dims > Done . Type
[.80] as the new thread diameter.
4. Define the invariable dimensions on the UDF so that they display

as normal dimensions. Click Normal > Done .
5. Specify the placement references that you used in the UDF, as

shown in Figure 16. Pick the cylindrical surface of the screw as the
thread surface and the flat end of the screw as the start surface.
Up To surface
Thread surface
Start surface
Figure 16: Placement References

NOTES
6. Change the depth of the thread so that it goes up to the surface, as

shown in Figure 16. Select DEPTH and click Define .
7. Click Up To Surface > Done . Pick the surface as shown in

Figure 16. Click Preview > OK , then click Done to finish the
thread.
8. Retrieve SCREW.DRW.
9. Create a note for the cosmetic thread parameters. Click Create >
Note . Click Leader > File > Horizontal > Standard > Default >
Make Note .
10. Attach the note with an arrowhead to the edge of the cosmetic
feature in the left side view. Click On Entity > Arrow Head >
Query Sel , then pick the right side edge of the thread as shown in
Figure 17.
11. Click Next until the edge of the thread highlights, then click
Accept . Click Done Sel > Done . Locate the note by picking to the
right of the view.
Select the hidden

edge of the
thread
Figure 17: Note Attachment
12. Retrieve the note COSM_THREAD_NOTE.TXT.
13. Change the values for the thread diameter and the threads per inch
on the note. Click Advance > Parameters > Feature . Pick the
cosmetic thread.

NOTES
14. Click Modify > MAJOR_DIAMETER . Type [13/16]. Click Modify

> THREADS_PER_INCH . Type [12]. Repaint to update the note
with the new parameter values as shown in Figure 18.
Figure 18: New Thread Note

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Cosmetic Threads Using Standard

Holes
Task 1. Create a 5”h x 5”w x 3”t protrusion.
1. Create a new part using the default template.
2. Create a rectangular protrusion. Sketch a 5 x 5 rectangle and

extrude to a depth of 3.
Task 2. Create a Standard Hole.
1. Select Feature > Create > Solid > Hole and observe the dialog
box as shown in Figure 19.
Figure 19: Standard Hole Options

NOTES
2. In the HOLE TYPE section, select the Standard Hole radio

button and make sure the following checkboxes are selected:
½ Add Thread Surface
½ Add Counterbore
½ Add Countersink
3. Set the hole size to 7/8-9 .
4. Pick the top surface as the placement plane, the front and right side
surfaces as the reference planes.
5. Type [2.50 ] in the DISTANCE boxes for each reference.
Note:
At the bottom of the HOLE dialog box, Pro/ENGINEER
previews the 3D note that will be created along with this
feature. All diameter, depth, and shape callouts are
represented in the note.
6. Complete the feature. Notice the cosmetic thread feature is created

along with the hole – this is one feature.
Task 3. Create a drawing of the part to display the Standard Hole note.
1. Create a C-size drawing, and place a general view with the axis of
the hole normal to the drawing.
2. Select Show > and select the hole. The note appears.
Task 4. Redefine the hole to a different type.
1. Activate the part window and select Feature > Redefine > Sel by
Menu > Last Feature .
2. Change to hole size to 14-20 and complete the feature.
3. Activate the Drawing. The note may have disappeared. Select

Show > to display the note of the modified hole.
4. Try to Modify the values in the note, either on the part or on the
drawing. Notice that it is non-parametric.
5. Save the part and close the window.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create sketched cosmetic features.

• There is a difference between sketched and projected sections for
cosmetic features.
• You can create cosmetic threads and show the parameters on a
drawing.
• You can modify the note of a cosmetic callout to match your
company’s standards for callouts.
• You can create cosmetic threads, countersinks, counterbores, and
tapping automatically using the Standard Hole functionality.

Module
2-D Drafting
In this module, you learn how to use the 2-D Drafting tools.
Objectives
• Create draft geometry in a drawing.

• Manipulate and modify draft geometry.
Page 12-1
NOTES
2-D DRAFTING CAPABILITIES

If you have a license for Pro/DETAIL, you can access two-dimensional
drafting tools. When you draft 2-D entities, you do not have to regenerate
them as you would in Sketcher mode. The system does not make any
assumptions about the drafted geometry, which means that the draft
entities remain in the drawing exactly as you sketch them (that is, roughly,
accurately, etc.). To create perfect horizontal and vertical lines, you must
draft them that way. You can use Pro/ENGINEER’s drafting functionality
to perform the following:
• Add 2-D entities to a Pro/ENGINEER model drawing.

• Update and maintain legacy data of existing drawings imported from
other systems.
• Create drawing symbols.
• Create a sketch of a design in Layout mode.
Note:
The configuration file option
draw_points_in_model_units defines the current
draft entities’ coordinate values as model units, rather than
drawing units.
Creating Draft Geometry

You can create various forms of draft geometry such as lines, arcs, circles,
splines, ellipses, points, and chamfers independently from the model
geometry or by referencing model geometry. However, draft geometry
that you create by referencing model geometry does not update if the
model geometry changes.
To locate draft geometry, you can use any of the following:
• Cross hairs
• Draft grid
• Construction geometry
• GET POINT menu
NOTES
Cross Hairs
When creating draft geometry, cross hairs appear at the end of the cursor.
They are useful tools for lining up new geometry with existing geometry.
When one of the cross hair lines is in line with existing geometry, the
cross hair changes to cyan.
Note:
The cyan color of a cross hair does not indicate that the new
geometry lines up perfectly with the existing geometry.
Instead, it simply indicates that the new and existing geometry
are relatively close.
Draft Grid
You can use a draft grid in Drawing mode and turn on grid snap in the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box to locate draft entities. Grid snap causes the
mouse picks to snap to the grid points, making it much easier to line up
and locate draft entities to specific locations. You can alter the grid type
from Cartesian to Polar, and vice versa, as well as change the distance.
Note:
You can still use the grid snap if the grid display is off.
Construction Geometry
Construction geometry entities are lines and circles that you can use to
locate and create 2-D draft geometry. They are similar to the guidelines
that drafters use on drawing sheets to locate other geometry;
Pro/ENGINEER displays them on the screen in gray phantom font. You
can create the following types of construction lines:
• Horizontal
• Vertical
• At a specified angle
• Offset from an existing line
• Perpendicular to another construction line at a specified angle
The options for creating construction circles are the same as those for
creating solid circles. Once you have created construction draft geometry,
2D D raft ing Pag e 1 2- 3

NOTES
you should either delete it, or place it on a layer and blank it. If you use a
layer, you can later unblank the geometry to use it.
The GET POINT Menu

You can use the GET POINT menu options to locate points for draft
geometry in the following ways:
• Anywhere on the screen

• At the endpoint, midpoint, center of an arc or circle, or intersection of
two entities
• Anywhere along an entity
• Relative to the last point you picked using specified x- and y-
coordinate values
• Relative to the drawing origin (located in the lower-left corner) using
absolute coordinate values
Chaining Geometry
By default, when you create draft geometry, Pro/ENGINEER allows you
to create only one entity at a time. To create more than one draft entity, it
may be easier to start a chain. Chaining geometry enables you to create a
series of entities with the end point of the current entity as the starting
point of the next entity. The system continues to create the next entity until
you end the chain.
Manipulating Draft Geometry

In some cases, you may find it easier and faster to manipulate or reproduce
existing draft geometry rather than draft new geometry. Using the 2-D
drafting tools available with Pro/ENGINEER, you can either alter existing
geometry or copy existing geometry.
Altering Existing Geometry

In Pro/ENGINEER, you can change 2-D geometry in the following ways:
• Translate or rotate the geometry to a new location.

• Trim or extend the geometry to square off corners.
• Break up the geometry into smaller segments.
• Change the size of entities.
NOTES
• Modify the line style of entities.
Copying Existing Geometry

You can quickly and easily create new geometry by copying existing
geometry in the following ways:
• Create multiple copies of entities.

• Mirror entities about a construction line.
• Offset an entity to create a new one.
• Copy model geometry.
Grouping Draft Geometry

When manipulating draft geometry, you can group entities together and
manipulate the entire group using some of the same options that you use
with individual entities. However, when working with draft geometry
groups, you should keep in mind the following:
• You cannot modify entities in a group by intersecting or trimming.

• You can delete all of the entities in a group or delete only the group
and retain the entities.
• You can include notes, symbols, and geometric tolerances in draft
groups.
• A group of draft cross-sections contains the cross-hatching and the
bounding entities.
Modifying Draft Geometry

Using the same method that you would use to modify cross-sections in
parts and assemblies, you can fill or hatch draft entities that form a closed
loop, and then modify the hatching.
You can also change the font, width, and color of draft geometry lines by
using the MODIFY LINE STYLE dialog box, or copy a line style from an
existing entity. To save time, Pro/ENGINEER also allows you to create
your own user-defined fonts and store them in a font library for future use.

Table 1 lists the available drawing setup file options that pertain
exclusively to two-dimensional drafting:

NOTES
Table 1: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting 2-D Drafting

associative_dimensioning yes Automatically updates a
no dimension if the associated
draft geometry changes.
aux_line_font # line font name Sets auxiliary line fonts to
(# = 1 through 10,000) a specified font. Uses the
integer number to
associate a line font to
draft geometry. In this
way, you can make a
blanket change by
changing the font name
associated with a number.
draft_scale 1.0 Sets the drawing scale for
value the draft entities.
line_style_length font_name default Sets the length of elements
font_name value composing a font. You
must enter this value
whenever you want to
modify the length. Enter
the font name and the
desired value for the font
length in system units.
NOTES
Goal
To use the 2-D drafting tools to create draft geometry.
Method
In the first exercise, you learn how to use the 2-D drafting functionality
available in Pro/ENGINEER to create draft geometry for symbols and
layouts, as well as to update existing 2-D drawings.
In the second exercise, you update a drawing after importing it from

another system. You also use the 2-D drafting functionality to
accommodate a change in the design intent of the model.
EXERCISE 1: Using the 2-D Drafting Functionality

Task 1. Create an A-size drawing and add some construction geometry
to use to create other entities.
1. Create a new drawing with the name [fork ]. Clear the Use
Template check box.
2. Define the drawing with no default model, landscape orientation,

and an A-size sheet.
3. Create a set of horizontal and vertical construction lines, as shown

in Figure 1. Click Sketch> Construction > Constr Line>
Crossed Pair > Abs Coords.
4. Type [3.5] as the X coordinate, [4.25] as the Y coordinate, and

[0] as the rotation angle.

NOTES
Figure 1: Construction Lines
5. Click Offset and pick the horizontal construction line to create

some horizontal construction lines offset from the existing one.
6. Type [-.75] for the first offset line, then type [.5] as the value for
the second offset line. Press <ENTER> to finish offsetting.
7. Pick the original horizontal construction line and type [-1] as the
offset value. Press <ENTER> to finish.
8. Pick the original horizontal construction line again and type

[-2.25] as the offset value. Press <ENTER> to finish.
9. Create some vertical construction lines offset from the existing

one. Pick the vertical construction line and type [.5] as the offset
value for the first offset line, [5] as the offset value for the second
offset line, and [-1.50] for the third offset line.
10. Press <ENTER> to finish offsetting. Pick the original vertical

construction line and type [1] as the offset value. Press <ENTER>
to finish.
11. Create the two construction circles as shown in Figure 2. Click

Constr Circ > Center/Pnt > Vertex , then pick the vertices as
shown in Figure 2.
NOTES
12. Repeat this procedure to create the second construction circle.
Select this
intersection for the
point on the second
circle
Pick this intersection

for the center of the
circles
Pick this intersection for

the point on the first circle
Figure 2: Construction Circles
Task 2. Draft some of the geometry by using an arc.
1. Create an arc by locating its ends using the construction lines and
circles. Click Arc from the DRAFT GEOM menu.
2. Click Ctr/Ends > Vertex , then pick the intersection of the smaller
circle and the lowest horizontal line.
3. Pick the center of the circles as the center of the arc and pick the
intersection of the smaller circle and the vertical line as the other
endpoint.
4. When the system highlights a portion of the circle in red, type

[yes] to accept it or [no] to reject it.

NOTES
Pick #3
Pick #1 Pick #2
Figure 3: Arc Created
Task 3. Create some lines that begin at the end of the arc that you just
created and chain them together.
1. Click Line > Start Chain > Horiz Line > Vertex , then pick the
upper end of the arc that you just created. Finish the line at the
rightmost vertical line.
2. Pick the end of the next line as shown in Figure 4. Continue until
you have created three lines. Finish by pressing the right mouse
button and click Quit from the GET POINT menu.

NOTES
Pick 4
Pick 3
Pick 2
Pick 1
Figure 4: Horizontal and Vertical Lines
Tips & Techniques:

To cancel line creation immediately, press the right mouse
button; to create one more line before canceling, press the
middle mouse button.
3. Create an arc at the end of the line that you just created. Click Arc
> Ctr/Ends > Vertex .
4. Pick the end of the horizontal line, the center of the construction
circles, then pick the intersection of the larger construction circle
and the middle horizontal construction line to finish the arc, as
shown in Figure 5.

NOTES
Pick #1
Pick #3
Pick #2
Figure 5: Second Arc Created
5. When the system highlights a portion of the circle in red, type

[yes] to accept it or type [no] to reject it, depending on which half
highlights.
6. Click Line > Start Chain > 2Points > Vertex to create a
horizontal line and a vertical line, as shown in Figure 6.

NOTES
Pick 3
Pick 2
Pick 1
Figure 6: New Arc and Lines
Task 4. Create a tangent end arc at the end of the line that you just
created, then finish the sketch by extending a vertical line to the lowest
horizontal construction line.
1. Click Arc > Tang End .
2. Pick the start and end points shown in Figure 7.
3. Click Line > 2Points > Vertex and pick the end of the tangent arc
and then the end point shown in Figure 5.
4. Create a fillet arc with a radius by clicking Arc > Fillet , then pick
the two lines shown in Figure 7.
5. Type [0.25] as the radius value. Return to the DETAIL menu.

NOTES
ARC - Pick #1
ARC - Pick #2 Pick these lines
for the fillet arc
Figure 7: Tangent End Arc and Line
Task 5. Mirror the geometry that you just created to create the other half
of the fork.
1. Click Tools > Mirror .
2. Pick the soild lines and arcs, then click Done Sel .
3. Pick the bottom horizontal construction line to mirror about.
4. Click Done/Return to close the TOOLS menu.
Task 6. The construction lines extend off the sheet. Create one
horizontal and two vertical lines and set the line style to display as
centerlines.
1. Click Sketch > Line > 2Points > On Entity.
2. Pick points on the correct construction lines to create the new lines.
Click Return to finish.
3. Delete the construction lines and circles. Click Delete from the
DETAIL menu and pick each construction line and circle.
4. Change the line style of the three new lines. Click Modify > Line
Style , pick the three lines, and click Done Sel .

NOTES
5. Select CENTERLINE from the STYLE drop-down list. Click Apply

> Close .
Figure 8: Finished Fork
6. Save and close the model.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Updating a 2-D Drawing

Task 1. Import an IGES file into Pro/ENGINEER to create a new
drawing called FIXTURE, as shown in Figure 9.
1. Click File > Import > Create New Model .
2. Select MASTER.IGS and click OK .
3. Select DRAWING, type [FIXTURE] as the name, and click OK .
Figure 9: Imported Drawing
4. Zoom in on the view labeled Top View.
Task 2. Create the geometry to represent a cut on Top View.
1. Click Tools > Offset > Ent Chain .
2. Pick the horizontal line above the 2.375 dimension and click Done
Sel .
3. Type [-0.4] as the offset value. Pick the outside left edge, click
Done Sel , and type [-0.8] as the offset value.

NOTES
4. Pick the outside right edge, click Done Sel , and type [-0.8] as the
offset value.
Task 3. Extend the new vertical entities so that they meet the bottom
edge of the view and trim the corners together.
1. Click Trim > Bound , then pick the bottom edge of the view as the
bounding entity. Pick the two new vertical lines to trim to this
boundary.
2. Click Corner and pick the portion of the new left line that you
want to retain.
3. Pick the portion of the new horizontal line that you want to retain.
Repeat this procedure until you have created the view geometry, as
shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10: New Top View
4. Click Create > Dimension to create the 1.40 dimension. Pick the
new horizontal entity and place the dimension using the middle
mouse button.

NOTES
Task 4. Using the geometry of the top view, create the new geometry
for the front view on the drawing.
1. Reset the view to display the entire drawing, then zoom in to view
the front view and the top view.
2. Click Tools > Offset > Ent Chain .
3. Pick the horizontal entity shown in Figure 11. Click Done Sel and
type [0.25] as the offset value.
Offset this line
Figure 11: Front View Geometry
4. Click Trim > Bound .
5. Pick the horizontal line you just created and pick the two vertical
lines in the top view.

NOTES
Task 5. Break the long vertical entities into pieces and then delete the
portions that you do not want.
1. Click Intersect , then pick the left vertical line and the bottom edge
in the top view.
2. Repeat this procedure for the right vertical line. Intersect both
vertical lines again using the edge that you offset in the front view.
3. Click Done/Return to return to the DETAIL menu. Click Delete

and pick the unwanted portions of the vertical lines.
5. [Optional] Create the geometry for the cut in the isometric view
using the same techniques that you used earlier, as shown in Figure
12.
Offset this edge Offset these

by –0.2 edges by –0.55
Figure 12: Isometric View

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can use the 2-D drafting tools to create draft geometry.
• You can use draft geometry to modify an imported drawing.

Module
Symbols
In this module, you learn how to create drawing symbols.
Objectives
• Use variable text in drawing symbols.

• Create families of symbols.
• Set up symbol libraries and place previously defined symbols on a
drawing.
Page 13-1
NOTES
CREATING DRAWING SYMBOLS

A drawing symbol is a collection of draft geometry and text. When you
use a symbol in a drawing, it becomes a single entity or instance. To place
it in a drawing, you can either retrieve it from a symbol library or create
your own user-defined symbol. If the symbols that you need are
commonly used throughout industry, you may be able to purchase a
symbol library such as a welding symbol library.
Creating Symbol Geometry

• To place a symbol on a drawing, you must first create it and save it as
a Pro/ENGINEER symbol with a .SYM extension in a specified
directory.
Creating an Original Symbol

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to define an original drawing symbol by
drafting the geometry. With this technique, you can define the shape of the
symbol and also add notes or cross-sections to it.
Copying 2-D Draft Geometry from an Existing Drawing

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to import a drawing and then copy the symbol
geometry to create a Pro/ENGINEER symbol.
Copying an Existing Symbol

You can copy the existing symbol and change it to create a new symbol.
Importing a Symbol
You can use an IGES, DXF, SET, TIFF, and CGM symbol that was
created in another CAD package by importing it into Pro/ENGINEER.
Once you have imported it into the system, you can change it by adding or
removing geometry or notes.
Adding Text to a Symbol

You can place text on a symbol as a free note. The system places
invariable text on a symbol by default, which means that you cannot
NOTES
change the text and it remains the same every time you use the symbol. To
create text that varies depending on the placement of the symbol, you can
add variable text to the symbol.
Using Variable Text
Figure 1: Creating Variable Text
If the text in your symbol must differ depending upon where you use the
symbol in your drawing, you can create the text as variable. To create
variable text, enclose the text within two back slashes, for example, \note\.
This allows you to change the value of the text when you place the symbol
on a drawing. You can specify the type of text to show in the note as text,
integers, or floating points.
You can also show parameter values in the variable symbol text so that the
symbol text updates when the parameter changes. To display the
dimension value in the symbol, enter [&dim] as the only preset value for
the variable text. When you place the symbol on a drawing and pick a
dimension, the system shows its value in the symbol. You can use this
technique with any user-defined parameters, as well as Pro/REPORT
parameters.
Grouping Symbols
When you need to create several symbols that have similar geometry, you
can create a family of symbols, referred to as a group. A single generic
symbol contains all entities pertaining to a particular symbol family. You
Sym b o ls Pag e 1 3- 3
NOTES
can arrange geometry and text from the generic symbol into groups and
subgroups.
Figure 2: Symbol Groups
For this example, you would create a generic symbol containing a

horizontal line and two triangles. From that generic symbol, you would
then create two groups—Group A and Group B—defining them as
exclusive. By doing so, you cannot combine Group A and Group B to
create an instance; you can only use them separately. With these groups,
you can create two instances of the symbol: Instance 1 contains Group A
and the horizontal line, whereas Instance 2 contains Group B and the
horizontal line. The horizontal line appears in both instances because you
did not include it in a group. Any entity not in a group appears in all
instances.
For the second portion of the example, you would create the same groups,
but define them as independent. By doing so, you can use them separately
or together to create an instance. This creates three instances in this
family.
Controlling Symbols
You can control the display of symbols in your drawings by defining their
placement and setting their height.
NOTES
Symbol Placement
When you originally create a symbol, you must define the allowed
placement types to limit the ways in which other users can place the
symbol. If you assign the placement type as free, for example, other users
could only place the symbol on the drawing as free without using a leader.
You should set the placement type according to the standard for the
symbol you are creating. You should allow other users some flexibility,
but prevent them from placing it incorrectly.
Symbol Height
You can control the size of a symbol when you create it by setting the
height to a fixed size or as variable. If the symbol height is fixed, the size
of the symbol always remains the same. To specify the height as variable,
you can use three different methods:
• Base it on the units of the drawing – To use this method, you must
change the drawing setup file.
• Base it on the units of the model – The system automatically
adjusts the symbol’s size to stay proportional to the model if you
change the view scale.
• Relate it to the height of specific text in the symbol – The system
changes the size of the symbol if you change the height of the
specified text.
Storing Symbols
To specify the directory in which Pro/ENGINEER should store each
symbol, set the configuration file option pro_symbol_dir. If you do
not specify a path in the configuration file, the system stores symbols in
the working directory. You can enter an offset path that branches off of
pro_symbol_dir. For example, for a UNIX-based system, if you have
specified pro_symbol_dir as /usr/proe/symbols, then:
• If you press <ENTER>, the system places the symbol in

/usr/proe/symbols.
• If you enter [down_one_dir], it stores the symbol in
/usr/proe/symbols/down_one_dir.
• You cannot go up the directory tree by entering [..].
• If you want to store the symbol in a directory that you cannot access as
an offset of the current pro_symbol_dir, change
pro_symbol_dir before you begin.
NOTES
• You do not have to store the symbol to use it in a drawing. However, if

you do not write it to disk, the system only stores it locally in the
drawing and does not make it available for use in other drawings or by
other users.
Figure 3: Symbol Attributes
PLACING SYMBOLS ON A DRAWING

When placing symbols on a drawing, Pro/ENGINEER allows you to
retrieve a system symbol or a user symbol. You can obtain system
symbols by purchasing a library of welding symbols, electronic symbols,
etc. Once you retrieve the appropriate symbol, you must specify the
following using the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box:
• Relationship between the symbol being placed and the original

symbol.
• Values for the variable text in the symbol.
• Groups that the system should include in this instance.
Defining the Relationship Between the Symbol

Instance and Original Symbol
When you place a symbol on a drawing, you should specify if you want
the system to change the symbol instance when the original symbol
changes. Using this method, you can avoid having to manually update
existing drawings every time the symbol definition changes (for example,
because of a new standard).
NOTES
If you do not need to reflect those changes in the symbol instance, you can
simply place it independently of the original symbol. Pro/ENGINEER
then creates a copy of the instance locally in the drawing.
Figure 4: Symbol Placement
Changing Variable Text Values in a Symbol

Instance
When you place a symbol with variable text on a drawing, you can change
the content of the note included in the symbol instance. To modify the
text, you can select any values that you specified when you defined the
symbol, but the system limits you to one value for each instance of
variable text.
Figure 5: Variable Text
Selecting Groups to Include in the Instance

After you create a family of symbols by defining a group, you can use the
SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box to place one of the instances of this
family on a drawing.
NOTES
Figure 6: Symbols Group
If the groups are independent, you can select any number of groups to
build the instance; if the groups are exclusive, you can only select one
group to include in the instance. As you select these groups to include, you
can preview the symbol. When the symbol is correct, you can then place it
on the drawing.
REDEFINING EXISTING SYMBOLS

Once you have placed a symbol on a drawing, you can redefine it at any
time using the same method that you used to create it originally. You can
change variable text values, grouping information, allowed placement
types, and text or lines styles, as well as add or remove geometry or notes.
Note:
Redefining a symbol affects the display of all subsequent
instances and all symbol instances that you have added to the
drawing using the Use Definition option.
Updating a Redefined Symbol in a Drawing

When you place a symbol in a drawing after redefining it, the system does
not require you to update it in the drawing to reflect the most recent
definition. It only asks you to update it if the version of the retrieved
symbol is later than the version of a symbol on the drawing that has the
same name. Updating the drawing symbol changes every symbol in the
NOTES
drawing with that name. If you do not update it in the current drawing, any
additional instances that you create are of that version, not the most recent
one. To update an existing symbol, retrieve it into the drawing and enter
[Y] when Pro/ENGINEER asks you if you want to update all instances of
the symbol in the current drawing to the most recent version.
USING WELDING SYMBOLS

With a Pro/DETAIL license, you can access the Welding Symbols
Library, which contains a collection of generic system symbols according
to ANSI and ISO standards. Using this library, you can create a variety of
welding, brazing, and examination symbols in a drawing.
Welding symbols are located in the System Symbols of the OPEN dialog
box.
USING SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS

If you have a Pro/DETAIL license, you can access a set of standard
surface finish symbols in the directory
LOADDIRECTORY/SYMBOLS/SURFFINS. The system does not place
surface finish symbols as it would place other symbols in a drawing.
Before you can place a surface finish, you must specify it as a generic,
machined, or unmachined symbol, and provide a roughness height value,
if needed.
Surface finish symbols are located in the System Symbols of the OPEN
dialog box.
Table 1 lists the available configuration file options that control drawing
symbols.
NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawing Symbols

pro_surface_finish_dir directory path Sets the default directory
to which the system saves
surface finish symbols and
later retrieves them.
pro_symbol_dir directory path Sets the default directory
from which the system
saves symbols and later
retrieves them.
sym_leader_orient_move_ no Automatically regroups a
text yes symbol after moving text.

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Drawing
Symbols
node_radius default Controls the display of
value nodes in symbols.
sym_flip_rotated_text no Flips any text in a Rotate
yes Text symbol that is upside
down. If set to “yes,” and
the symbol orientation is
+/-90°, the system flips the
text, rotating along with
the symbol.

NOTES
Goal
To create and place symbols on a drawing.
Method
In the first exercise, you create a symbol using variable text and then
place it on a drawing.
In the second exercise, you create a group of symbols and place the
different variations of the symbol on a drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Symbol with Variable Text

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and draft the geometry of a
symbol. Add a note to the symbol with variable text.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_SYMBOLS.DRW.
1. Create the symbol shown in Figure 7. Click Create > Symbol

Definition > Define and type [delta] as the name of the symbol.
2. Increase the size of the sub-window by dragging the corner of the

window to a new location.
Figure 7: Delta Symbol
NOTES
3. Set up the draft grid by turning it on, changing the grid size, and
turning on the grid snap. Click Detail > Modify > Grid > Draft
Grid > Grid On . Click Grid Params > X&Y Spacing , then type
[0.4].
4. Click Done /Return from the MODIFY DRAW menu. Select the
Snap to Grid check box in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
5. Zoom in to approximately 4 grid squares.
6. Using the 2-D drafting functionality, sketch a triangle. Use two

grid squares for the horizontal length and the height of the triangle.
7. Click Sketch > Line > 2Points > Pick Pnt . Sketch the three sides
of the triangle. Since you are not using a chain, pick a starting and
ending point for each line.
8. Round off the corners of the triangle with three fillet arcs. Click
Arc > Fillet , then pick the two lines that compose the corner of the
triangle.
9. Type [0.1] as the radius of the arc. Repeat this procedure for each
corner.
10. Click Return from the DRAFT GEOM menu.
11. Turn off the grid snap. Clear the Snap to Grid check box.
12. Create a note in the center of the triangle. Click Create > Note.
Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal > Standard, Center >
Make Note. Locate the note in the center of the triangle.
13. Create the note so that so that you can easily change the text when
you place it. Type [\num\] as the note text and press <ENTER>
twice to finish.
14. Click Done/Return > Done/Return .
Task 2. Define the attributes of the symbol. Allow any user to place the
symbol using free placement, a left leader, or a right leader.
1. Click Attributes to define the attributes of the symbol.
2. Using the SYMBOL ATTRIBUTES dialog box, define the attributes

so that the person that places the symbol can use a free placement,
a leader attached to the left side, or a leader attached to the right
side.

NOTES
3. Select FREE and specify the symbol origin by picking the arc at the
top of the triangle. Select LEFT LEADER and pick the arc on the
left side of the triangle. Select RIGHT LEADER and pick the arc on
the right side of the triangle.
Task 3. Define the height of the symbol based on the text height.
Specify the preset values of the variable text as the numbers one through
five.
1. Select VARIABLE–TEXT RELATED and pick the variable note as

the reference text.
2. Specify the preset values of the variable text as one through five.
3. Click the Var Text tab.
4. Select NUM on the left side of the dialog box and enter one
through five in the PRESET VALUES FOR: area.
5. Select INTEGER so that the system only uses integers in this

symbol. Click OK to finish defining the symbol attributes.
6. Save the symbol for use in future drawings. Click Done from the
SYMBOL EDIT menu. Click Write and press <ENTER> to accept
the default directory. Click Done/Return to return to the DETAIL
menu.
Task 4. Place the delta symbol on the plunger drawing with a leader.
1. Click Create > Symbol > Instance . Select DELTA from the
SYMBOL DEFINITION drop-down list.
2. Attach the symbol to the lower left view with a leader, as shown in
Figure 8. Select WITH LEADERS from the TYPE drop-down list.
3. Accept the defaults On Entity > Arrow Head and pick the right
side edge of the lower left view.
4. Click Done Sel > Done to place the symbol with one leader.
Locate the symbol to the right of the view.
NOTES
Figure 8: Symbol Location
5. Change the variable text to display the number 3 on the symbol.

Click the Var Text tab, then select 3 from the NUM drop-down list.
6. Click OK to finish placing the symbol. Click Done /Return from

the SYMBOL TYPE menu.
Note:
After you place the symbol, you can use Move and Mod
Attach to change its position, Modify to change the number
for the variable text, and Modify > Symbol to reopen the
SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box.
7. Place a surface finish symbol on the plunger body drawing.

Machine the symbol with a roughness height of 32.
8. Click Create > Surf Finish > Retrieve > Machined >Open>
Standard1.sym > Open to create a surface finish symbol on the
plunger body drawing.
9. Attach the symbol to a surface with a leader, as shown in Figure 9.

Click Leader and pick the surface.
10. Click Done Sel > Done . Pick a position for the symbol and type
[32] as the roughness height.
11. Use the Move > Move Text > Mod Attach options to reposition
the symbol.

NOTES
Figure 9: Surface Finish Symbol
Task 5. Create a new symbol to use as a BOM balloon. Copy the

symbol created earlier and add two notes to use for the item number and
the quantity. Create the values as variable text notes so that they will
change when you use them in a drawing.
1. Create a new drawing symbol called DELTA_BOM. Click Create ,

Symbol , Definition , and Define . Enter [DELTA_BOM] as the
symbol name.
2. Copy the delta symbol that you created earlier in the exercise.
Click Copy Symbol , DELTA.SYM and click Open . Accept the
default value for the instance height, if prompted.
3. Locate the symbol in the middle of the new window and click
Done from the ADJUST INST menu. Press <CTRL> and the
mouse buttons to zoom in on the symbol.
4. Change the variable text in the symbol to use the item number in a
BOM. Click Mod Text > Text Line , then pick the note.
5. In the message area, backspace over \num\ and type

[\item_num\]. Press <ENTER>. Click Done/Return from the
MODIFY TEXT menu.
6. Create a note and locate it to the right of the triangle. Click Detail
> Create > Note .
7. Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal > Standard > Left > Make
Note . Locate the note to the right of the triangle.
NOTES
8. Create the note so that it displays the quantity for a component in

an assembly. Type [x \comp_qty\].
9. Press <ENTER> twice to finish. Click Move to align the notes

vertically.
Task 6. Define the attributes of the symbol to use whenever you place
this custom balloon on a drawing.
1. Define the attributes of the symbol with a left and right leader
placement. Click Attributes .
2. Select FREE and pick the arc at the top of the triangle. Select LEFT
LEADER and pick the arc on the left side of the triangle.
3. Select RIGHT LEADER and pick the arc on the right side of the
triangle.
4. Define the height of the symbol based on the height of the variable
text in the symbol. Select VARIABLE–TEXT RELATED and pick
the variable note as the reference text.
5. Define the default values for the variable text as the index number
and quantity for the BOM. Click the Var Text tab.
6. Select ITEM_NUM on the left side of the dialog box and type
[index] in lower case in the PRESET VALUES FOR: area.
7. Select COMP_QTY on the left side of the dialog box and type
[qty] in lower case in the PRESET VALUES FOR: area.
8. Select TEXT and click OK and Done .
9. Save the symbol for use in future drawings.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Symbol Groups

Task 1. Create a new drawing and draft the geometry of the symbol by
copying the draft geometry from the drawing. The geometry should
consist of a circle, a square, and some arrows.
1. Create a new A-size, landscape drawing named GROUPS. Clear the

Use default template check box and set Default Model to none .
2. Turn on the display of the draft grid and change the X and Y
spacing to [0.1]. Zoom in so that you can see approximately 20
grid squares across the screen.
3. Turn on grid snap.
4. Create the sketch as shown in Figure 10, using the 2-D drafting
functionality. Create a square that is 10 grid squares by 10 grid
squares.
5. Click Sketch > Line > 2Points . Sketch the geometry of the
square.
Figure 10: Generic Symbol
6. Create a circle centered inside the square and with a diameter of

1.00. Click Circle > Center/Dia .
7. Pick the center of the square for the center of the circle, then type
[1] as the diameter.
8. Create the arrows to the left and the right of the square. Click Line
> 2Points , then sketch the geometry of each arrow.
9. Click Return from the DRAFT GEOM menu to finish.
NOTES
10. Create a note with variable text centered in the circle. Click Create
> Note .
11. Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal> Standard Center> Make
Note . Locate the note in the center of the circle.
12. Enter [\no\] as the note text and press <ENTER> twice to finish.
Click Done/Return from the NOTES TYPE menu.
13. Change the text height to 0.25. Click Modify > Text > Text
Height .
14. Pick the note and click Done Sel . Type [0.25]. Return to
DETAIL menu.
15. Create a symbol called GEN_SYM. Click Create > Symbol

Definition > Define . Type [GEN_SYM] as the name.
16. Copy the geometry from the drawing to create the symbol. Click
Copy Drawing > Pick Many, pick all the entities on the drawing
and click Done Sel . Pro/ENGINEER copies the entities into the
sub-window.
Task 2. Create two symbol groups: one with the square and one with the
circle. Each group will have the option for the right or left arrows.
1. Create a group called square and pick all of the entities except for
the circle. Click Groups > Create and type [SQUARE] as the name.
2. Click Pick Many and draw a pick box surrounding the entire
symbol. Click Unsel Item and pick the circle. Click Done Sel to
finish.
3. Create a group called circle and pick all of the entities except for
the square. Click Create and type [CIRCLE] as the name.
4. Click Pick Many and draw a pick box surrounding the entire
symbol.
5. Click Unsel Item and pick one of the lines that compose the
square. Click Unsel Item again and pick another line of the square.
6. Continue with this process until you have unselected the entire
square. Click Done Sel to finish.

NOTES
7. Define the group attributes to be exclusive at this level so that

when you use the symbol, you can only place one of the instances
(square or circle) at one time. Click Group Attr > Exclusive .
8. Click Change Level > Square > This Level to change to the
square level so you can create some variations of the square
symbol.
9. Create two variations within the square group: one with the left
arrow and the other with the right arrow. Click Create and type
[LEFT_ARROW] as the name.
10. Pick the square box, the note, and the arrow on the left side of the
symbol, then click Done Sel .
11. Click Create and type [RIGHT_ARROW] as the name. Pick the
square box, the note, and the arrow on the right side of the symbol,
12. Define the attributes at the square level as exclusive so that you
can display the square on the screen as a symbol with a left arrow
or a right arrow, but not both. Click Group Attr > Exclusive .
13. Click Change Level > Up > Circle > This Level to change to the
circle level so that you can create some variations of the circle
symbol.
14. Create two variations within the circle group: one with the left
arrow and the other with the right arrow. Click Create and type
[LEFT_ARROW] as the name.
15. Pick the circle, the note, and the arrow on the left side of the
symbol, then click Done Sel .
16. Click Create and type [RIGHT_ARROW] as the name. Pick the
circle, the note, and the arrow on the right side of the symbol, then
click Done Sel .
17. Define the attributes at the circle level as independent so that you
can display the circle on the screen as a symbol with a left arrow, a
right arrow, or both. Click Group Attr > Independent .
18. Click Done/Return from the SYMBOL GROUPS menu.
19. Define the attributes for this symbol using a free placement. Click
Attributes and select FREE. Pick the center of the circle as the
origin.
NOTES
20. Click the Var Text tab and enter [1] as the value for the variable
text. Select INTEGER and click OK to finish defining the attributes.
Click Done .
21. Save the symbol to disk. Click Write and press <ENTER> to take
the default directory.
22. Close the current window.
Task 3. Create a new drawing and place the different variations of the
symbol on the drawing.
1. Create a new A-size drawing called SYMBOLS in a landscape

orientation. Do not use a drawing template and set Default Model
to none .
2. Place the square variations of the symbol on the drawing. Click

Create > Symbol > Instance .
3. Click Retrieve…, select GEN_SYM and click Open .
4. Select FREE NOTE from the TYPE drop-down list and pick a
position on the drawing for the symbol.
5. Click the Grouping tab and pick the plus sign beside square.
6. Select SQUARE > LEFT_ARROW and click OK .
7. Click the Placement tab and select FREE NOTE from the TYPE
drop-down list.
8. Pick below the first symbol. Click the Grouping tab and select
SQUARE > RIGHT_ARROW.
9. When you select RIGHT_ARROW, the system automatically

unselects LEFT_ARROW because the attributes for the square level
are set to exclusive.
10. Click New Inst .
11. Place the circle variations of the symbol on the drawing. Click the
Placement tab and select FREE NOTE from the TYPE drop-down
list, then pick to the right of the first symbol.
12. Click the Grouping tab and click the plus sign next to circle.
Select CIRCLE > LEFT_ARROW. When you select CIRCLE, the

NOTES
system automatically unselects SQUARE because the attributes for

the top level are set to exclusive.
drop-down list, then pick a position similar to the one shown in
Figure 11.
15. Click the Grouping tab and select CIRCLE > RIGHT_ARROW.
When you select RIGHT_ARROW, the system does not
automatically unselect LEFT_ARROW because the attributes for
the circle level are set to independent.
drop-down list, then pick a position similar to the one shown in
Figure 11.
18. Click the Grouping tab and select CIRCLE > RIGHT_ARROW
>LEFT_ARROW. Click OK to finish.
Figure 11: Symbol Instances
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a symbol with variable text.

• You can create a group of symbol instances.

Module
Using Layers to Control Drawing Display

In this module, you learn how to create layers and associate drawing
items to them.
Objectives
• Create a new layer in a drawing.

• Specify the display of the layer in the drawing.
Page 14-1
NOTES
PURPOSE OF LAYERS
A layer is a grouping of model items such as features or datum planes.
You associate items to a layer so that you can manipulate them
collectively.
In Drawing mode, layers are typically used to blank model construction

geometry, such as surfaces, curves, planes, points or axis. They are also
useful for manipulating draft geometry when working with legacy data.
Creating a Layer in a Drawing
Figure 1: Layers Dialog Box
Although layers can represent different entities, you always create them by
following these three steps:
• Create the layer.

• Associate items to the layer.
• Determine the display status of the layer.
NOTES
Creating the Layer

When layers are created you must enter a layer name. It is recommended
that you refer to your company layering standards to ensure the name you
choose follows these guidelines. Also, you should verify that the layer you
are intending to create does not already exist in the model.
Associating Items to Layers

Once you have created a layer, you can then associate specific items to it.
You can place an item on a layer using three basic methods:
Setting up a Layer Manually

You select features by picking on the model or in the MODEL TREE.
Copying Layer Information

You can quickly copy the items associated with one layer and associate
the same items to a new layer using the copy/paste options. Likewise,
items can be moved from one layer to another using the cut/paste options.
Creating a Layer Automatically

When assigning names to layers and associating items to them, you should
use common naming conventions to make it easier for any user to
manipulate the model. The most effective way to make sure that all users
understand what each of your layers represents is to use default layers.
When you create a default layer, the system automatically adds specific
entities to it as you create them. To create a default layer, set the
configuration file option def_layer by specifying the value as type-
option layername, where type-option is the type of item that you want the
system to place on the layer, and layername is the name of the layer.
Table 1 lists the available configuration file options that control default
layers.
Laye rs Pag e 1 4- 3
NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Default Layers

Value Description Value Description
layer_detail_ item draft items layer_driven_dim driven dimensions
layer_assem_ assembly members layer_draft_dim draft dimensions
member
layer_feature all features layer_refdim all reference
dimensions
layer_geom_feat features with layer_part_refdim part reference
geometry dimensions
layer_nogeom_feat features without layer_draft_refdim draft reference
geometry dimensions
layer_cosm_sketch cosmetic sketches layer_note drawing notes
layer_axis features with axes layer_gtol geometric
tolerances
layer_quilts quilts layer_symbol symbols
layer_surface surface features layer_sfin surface finish
symbols
layer_datum datum planes layer_draft_entity all draft entities
layer_point datum points layer_draft_constr draft construction
entities
layer_curve datum curves layer_draft_geom draft geometry
entities
layer_csys datum coordinate layer_draft_hidden draft hidden entities
systems
layer_curve_ent curve entities layer_draft_grp draft groups
layer_dim all dimensions layer_draft_datum draft datums
layer_parameter_ parameter layer_dwg_table drawing tables
dim dimension
11 default layers of where “featuretype” layer_snap_line snap lines
the form: is any of the
layer_featuretype_ following: hole,
round, chamfer,
feat slot, cut, protrusion,
rib, draft, shell,
corn_chamf,
assy_cut
Specifying the Display of a Layer

You can control the display of the model layer in your drawing without
having to change the part or assembly in which that item was created
• Showing a layer displays all items on that layer on the screen.
NOTES
• Blanking a layer removes from the screen any item on that layer that
does not affect mass properties.
• Isolatinga layer displays all items on that layer, but removes all non-
mass items on any other layer from the screen.
When working with the display status of layers, keep in mind the
following:
• To display the items of a layer that has been set to Blank , Isolate , or
Hide , set the display status to Show .
• The Blank and Isolate display options do not affect solid geometry.
The only exception to this rule is that you can blank components in an
assembly from the screen.
• The Isolate display status takes priority over the Blank status.
• For Assembly layers, if you set a specific layer to Isolate ,
Pro/ENGINEER blanks all other layers and also blanks all other items
that are not associated to any layer.
• For Assembly layers, Isolate affects the level of the member and the
levels above it; Blank affects the level of the member and the levels
below it.
• For Assembly layers, to control the display status of items on layers in
lower-level models, you should assign common names to the layers
throughout the levels of the assembly. Any changes that you make to
the display status of an upper-level layer then propagate through the
levels to all other layers with the same name.
Note:
Pro/ENGINEER does not change the display status of a layer
when you save the object. The next time that you retrieve the
object, the display status reverts back to Show for all layers.
To save the display status with the object, you must select
Save Status from the LAYER DISPLAY dialog box.
Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing

You can control the layer display in a drawing by using any of the
following methods:
• Separating drawing and model layers – Forcing a drawing to ignore

the layer status in its model completely when determining if it should
display an item on a layer.
NOTES
• Controlling drawing and model layers simultaneously – Setting

the display of model layers to follow the display of drawing layers
with the same name.
• Manipulating layer display status in individual views – Displaying
drawing layers independently for individual drawing views or making
the layer display dependent on the drawing.
Separating Drawing and Model Layers

You can set several drawing setup file options to allow you to control
darwing layer display status independant of the model. This is useful when
working with GTOL Set Datums. These datums must be displayed on the
drawing, but may not need to be visible in the model. Likewise, the
construction datum planes need to be visible when manipulating the model
features, but do not need to be shown on the drawing.
Controlling Drawing and Model Layers Simultaneously

You can set the display of model layers to follow the display of drawing
layers with the same name. For example, if you blank the drawing layer
datums, the system also blanks all items on the datums layer of the model.
If the model is an assembly and you add another component with a layer
of the same name, it automatically sets the display of any items on the
model layer named datums to be the same as the drawing layer.
Manipulating Layer Display Status in Individual Views

There may be cases where the layer display in one view must be different
from the other views. Drawing views do not have individual layers for
each view—they use the layers in the drawing. However, you can control
the display status of drawing layers separately for each view using the
LAYERS DIALOG box.
Independent View Display
The display of detailed views are dependent on the parent view. You can
use the display mode settings to allow you to control these views
independent of the parent. This will also allow you to set the layer display
of a detailed view different from the parent.
NOTES

Table 2 lists the available drawing setup file options that control layer
creation in Drawing mode.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Layers

draw_layer_overrides_ yes Directs the drawing layer
model no display setting to
determine the setting of the
drawing model layers with
the same name. If set to
“yes,” the system
implicitly includes
drawing model layers in
drawing layers with the
same name for the
purposes of setting display.
If set to “no,” it ignores
nondrawing layers when
you set the display status
of layers in the drawing
model.
ignore_model_layer_ yes If set to “yes,” the system
status no ignores changes to all layer
statuses in the model of the
drawing made in another
mode.
NOTES
Goal
To use layers to control drawing display.
Method
In this exercise, you learn how to use layers to control your drawing
display and override the environment settings for datum planes, axes,
coordinate systems, and points.
EXERCISE 1: Using Layers to Control Drawing

Display
Task 1. Retrieve the plunger body part. Create a layer for the coordinate
system on the model.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_LAYERS.PRT.
2. Turn on the display of coordinate systems and turn off the display
of planes and axes; repaint the screen.
3. Click View > Layers . Click and type [CSYS_PART_DEF] as the

layer name. Click OK .
4. Be sure the layer name CSYS_PART_DEF is selected and click

.
5. Click Feature , and select the coordinate system

CSYS_PART_DEF from the model.
6. Click Done Sel > Done/Return .
NOTES
7. Select CSYS_PART_DEF and click and repaint the screen. The

coordinate system should no longer appear on the screen.
Task 2. Although you have turned off the datum plane display, datum
plane A remains on the screen because the environment does not affect set
datums. Remove Datum A from display by creating a layer, associating
datum A to that layer, and then blanking that layer.
1. Type [SET_DATUMS] as the name.
2. Make sure the layer SET_DATUMS is selected and add feature

Datum A to this layer.
3. Blank the layer SET_DATUMS that you just created so that the
datum no longer appears on the screen
4. Save the part and close the window
Task 3. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and turn on the display of
datum planes, axes, coordinate systems, and points. Notice that all of the
items now appear on the screen. Set up a layer for datum planes and blank
the layer.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_LAYERS.DRW.
2. Use the toolbar icons to turn on the display of datum planes,

coordinate systems, and datum axes; then repaint the screen.
3. Create a layer for datum planes and associate the default datum
planes to this layer. Type [DTMS_PART_DEF] as the layer name.
4. Make sure the layer name DTMS_PART_DEF is selected, and add

features DTM1 , DTM2 , and DTM3 from the model.
Tips & Techniques:

You can easily select datum planes using the MODEL TREE
tool; otherwise, you should always use the Query Sel option
to ensure that you select the appropriate datums.
NOTES
5. Blank the layer DTMS_PART_DEF so that the datums no longer

display on the screen.
Note:
The system automatically repaints the screen after changing
the layer status in the drawing mode.
6. Determine which items are associated to the XSEC_DATUMS

layer. Click Tree > Highlight . Select XSEC_DATUMS. Another
datum plane highlights on the screen.
7. Click Show > Layer Items . Click the [+] to expand the
XSEC_DATUMS layer and PLUNGER_BODY.PRT. The feature
associated to this layer is listed.
8. Blank the XSEC_DATUMS layer. The datum plane should no

longer appear on the screen.
Note:
This system created this layer by using the default layers
functionality. When you create datums to use in cross-sections,
the system automatically adds them to this layer.
Task 4. Create a layer for the datum axes on the drawing and blank that
layer.
1. Type [DATUM_AXES] as the layer name.
2. Associate all the datum axes, except the set datum D, to the layer
DATUM_AXES. Make sure the layer name DATUM_AXES is
selected. When adding items, click Text > Sel By Menu > Axis .
Select all axes, them remove axis D from the list.
3. Blank the layer DATUM_AXES so that the axis names no longer

appear on the screen.
4. Blank the datum coordinate system from all the views on the
drawing.

NOTES
Task 5. Create a layer for the set axis D and blank that layer from some
of the views on the drawing, but not all views.
1. Create a layer for the set datum axis D. Type [SET_AXES] as the
name.
2. Associate the datum axis D to the layer that you just created. Make
sure the layer SET AXES is selected and use add text to pick axis
D.
3. Make the view in the lower right corner independent of the rest of
the drawing. Select DRAWING VIEW from the ACTIVE OBJECT
drop-down list; then pick the lower right view.
4. Alter the display status of the lower right view to blank the
SET_AXES layer.
5. Repeat this procedure for the upper left view.
6. [Optional] Create a layer for the snap lines on the drawing. Assign
the snap lines to the layer and blank the layer.
7. The drawing should look like the one shown in Figure 2. Save it.
The system displays a message to warn you that it is not going to
save the layer display status. You must explicitly save the surface,
curves and points display. Click View >Layers > Save Status >
Close .
8. Save the file and close window.
NOTES

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a layer in a drawing.

• You can specify the display of a layer.
Module
Resolving Regeneration Problems

In this module, you learn how to resolve regeneration failures in
drawings.
Objectives
• Identify failed model features.

• Determine the reason the model features failed.
• Resolve the regeneration failure.
Page 15-1
NOTES
RESOLVING FEATURE FAILURES

Features fail regeneration for a variety of reasons, but failure usually
results from a conflict between two features. In Drawing mode, this
usually occurs after you modify a dimension and regenerate the model.
Regeneration failures are actually beneficial for several reasons:
• Pro/ENGINEER automatically places you in an environment in which

you can diagnose and resolve the problem.
• After you resolve the problem, the resulting model is more flexible and
robust than it was originally.
• Since the model is more flexible, you can make future changes easily.
If Pro/ENGINEER detects a conflict between two features and is unable to
successfully regenerate, it retrieves the model into a subwindow and
places you in the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Once you enter
this environment, you should identify the failed feature and determine the
cause of the failure before trying to resolve the problem.
Identifying the Failed Feature

When a feature fails regeneration, a diagnostics window appears on the
screen, which provides information about the failed feature such as the
feature type and number. Although this information is helpful, sometimes
it is not sufficient for determining which feature failed. In those cases, you
can investigate further.
Investigating
When a feature fails regeneration, the system displays on the screen only
the features that successfully regenerated. Therefore, it does not allow you
to view the failed feature or any feature that comes after it in the
regeneration cycle. After reviewing the information in the diagnostics
window, you can examine the failed feature or subsequent features by
working on a backup model.
The backup model shows all of the features in their pre-regenerated state.
You can use it to view the failed feature on the screen and modify or
restore dimensions of features that are not displayed on the current model.
If you have selected MAKE REGEN BACKUP in the DEFAULT ACTIONS
area of the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, Pro/ENGINEER saves a backup
copy of the model to the hard drive upon each regeneration. If the model
regenerates successfully, the system automatically removes the backup
NOTES
from the hard drive; but if you have a regeneration failure, the backup
model is available for you to use.
Note:
Using the regeneration backup results in longer regeneration
times because the system must save the model to the hard
drive in addition to regenerating it.
Using the Last Saved Version of the Model

If you have not selected MAKE REGEN BACKUP in the ENVIRONMENT
dialog box, you can still use a backup model. Pro/ENGINEER uses the
last saved version of the model as the backup. However, if you have not
saved recently, the features that you need may not exist in the last saved
version of your model. To avoid this problem, after the model fails
regeneration, undo the changes and save the model. After saving, perform
the task that caused the failure again. This technique provides you with a
useful backup model.
Determining the Cause of the Failure

Often, the most challenging task that you must perform in order to solve
regeneration problems is determining why the feature failed regeneration.
If the information that the system provides in the diagnostics window is
not sufficient, you can use the Investigate menu options to access other
tools that can assist you in determining the cause:
• Backup Model – With the backup model, you can view the part prior
to the regeneration failure. The current model does not display the
failed feature, so you cannot see the problem on the screen. The
backup model is probably the most useful tool available when
investigating the problem.
• List Changes – Lists the changes that have been made to the model to
direct you to the problem (for example, modified dimensions).
• Geom Check – Provides you with information or recommendations
that may be useful and highlights problematic geometry on the screen.
• Show Refs – Shows each missing or invalid references on the screen
that you used for a feature. You can use the backup model to highlight
their original location.
• Failed Geom – Displays the failed geometry on the screen to help you
visualize the problem.
Re s o l v i n g Reg e n e ra t i o n P r o b l e m s Pag e 1 5- 3
NOTES
• Roll To – Simplifies the model by removing some of the features,

making it easier to concentrate on the failed geometry.
Fixing the Failure

The method that you should use to resolve the regeneration failure
depends upon the information that you obtained through your
investigation of the problem. If you determine that you should not have
made the original modification, you can use the Fix Model or Quick Fix
option to undo any changes and return your model to its original state.
Working on the Failed Feature Only

The Quick Fix option allows you to use a shortcut method to work on the
failed feature only. Using the QUICK FIX menu, you can redefine,
reroute, delete, or suppress the feature.
Working on Any Feature

The Fix Model option allows you to work on any feature on the current
model or the backup model. Using the FIX MODEL menu, you can
resolve the failed feature by doing any of the following:
• Change the references of a feature – If a feature failed regeneration

because of an invalid or missing reference, you can redefine or reroute
the feature to use a different reference.
• Redefine a feature – You can redefine a feature to change the type of
depth, the shape of the sketch, the attributes, and the direction of the
feature. When redefining the sketch, the system displays it the way it
appeared at the time of the feature failure to help you determine the
cause.
• Modify the dimensions of a feature – You can change dimensions to
resolve the problem. For example, changing the radius of a round may
result in a successful regeneration.
• Insert new features – You can reroute a feature by inserting a datum
plane before the failed feature and rerouting to the new plane.
• Change the part accuracy – If the system indicates that you should
increase the part accuracy (due to having very small features on a very
large model), you can change the part accuracy to resolve this
problem. The default accuracy of 0.0012 is acceptable for the majority
of cases. If you change the accuracy, you should make very minor
changes until you isolate the problem.
NOTES
Note:
Increasing the part accuracy results in longer regeneration
times and larger file sizes. You should only use this method if
you are unable to resolve the problem using any other method.
Tips on Resolving Regeneration Failures

When you encounter a regeneration failure, keep in mind that only one
feature can fail in Pro/ENGINEER at a time—not the entire part—and the
failing feature might not be the actual cause of your problem. You should,
do more to investigate the problem beyond simply examining the failed
feature.
To minimize regeneration failures, you should make changes to the model

as you design it. That is, as you add a feature to the design, make some
changes to observe how the feature behaves. In this way, you can detect
any problems before moving on with the remainder of the design work.
Prior to resolving the conflict, gather as much information as possible to
ensure that you fully understand the problem before changing your design.
NOTES
Goal
To understand why features fail and how to resolve the failure.
Method
In this exercise, you change dimensions on the plunger body drawing to
cause some features to fail, then investigate and resolve the problems.
EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failed Features

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and change the value of the
radius on the tabs. After the model fails, investigate to determine which
feature caused the failure.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_RESOLVE.DRW.
1. Switch to Sheet 2 of the drawing and zoom in on DETAIL 1.
2. Modify the radius of the round on the tab to 0.15. Click Modify >
Value and pick the 0.05 radius dimension. Type [0.15].
3. Click Regenerate > Model to update the model to the new

dimension.
4. Click Feature Info from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window.

An INFORMATION WINDOW appears, indicating that the round
with feature ID number 961 failed. Read through this information
and close the INFORMATION WINDOW.
5. Add the Feature ID number as a new column in the MODEL TREE

window so that you can highlight the failed feature on the screen to
determine which feature actually failed. Click View > Model Tree
Setup > Column Display . Select FEAT ID and click >OK .
6. Select the round feature from the MODEL TREE window.
NOTES
7. Set the backup model as the active model and highlight the failed
feature on the screen, as shown in Figure 1.
8. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Confirm , then select the
round feature from the MODEL TREE window. You should be able
to determine that the round on the tab is the failed feature.
Failed round
Figure 1: Failed Round Feature
Task 2. Once you have determined why the round failed regeneration,
change the model so that the feature regenerates successfully.
1. Choose Resolve Hints from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window

and read through the hints provided by Pro/ENGINEER.
2. In the RESOLVE HINTS window, the system advises you to use the
Investigate option to obtain some information.
3. Click List Changes . An INFORMATION window indicates that

when you changed the dimension d75 from 0.05 to 0.15, it caused
the feature to fail.
4. Click Current Model > Failed Geom . Some surfaces on the model
appear in cyan and the SHOW ERRORS menu appears as shown
in Figure 2. Click Item Info to display some information about the
failed geometry. Click Close to exit the INFORMATION window.
Click Backup Modl from the INVESTIGATE menu.
NOTES
You cannot
construct the
round on these
surfaces
Figure 2: Round Surfaces
5. Click Analysis > Measure .
6. Select Distance from the TYPE drop-down list and pick the two
surfaces. The measured distance should be 0.125. The new radius
of the round (0.15) is too large to fit in the space provided.
7. Move the tab to allow more room or change the radius to a value
that is less than 0.125. Close the MEASURE dialog box.
8. Click Fix Model > Backup Modl > Modify, then pick the round
feature to modify the radius of the round.
9. Pick the .05 radius dimension and type [.10]. Click Current Modl
> Regenerate to update the model to the new dimensions. Click
Yes to close the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
Task 3. Modify the height of the flanges in DETAIL 2. After the feature
fails, use the tools available in the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box
to determine which feature fails regeneration.
1. Click Modify and pick the 0.125 dimension for the flange in
DETAIL 2. Type [0.09] as the new value. Regenerate the model.
2. Click Feature Info . An information window indicates that the

round with feature ID 772 failed. Read through this information
and close the window.
3. Set the backup model as the active model and highlight the failed
feature on the screen by selecting it from the MODEL TREE, as
shown in Figure 3.
4. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Confirm , then select the cut
feature from the MODEL TREE window.
NOTES
Failed
cut
Figure 3: Failed Cut Feature
Task 4. Once you have determined why the cut failed regeneration,
change the model so that the feature regenerates successfully.
1. Click List Changes . An INFORMATION Window indicates that

the feature failure occurred because dimension d26 was modified
from 0.125 to 0.09.
2. Click Current Modl > Failed Geom to view the failed geometry.
The surface of the cut displays along with two points where the
geometry becomes invalid. Click Item Info to obtain some
information about the failed geometry.
3. Close the information window.
4. Redefine the section of the feature. Click Quick Fix > Redefine >
Confirm . Click Section > Define > Sketch .
5. Sketch a vertical line on the right side of the section. Click Sketch
> Done . Click Preview > OK to finish the feature.
6. Click Yes to close the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can determine why a feature is failing regeneration.

• You can resolve the regeneration failure.

Module
Drawing Formats
In this module, you learn how to create and use drawing formats.
Objectives
• Create drawing formats by importing geometry.

• Create drawing formats with 2-D drafting tools.
• Use tables and parameters in formats.
Page 16-1
NOTES
CREATING A DRAWING FORMAT

Creating a drawing format is usually a one-time operation. When you
initially begin creating drawings in Pro/ENGINEER, you must create a
format for them using one of the following techniques:
• Import it from another system.

• Use 2-D drafting techniques.
• Use Sketcher mode.
Note:
To specify a particular format setup file to use for all new
formats, set the configuration file option
format_setup_file.
If you want to use a drawing format in conjunction with a drawing

template, at this time you will need to create a mapkey that will create a
drawing using a template and then initiate adding the drawing format.
Importing a Format from Another System

Prior to importing the format into Pro/ENGINEER, you must export the
format using an industry standard file format such as IGES or DXF.
Creating a New Format in Pro/ENGINEER

Specify a sheet size and orientation that is appropriate for the format that
you want to import.
Importing the Format into Pro/ENGINEER

Once you have created the Pro/ENGINEER format, you can import the
existing format into the system. You can create a new format or append
the file to the existing format. Since you have already created the
Pro/ENGINEER format, you should append.
Keep in mind that if the new format cannot accommodate the imported
format, the system asks you if you want to scale the imported format so
that it fits it properly.
NOTES
Changing the Format

After you import the file into Pro/ENGINEER, it appears on the screen.
You can then make any changes that are necessary, such as deleting
entities, drafting new entities, adding a table, or adding text or parameters.
Bear in mind that you must use a Pro/ENGINEER table in order to

reference Pro/ENGINEER model and drawing parameters. Given this, you
may need to delete the existing title block from the imported data and re-
create it as a native Pro/ENGINEER table.
Creating a Format with 2-D Drafting

You can also create an original format in Pro/ENGINEER using the 2-D
drafting tools that are available in Format mode. However, keep in mind
that 2-D drafting entities do not regenerate, so you must draft them
accurately. To create sharp corners and perfectly horizontal and vertical
lines, you should use the draft grid and other options that are available.
When drafting format geometry, the sheet outline is the border of the
drawing format, as shown in Figure 1. Because it is the actual border, it
may not appear on pen plots unless you use a paper size that is larger than
the drawing size. The system plots everything within the sheet outline
border.
Format sketch
Sheet outline
Figure 1: Format Location
D raw ing Fo rm ats Pag e 1 6- 3

NOTES
Creating a Format in Sketcher Mode

You can also create a drawing format by creating the format geometry in
Sketcher mode, taking advantage of the parametric capabilities of
Sketcher. After you create the geometry and save the section,
Pro/ENGINEER assigns it the name FILENAME.SEC. The first time you
add it to a drawing, it makes a copy of it in memory and gives it the file
extension .FRM. After saving the section as a format, you can manipulate
it using various tools available in Format mode.
ADDING INFORMATION TO A FORMAT

After you create a format, you can add tables and notes to it, as well as use
labels to include parametric information.
Including Parametric Information in a Format

By using drawing labels, you can incorporate parametric information into
your format. When you include parameters in a drawing format, the
system evaluates them when you add the format to the drawing. If you
include the date label, the system displays the date that you actually added
the format.
To use the following drawing labels in a format, you should include an

ampersand (&) before the name of the parameter:
• &todays_date – Adds the date of the note’s creation. You can control
the form of the date using the configuration file option
TODAYS_DATE_NOTE_FORMAT.
• &model_name – Adds the name of the model used in the drawing.
• &dwg_name – Adds the name of the drawing.
• &scale – Adds the scale of the drawing.
• &type – Adds the model type (part or assembly).
• &format – Adds the format size.
• &linear_tol_0_0 through &linear_tol_0_000000 – Adds linear
dimension tolerance values for 1 to 6 decimal places.
• &angular_tol_0_0 through &angular_tol_0_000000 – Adds angular
dimension tolerance values for 1 to 6 decimal places.
• &current_sheet – Adds the current sheet number.
• &total_sheets – Adds the total number of sheets in the drawing.
NOTES
• &dtm_name – Adds the name of a datum plane.

In addition to the drawing labels listed above, you can also include your
own parameters. If you include parameters in a table on the format, the
system prompts you for their values when it adds the format to the
drawing. For example, you could add a table that includes parameters
specifying the person who created the drawing or checked it. If you do not
include these parameters in a table, the system does not prompt you for the
values.
Note:
You can store these parameters on the format as drawing
parameters if you set the configuration file option
make_parameters_from_fmt_tables to yes . If
you set the value of this option to no , the system prompts you
for the values whenever you add a second sheet or replace the
format.

NOTES

Table 1 lists the available configuration file options controlling format
creation.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Formats

format_setup_file filename and path Determines the format
setup file to use for new
formats.
make_parameters_from_ yes When including
fmt_tables no parameters in a table on a
format, saves them as
drawing parameters.
NOTES
Goal
To create and use a drawing format that includes parametric
information.
Method
In this exercise, you create a multi-sheet drawing format that includes
parametric information. You also set up the format so that the system
requires you to provide specific information when you place it on a
drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Multi-Sheet Drawing

Format
Task 1. Create a new drawing format and import the geometry of an
existing format.
1. Click File > New > Format , type [C_MULTI_FORMAT] for the
name and click OK .
2. Define the format in a landscape orientation with a C size and click

OK .
3. Click File > Import > Append to Model .
4. Select C_DET.IGS and click OK .
Task 2. Create a table to replace the right side portion of the title block.
Locate the lower right corner of the table above the existing title block.
1. Create an ascending, leftward table
2. Define the column sizes so that they are approximately the same as
the existing blocks. The column and row sizes are listed in Figure
2.

NOTES
4 7 6 13 13
2
4
3
1
Figure 2: First Table Initial Rows and Columns
3. Create a second ascending, leftward table to the left of the first one
to replace the left side of the title block.
4. Locate the lower right corner of the table above the existing title
block and to the left of the first table. The column and row sizes
are listed in Figure 3
9
4
2
2
2
Figure 3: Second Table Initial Rows and Columns
Task 3. Change the two new tables so that they look similar to the title
block. Change the size of the columns and rows.
1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Change Size >Column > By Length .
2. Before specifying the column to change, measure the existing title

block size. Click Info > Drawing > Measure Draft Entities .
3. Select DISTANCE from the DRAFT MEASURE dialog box, then

pick the right and left borders of the Sheet cell in the title block.
The measured distance should be 1.625.
4. Close the dialog box. Pick the right column of the table and type
[1.625] as the width of the column.
5. To create the second column, measure from the left side border of
the Sheet cell to the left side border of the Drawing Number cell.
6. Pick the corresponding column in the table and enter the measured
distance.
7. To create the third column, measure from the left side border of the
Drawing Number cell to the right side border of the Scale cell.
NOTES
distance.
9. To create the fourth column, measure from the left side border of
the Scale cell to the right side border of the Size cell.
distance.
11. To create the last column, measure from the right side border of
the Scale cell to the left side border of the Scale cell.
distance.
13. Repeat this procedure for the row heights.
Task 4. Combine some of the cells in the table into one cell, as shown in
Figure 4.
1. Click Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols , then pick the upper
left and upper right cells in the table.
2. Pick the left and right cells in the second column.
3. Continue merging the cells together until the table looks like the
title block.
Figure 4: First Table Merged Cells
Task 5. Change the column sizes for the second table.
1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Change Size > Column > By Length .
2. Measure the right and left borders of one of the Date cells in the
title block. The measured distance should be 1.12483.
3. Pick the right column of the table and type [1.12483] as the width
of the column.

NOTES
4. Measure the right and left borders of the cell in the title block . The
measured distance should be 1.875.
5. Pick the left column, the middle column, click the middle mouse
button and type [1.875/2] as the column width.
6. Change the size of the rows in the second table.

½ Row 1, 2 & 3 = 0.546875
½ Row 4 = 1.01563
7. Blank the column borders from the top row of the table. Click
Modify Table > Line Display > Blank , then pick the two column
borders of the top row.
8. Combine the left and middle cells of the bottom three rows
together, as shown in Figure 5. Click Merge > Columns , then pick
the left and middle cells of the second row.
9. Pick the left and middle cells of the third row then pick the left and
middle cells of the bottom row.
10. Click Done/Return.
Figure 5: Second Table Merged Cells
Task 6. Delete the entities that compose the borders of the original title
block.
1. Click Delete , from the DETAIL menu, then pick all of the lines
that compose the original title block.
3. Move the new table into the correct position for the title block.
Click Move from the TABLE menu and pick the table.

NOTES
4. Reposition the table in the new location and press the left mouse
button to place it. Repeat the procedure to locate the second table,
Note:
To precisely position the table in the new location, use the
Abs Coords option in the GET POINT menu.
Figure 6: Format with New Tables
Task 7. Add text to the tables that you just created. The text that you
include should be parametric so that it changes automatically based on the
drawing to which you add it.
1. Set the column justification by clicking Mod Rows/Cols > Justify

> Column > Center > Middle .
2. Pick each of the columns in the table on the right. Click Center >
Bottom , then pick each of the columns in the table on the left.
3. Click Enter Text , then pick the Part cell so that the part name fills
in automatically.
4. Type [&model_name] as the name. Press <ENTER> to finish.

NOTES
5. Enter the following text in the cooresponding cells:

½ Fscm No. = &fscm_num
½ Drawing No. = &drw_num
½ Scale = &scale
½ Sheet = &current_sheet/&total_sheets
½ .XXX Tolerances = &linear_tol_0_000
½ .XX Tolerances = &linear_tol_0_00
½ Angle Tolerances = &angular_tol_0_0
½ Drawn = &drawn_by
½ Drawn Date = &drawn_by_date
½ Checked = &checked_by
½ Ckecked Date = &checked_by_date
½ Approved = &approved_by
½ Approved Date = &approved_by_date
Task 8. Change the text height of some of the parametric information.
1. Click Modify > Text > Text Height . Pick &MODEL_NAME and
click Done Sel .
2. Type [0.3] as the height. Pick the &FSCM_NUM and

&DRW_NUM, then click Done Sel . Type [0.25] as the height.
Task 9. Copy the table on the right of the sheet so that you can use it on
Sheet 2.
1. Click Edit > Copy and pick the right table .
2. Click Pick Many and drag the selection box around the first table
and the underlying text, as shown in Figure 7. Drag this
box with
Pick Many
Figure 7: Copying the Table

NOTES
3. Click Done Sel . The table and text is copied to the clipboard.
4. Add a second sheet by clicking Sheets > Add .
5. Click Edit > Paste . The clipboard window appears.
6. Zoom in on the copied items in the clipboard window.
7. In the clipboard window, click the lower right corner of the table
as the first translation vector and pick the lower right corner of the
format on sheet two as the second translation vector point.
Note:
The copied entities will remain in the clipboard until you select
something else to copy. You can always delete the table and
text and paste it in again, if needed.
Task 10. Remove the top two rows from the copied table.
1. Click Mod Row/Cols > Remove > Row and pick the top row.
Type [yes] to confirm.
2. Pick the new top row and type [yes] again.
3. Delete the remaining text above the table.
4. Save and close the format window.
Task 11. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and add the format that you
just created to it. The system prompts you to specify the unknown
parameter values, but provides the known ones automatically.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_FORMATS.DRW.
1. Edit the config.pro and add the option

make_parameters_from_fmt_table set to yes . Apply the
changes.

NOTES
2. Add the multi-sheet format that you created earlier to the drawing.
Click Sheets > Format > Add/Replace . Select
C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and click Open .
3. Type [1] as the sheet number.
4. Specify the values of the unknown parameters in the format. Enter

the values as shown in Table 2 (if the system prompts you to
specify the type of parameter, click String ).
Table 2: Unknown Parameters

Parameter Value
Drw_num 11473
Fscm_num 2172
Approved_by_date TBD
Approved_by TBD
Checked_by_date 5/14/98
Checked_by JOE CHECKER
Drawn_by_date 5/7/98
5. Clean up the display of the sheet by moving tables, views, or notes

to more appropriate positions, if necessary.
6. Switch to Sheet 2 and add the second sheet of the format. Click
Format > Add/Replace .
7. Select C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and click Open .
8. Type [2] as the sheet number. The system should now fill out the
parameters automatically without displaying any additional
prompts, as shown in Figure 8.
9. Save and close the format window.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a format by importing an IGES file.

• You can add parametric information to a format.

Module
Creating a Bill of Materials

In this module, you learn how to use Pro/REPORT to create a Bill of
Materials on a drawing.
Objectives
• Create an automatic BOM.

• Manipulate a BOM.
• Show BOM balloons in the drawing.
Page 17-1
NOTES
CREATING A BOM USING PRO/REPORT

A Bill of Materials (BOM) is a listing of parts and part parameters that are
contained within the current assembly. When creating an assembly
drawing, it is often necessary to include a table showing the BOM. You
can use repeat regions to automate creation and maintenance of the BOM.
Generating a BOM Report

To create an automatic BOM in Pro/ENGINEER, follow these three steps:
Creating a Table
When creating a table to display an assembly drawing’s BOM, you should
specify the placement and origin carefully to accommodate its growth as
the system adds rows to the table.
Defining a Simple Repeat Region

After creating a table, you can create a simple repeat region. This is an
area of the table that lists similar information for each component in the
assembly. A simple region grows in one direction, repeating a row over
and over. To create a simple repeat region, you must define the extent of
the region, that is, the area of information that you want the system to
duplicate. For a BOM report, this area constitutes the outside cells of the
row, as shown in Figure 1.
INDEX NAME QTY
Select this cell. Select this cell.
Figure 1: Simple Repeat Region
Specifying the Information to Include

After setting up the repeat region, you should use report parameters to
define the information that you want the system to include in the table.
You can define parameters by typing them manually, or by making
selections from a menu. Table 1 lists some of the Pro/REPORT system
parameters that you can use to create a BOM.
NOTES
Table 1: Pro/REPORT System Parameters

Parameter Name Definition
&asm.mbr.name Displays the name of an assembly member.
&asm.mbr.type Displays the type (part or assembly) of an assembly
member.
&asm.mbr.parametername Displays the value of “parametername” (a user-defined
parameter) for an assembly member. Ex: cost or vendor
&rpt.index Displays the index number assigned to each record in a
repeat region.
&rpt.level Displays the recursive depth of an item.
&rpt.qty Displays the quantity of an item.
To create a simple repeat region, you would specify the parameters, as

shown in Figure 2.
INDEX NAME QTY

&rpt.index &asm.mbr.name &rpt.qty
Figure 2: Entering Parameters for a Simple Repeat Region
Manipulating a BOM Report

When you create a BOM using Pro/REPORT, Pro/ENGINEER uses
default values for many of the attributes to create the initial table, but you
can change them later to manipulate the format of the table. After creating
the table, you can make the following modifications to the listing to suit
your needs:
Controlling Repeating Components

When you initially create the table, the system creates a row for every
instance of a component. To prevent components from repeating, you can
set the attributes of the region to either of the following:
• No Duplicates – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component only

once. Therefore, even if the assembly has eight bolts, that component
only appears once in the table.
• No Duplicates/Level – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component
once for each subassembly in which you use it. Therefore, if you use a
bolt in two different subassemblies, that component appears twice in
the table.
C reat ing a Bil l of Mate rial s Pag e 1 7-3

NOTES
Figure 3: Bill of Materials for Example Assembly
Controlling the Levels Searched for Components

When you initially create the table, only the top-level components appear
because the default attribute of a repeat region (Flat ) prevents
Pro/ENGINEER from searching through lower levels as shown in
Figure 4. If you want the system to search all levels of the assembly,
NOTES
activate the Recursive attribute. You can also specify the Flat and
Recursive attributes for individual subassemblies.
Figure 4: Region Attributes
Changing the Order of the List

Once the system has filled the table, you can change the order in which it
displays the components by sorting. You can sort the table by one or more
parameters, moving forward or backward in order.
Removing Components from the List

If you want to omit a particular component or type of component from the
BOM, you can set up a filter so that the system automatically removes
those items from the listing. To remove information using this method,
you can either filter items one by one or set up a rule to remove multiple
entries.
Using Operators to Set Up a Rule
To set up a rule, you use the comparison operators <, >, <=, >=, ==, and
!=. to compare the parameters of the filter. If a record in the table does not
satisfy the filter equation, the system removes it from the table.

NOTES
You can also use multiple values in filters. For example, if you added the
filter &ASM.MBR.NAME = = PART_A,PART_B,PART_J, only those three
parts would appear in the table.
Showing the Correct Quantity

When you include the quantity of a component in a repeat region,
Pro/ENGINEER counts how many times a certain file is used in an
assembly.
The system saves a bulk item to a file with a .PRT extension and
assembles it once, assigning it a quantity of 1 in the BOM. However,
many bulk items should have a quantity such as AS REQUIRED. To show
the correct quantity, you can specify a relation using the parameter
&ASM.MBR.QTY, as shown in Figure 5. By incorporating this relation
into the drawing, the system then assigns all bulk items a quantity of AS
REQUIRED, but assigns the appropriate quantity to each component.
if asm_mbr_type = = ”bulk
item”
Qty = ”AS REQUIRED”
Else
Qty = rpt_qty
Endif
Figure 5: Quantity Relation for a Bulk Item
Calculating a Total Cost

A BOM report may contain a cost and quantity for each component. In
Pro/ENGINEER, you can write a relation to calculate the total cost for
each component as shown in Figure 6.
NOTES
if asm_mbr_type = = ”bulk item”

tcost = 0.0
Else
Tcost = asm_mbr_cost * rpt_qty
Endif
Figure 6: Cost Calculations
In the table, use &ASM.MBR.TCOST as the report parameter in the column

for total cost of each component, as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7: Relation Added to Define Cost
Creating a Summation
To calculate the total cost of the entire assembly, you could create a
summation of the total costs of each component by specifying the
particular column to sum and a name for the summation parameter. For
example, you could create a summation parameter called “total” to
calculate the total cost, then enter [$ &total[.2]] to display the value
as $ 11.72 in the appropriate table cell, as shown in Figure 8. The .2
specifies two decimal places.

NOTES
Figure 8: Summing the Cost
Continuing the Table on the Next Page

If a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it by
breaking it at a particular row and continuing it on the next page, or you
can create a new segment on the same page. As you add more information
to the table, the system flows it into the next segment and adds more
sheets as necessary. You can also repeat the header information from the
original table on the next page.
Showing BOM Balloons

Once you have completed the table, you can show BOM balloons on the
drawing, as shown in Figure 9. The balloons update if you change the
assembly, add components, or remove them.
Figure 9: Examples of Simple and With Quantity Balloons
NOTES
Creating Custom Balloons

The default shape for a BOM balloon is a circle. To specify a different
shape, you can create a custom balloon, which is simply a drawing symbol
that contains variable text. To show the quantity or index number of a
component in a custom balloon, set the default value of the variable text to
RPT_INDEX or RPT_QTY, respectively.

NOTES

Table 2 list the available drawing setup file options that control repeat
regions and BOMs in reports.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Repeat Regions

and BOMs
def_bom_balloon_leader_s arrowhead Sets the default arrow style
ym dot for BOM balloons in new
reports.
filled_dot
no_arrow
slash
integral
box
filled_box
max_balloon_radius 0 Sets the maximum
non-zero value allowable balloon radius.
If set to “0,” balloon radius
depends only on text size.
min_balloon_radius 0 Sets the minimum
non-zero value allowable balloon radius.
If set to “0,” balloon radius
depends only on text size.

NOTES
Goal
To use Pro/REPORT to create a Bill of Materials in a drawing.
Method
In this exercise, you create a simple repeat region to automate a Bill of
Materials (BOM) so that the system automatically reflects changes to the
assembly information. You also change the appearance of the BOM by
modifying the repeat region attributes.
EXERCISE 1: Creating an Automatic BOM

Task 1. Create a table to display the Bill of Materials for the drawing.
Include columns for the part name, type, quantity, cost, and total cost.
1. Retrieve BARREL_ASM.DRW.
2. Add C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM to the drawing. Click Sheets>

Format > Add/Replace . Select C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and
click Open . Type [1] as the sheet number.
3. Create a table for the BOM on the drawing. Click Table > Create
> Ascending > Leftward > By Num Chars . Pick the lower right
corner of the table as shown in Figure 10.
Locate lower
right corner of
the table here
Figure 10: Table Location
4. Create six columns in this table. Using the mouse, pick

immediately after the 6 for the first column, immediately after the
5 for the second column, immediately after the 4 for the third

NOTES
column, immediately after the second 2 (12) for the fourth column,
immediately after the third 5 (25) for the fifth column, and
immediately after the first 5 for the final column.
5. Create three rows in this table. Pick immediately after the 2 for the
first row, and immediately after the 1 for the second and third
rows.
6. Define the justification of the columns. Click Mod Rows/Cols >

Justify > Center > Middle . Pick all six columns in the table.
7. Add text into the header of the table. Click Enter Text , pick the
lower left cell, and type [ITEM]. Pick the next cell and type
[NAME]. Continue entering the text as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 11: Table Header
8. Justify the NAME column. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify >
Column > Left > Middle , then pick the NAME column. The
system maintains the center justification of the existing header, but
left-justifies any new text.
Task 2. Create a simple repeat region for the information in the BOM
and define the parameters to display.
1. Click Repeat Region > Add > Simple , then pick the cell above
ITEM and the cell above TOTAL COST.
2. Click Enter Text > Report Sym .

½ Pick the cell above ITEM and click rpt… > index .
½ Pick the cell above NAME and click asm…> mbr… > name .
½ Pick the cell above TYPE and click asm… > mbr… > type .
½ Pick the cell above QTY and click rpt… > qty.
½ Pick the cell above COST and click asm… > mbr… > User
Defined , then type [cost].
½ Pick the cell above TOTAL COST and click rpt… > rel… >
User Defined , then type [total_cost].

NOTES
3. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should appear
Figure 12: Initial BOM
Task 3. Change the attributes of the repeat region to modify the BOM
display. Components should appear only once in the table and all parts
should be included in the BOM, regardless of the level at which they
reside.
1. Notice the piston assembly displays in the table seven times.
2. Click Attributes and pick the repeat region in the table. Click No
Duplicates > Done/Return . Figure 13 shows the new table
configuration.
Figure 13: No Duplicates
3. Change the attributes of the repeat region to include all levels of

the assembly, Figure 14. Click Attributes and pick the repeat
region in the table. Click Recursive > Done/Return .

NOTES
Figure 14: Recursive
Task 4. Change the information for the total cost column. Create a
relation to calculate cost and total cost values. The total cost is based on
the quantity and cost values.
1. Click Relations and pick the repeat region. Click Add and type
[total_cost = asm_mbr_cost * rpt_qty].
2. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should display
Figure 15: Total Cost
3. Click Enter Text > Keyboard , then pick the cell above COST.
4. Type [&asm.mbr.cost[.2]] to cause the number to display two

significant digits.
5. Pick the cell above TOTAL COST and type

[&rpt.rel.total_cost[.2]]. Click Done/Return .

NOTES
6. Define a cost value for the barrel part. Click Modify and pick the
cell in the COST column for the barrel part. Type [8.75] as the
value.
7. Click Table > Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should
display as shown in Figure 16.
Figure 16: Number of Digits for Cost
Task 5. Create a summation for the number of components in the

assembly.
1. Click Summation and pick the repeat region.
2. Click Add and pick the first QTY cell in the region.
3. Type [assy_qty] as the parameter name.
4. Pick the cell at the top of the QTY column to place the summation
value.
5. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables .
Task 6. Remove the names of assembly components from the table, as

shown in Figure 17.
1. Click Filters and pick the repeat region.
2. Click By Rule > Add , then type [&asm.mbr.type !=

assembly].
3. Click Done > Done/Return .

NOTES
Figure 17: Assemblies Filtered Out
Task 7. Create a summation for the total cost of the assembly and set
the decimal precision to two.
1. Click Summation and pick the repeat region.
2. Click Add and pick the 8.75 for the barrel in the TOTAL COST
column of the region.
3. Type [assy_cost] as the parameter name.
4. Pick the cell at the top of the TOTAL_COST column to place the
summation value.
5. Update the table to change the format for the cost.
6. Click Modify > Num Digits . Type [2] as the number of digits.
7. Pick the assembly total cost value and click Done Sel .
Task 8. Combine the upper left cells and add a header for TOTALS.
1. Click Table > Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols .
2. Pick the upper left cell in the table and the cell directly to the left
of the total quantity.
3. Click Enter Text and pick the new cell.
4. Type [TOTALS] as the cell text. The table should appear as shown
in Figure 18.

NOTES
Figure 18: Total Cost
Task 9. Retrieve the barrel assembly and suppress the pump head part.
Return to the drawing and notice that the system updated the BOM
automatically. Change the table so that the ITEM numbers remain the
same when you add or suppress components.
1. Retrieve BARREL.ASM.
2. Click Component > Suppress , then pick the pump head. Click
Done Sel >Done .
3. Click Window > BARREL_ASM.DRW . Notice that the pump head

is no longer in the BOM and the numbers in the ITEM column
have changed. If you delete a component from the assembly, you
may not want the item numbers of components later in the table to
change.
4. Click Window > BARREL.ASM .
5. Resume the pump head part. Click Component > Resume > All >
Done .
6. Set the drawing BARREL_ASM.DRW as the active window.
7. Change the table so that the deletion or suppression of a

component does not affect the existing item numbers. Click Table
> Repeat Region > Fix Index , then pick the repeat region. Click
Fix > Region > Confirm > Done .
8. Set the BARREL.ASM as the active window and suppress the

pump head again.
9. Set the BARREL_ASM.DRW as the active window. Notice that the

item numbers did not change this time.

NOTES
10. Unfix the region. Click Table > Repeat Region > Fix Index , then
pick the repeat region. Click Unfix > Region > Confirm > Done .
11. Set the BARREL>ASM active and resume the pump head.
12. Close the assembly window and set BARREL_ASM>DRW active.
Task 10. Add BOM balloons to the drawing that include the quantity.
1. Click Table > BOM Balloon > Set Region > With Qty, then pick
the region.
2. Click Show > By View , then pick the 3-D view of the assembly.
3. Reposition the balloons appropriately and change the attachment

locations. Click Move > Mod Attach and pick a balloon. Click
Change Ref to change the reference to which the balloon is
attached or click Same Ref to move the arrow to a new position on
the same reference.
4. Merge the balloons for the inner and outer races and the bearing
spacer, as shown in Figure 19. Click Table > BOM Balloon >
Merge .
5. Pick the balloon for the inner race and then pick the balloon for the
bearing spacer. Repeat this step to merge the balloon for the outer
race with the bearing spacer balloon.
Figure 19: Balloon Locations

NOTES
6. Split the balloon for the pistons to create two balloons. Click Split
and pick the balloon for the pistons. Type [2] as the amount and
attach the balloon to one of the other pistons. Locate the balloon
toward the right side of the view.
7. Change the amounts in the balloons for the pistons. Click

Redistribute and pick the original balloon for the piston. Type [1]
as the amount to redistribute and pick the new balloon.
Task 11. Change the type of balloon for the barrel part and the head
plate.
1. Click Alt Symbol and pick the balloons for the barrel part and the
head plate.
2. Click Done Sel > Retrieve > DELTA_BOM.SYM (Figure 20).
Figure 20: Custom Symbol

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a table with repeat regions to create an automatic

BOM.
• You can change the attributes of the repeat region.
• You can add BOM balloons to the drawing.

Module
Family Tables
In this module, you learn how to create a family table of parts and
manipulate it in a drawing.
Objectives
• Create a family table of parts.

• Place a parts catalog table on a drawing.
• Replace one instance on drawing with another.
Page 18-1
NOTES
ADVANTAGES OF USING FAMILY TABLES

Using family tables is the most effective way to create a parts library in
Pro/ENGINEER.
Saving Space with Instances

A family table has only one part file with a table of information about
variations of the generic part, referred to as instances. The information in
the table pertains to dimension values, parameter values, and features
included on the instances.
Reducing Development Time

By using a family table, you can build just one part and then edit a table of
information to create multiple variations of the part. By inputting values
for different sizes and configurations, you can build parts quickly.
CREATING A FAMILY TABLE

To create a family table successfully, you should follow four basic steps
• Create the generic part.

• Specify items for the table to drive.
• Create new instances.
• Verify the instances.
Creating the Generic Part

The first step is to create a generic part that includes every feature that
exists on any instance, as shown in Figure 1. Because some variations may
not have the same features as the other variations, all features must exist
on the generic model.
NOTES
Figure 1: Generic Bolt Part
Specifying Items for the Table to Drive

After creating the generic model, you should identify the items which will
vary from one instance to another, such as dimensions, parameters,
features, and components (for an assembly family table).
Creating New Instances

You can add new instances to the table by adding more rows to the table,
or by patterning one of the existing instances, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2: Adding Instances
Famil y Tab les Pag e 1 8- 3

NOTES
Adding Entries to the Table

Each row of the table represents a new instance. When adding entries to
the bottom of the table, keep in mind the following:
• You must assign every instance a unique name .
• You can use an “*” to use the default value . If the generic model
changes, the value for the instance updates as well.
• You can lock an instance . You can lock an instance of a family table
to prevent other uses from modifying table-driven characteristics of
the instance.
Patterning an Instance
By patterning an existing instance, you can automatically create instances
with parameters that grow incrementally. The system considers the
instance you select for patterning as a seed that it can use to generate new
family table members. You can pattern an instance in several directions to
vary multiple parameters.
Figure 3: Generating Instances using Patternize
NOTES
Verifying the Validity of the Model Instances

You should verify that each model instance is valid automatically. The
system regenerates each instance behind the scenes, and reports whether
each instance regenerated successfully or failed.
Retrieving an Instance
When you select a generic model to retrieve into Pro/ENGINEER, you can
select the generic model itself to open or one of the instances. You can
choose an instance by name or based off of the values of the parameters in
the table.
USING FAMILY TABLES IN DRAWING MODE

You can create a drawing of the generic model or one of its instances.
Specifically, you can create the following types of drawings:
• One drawing of the generic model that shows a part catalog

• A separate drawing for each instance
Creating a Parts Catalog

For library parts, you may want to create a drawing of one of the models
and show a table of the different instances in the family table. You can
accomplish this by creating a drawing of the generic model, and using
Pro/REPORT to automatically create a table using the information in the
family table.
To create a parts catalog in Pro/ENGINEER, you should follow these

three steps:
• Name the features and parameters used in the table

• Create a table.
• Define a 2-D repeat region.
• Define the information to include.
Naming the Features and Dimensions

By default, all dimensions have a symbolic name similar to d2, d10, d105,
etc. Also, features have default names such F55, F1032, etc. These default

NOTES
feature names will be the column headers in your table unless you
specifically change them to more meaningful values. You can change
them as follows:
• For features, use Set Up > Name .

• For dimensions, use Modify > Dim Cosmetics > Symbol .
Creating a Table
Create the table as described in Tables chapters. You typically need a table
with two rows and two columns.
Defining a 2-D Repeat Region

For a parts catalog, you create a 2-D repeat region—one that grows in two
directions, horizontally and vertically.
To create a 2-D region, you must define the extent of the region, that is,
the area of information that you want the system to duplicate. For a parts
catalog, you should make three selections, as shown in Figure 4.
Select here second
Select here first Select here third
Figure 4: 2-D Repeat Region
Defining the Information to Include

After setting up the repeat region, you should use report parameters to
define the information that you want the system to include in the table.
Table 1 lists some of the Pro/REPORT system parameters that you can use
to create a parts catalog.
NOTES
Table 1: Pro/REPORT Parameters for a Parts Catalog

Parameter Name Definition
&fam.inst.name Displays the name of a family table
instance.
&fam.inst.parametername Displays the name of a family table
parameter.
&fam.inst.param.value Displays the value of a family table
parameter for an instance.
&fam.inst.param.id Displays the ID of a family table
parameter if it is a dimension.
To complete the 2-D repeat region shown in Figure 4, you would enter
three parameters, as shown in Figure 5.
&fam.inst.param.name
&fam.inst.name &fam.inst.param.value
Figure 5: Adding Report Symbols
After you update the table, the system automatically fills in the cells with
the family table information, as shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6: Initial Table
Preventing Information from Displaying

To prevent certain information from displaying in the parts catalog, you
can set up a filter to remove particular columns from the listing.

NOTES
Note:
Filters were discussed in greater detail in the Tables chapter.
Figure 7 shows the initial with the bolt_ dia column filtered using the filter
&fam.inst.param.name!=bolt_dia.
Figure 7: Bolt Diameter Filtered from Table
You can also use multiple values in filters. For example, if you add the
filter &fam.inst.param.name!=bolt_length,bolt_dia, the system would
remove the columns for bolt_length and bolt_dia from the table.
Manipulating the Format

When you create a parts catalog using Pro/REPORT, the table may not
appear in the exact format that you would like.
• You can modify the format by changing the order of the rows or
continue the table on the next page, if necessary.
• If a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it by
breaking it at a particular row and continuing it on the next page. You
can also create a new segment on the same page.
NOTES
Note:
Pagination only works for rows of a 2-D repeat region. If the
columns of a 2-D region grow off the page, you cannot specify
that they automatically continue on the next page.
Creating a Separate Drawing for Each Instance

You may need a separate drawing for every instance in the family table. If
your company requires individual tables, the quickest way to create them
is to complete a drawing and use it to create other drawings. To do this,
you must follow three steps:
• Create the seed drawing.

• Replace the original model with another instance from the family
table.
• Copy the existing drawing to another name.
Creating the Original Seed Drawing

You can create the original seed drawing from the generic model or any of
the instances, but you should fully detail it with any necessary dimensions,
notes, and special views, such as detailed views as shown in Figure 8.
Figure 8: Drawing of Generic Bolt

NOTES
Replacing the Original Model

Once you have completed the seed drawing, you can replace the model
with another instance because the models all belong to the same family
table. When you replace a model on a drawing, any dimensions or
parameters on the drawing update to the new values based on the family
table. Figure 9 shows the generic bolt drawing after replacing the model
with another instance.
Figure 9: Example of Replacing a Model on a Drawing with Details Preserved
You may have to modify the drawing of the new model by adding sheets,
creating new views, and creating new notes. In addition, you may also
have to make the following changes:
• Reposition views . If the models differed in size significantly, you

may have to move the views or change the scale of the drawing.
• Remove views . Some views may now be unnecessary.
• Show new dimensions . If some of the dimensions of the new model
do not appear on the drawing because the feature to which the
dimensions belong does not exist on the original model, you may have
to show these new dimensions.

NOTES
Copy the Existing Drawing to Another Name

After making any necessary modifications to clean up the appearance of
the drawing, you must save it as a new drawing. When Pro/ENGINEER
asks you to specify a new name for the drawing, type in a name that is
unique throughout the database. The system then creates a new drawing
file on the hard drive with the new instance as its model.
If you follow this process for each instance in the family table, you can
create a separate drawing file for each of the instances.

Table 2 lists the available drawing setup file options that you can use to
control the display of 2-D repeat regions.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting 2-D Repeat

Regions
dash_supp_dims_in_ no Controls the display of
region yes dimension values in
Pro/REPORT table repeat
regions. If set to “no,''
displays the values in
Pro/REPORT table repeat
regions. If set to ”yes,''
suppresses the dimension
and displays a dash
instead.
model_digits_in_region yes Controls the display of the
no number of digits 2-D
repeat regions. If set to
“yes,'' 2-D repeat regions
reflect the number of digits
of part and assembly
model dimensions.

NOTES
Goal
To create a family table of parts and use them in drawings.
Method
In the first exercise, you learn how to create a family table that includes
dimensions, parameters, and features. You create instances by manually
typing in the information and by patterning an existing instance.
In the second exercise, you retrieve a drawing of a generic model and

create a table that reflects the family table information automatically. You
also manipulate the table display.
In the third exercise, you retrieve a drawing of a family table instance.

You then replace the current instance with a different instance and create a
copy of the drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Family Table

Task 1. Retrieve the barrel family table part and create a new chamfer
on the model.
1. Retrieve BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.
2. Click Create > Solid> Chamfer> > Edge > 45 x d and type [.1]
as the “d” dimension.
3. Pick the two circular edges of the center hole.
4. Click Done Sel > Done Refs . Click Preview > OK to finish the
feature. Click Done .
5. Change the name of the chamfer feature by clicking Set Up >

Name and pick the chamfer.
6. Type [HOLE_CHAMFER] as the name. Click Done .

NOTES
Figure 10: Chamfer Created
Task 2. Create a family table for the barrel part that includes the
diameter of the barrel, the diameter of the patterned holes, and the bolt
circle diameter.
1. Click Family Tab . The Family Table editor appears.
2. Click .
3. Click Query Sel , pick the outer surface of the barrel. Click
Accept.
4. Pick BARREL_DIA.
5. Pick one of the holes and pick the CYLINDER_DIA and

CENTERLINE_DIA dimensions. Click Done Sel .
6. In the FAMILY ITEMS dialog box, select Feature , pick the

chamfer, and click OK .

NOTES
Figure 11: Identifying the Items to Vary
Task 3. Add some new instances to the family table by editing the table
and by patterning an instance of the table. After adding the instances,
make sure that they regenerate successfully.
1. Add instances to the family table by clicking two times.
2. Edit the data as shown in Figure 12.
Figure 12: Add Instances to the Table
Task 4. Create new instances of the barrel by patterning B_400_80_25.
1. Select B_400_80_25 and click .
2. Type [3] as the QUANTITY for the first direction.

NOTES
3. In the ITEMS area, select BARREL_DIA, click and type [.25]

as the increment.
4. In the ITEMS area, select CYLINDER_DIA, click and type

[.10] as the increment.
5. Click to specify a dimension for the second direction.
6. Type [2] as the QUANTITY for the second direction.
7. Select CENTERLINE_DIA, click and type [.2] as the

increment.
8. Click OK to finish the pattern.
Task 5. Remove the duplicate instance from the table and change the
names of the other instances in the family table.
1. Select the B_400_80_250, hold down the right mouse and click
Delete Rows .
2. Modify the family table as shown in Figure 13 by changing the

names and the values for the chamfer column.
Figure 13: Patterned Family Table
3. Click > Verify to determine if the instances can be

regenerated.

NOTES
4. The system verifies the validity of each instance and displays the
status in the dialog box. Review the status, and then select the
close button in the dialog box.
5. Click OK to exit the table.
Task 6. Create a parameter for the cost and add it to the table. Assign
the proper values to all of the instances.
1. Click Setup > Parameters > Part > Create > Real Number .
2. Type [cost] as the name of the parameter and [10.95] as the

value of the parameter, then click Done .
3. Click Family Tab > .
4. In the ADD ITEMS area, select PARAMETER, check Cost and

click Done Sel .
5. Click OK and change the values in the cost column to those shown
in Figure 14.
Figure 14: Cost Parameter
6. Click OK .

NOTES
Task 7. Retrieve some instances into the family table. Retrieve one
instance by selecting its name and retrieve another by selecting its value.
1. Open BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT. Select instance

B_425_90_27 and click Open .
3. Open BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.
4. Retrieve the instance that does not have the chamfer and has a
barrel diameter of 4.25. Click the By Parameter tab. Select
D2,BARREL_DIA, and 4.25. The number of instances in the bottom
of the window decreases.
5. Select F740,HOLE_CHAMFER > N. The number of instances that

satisfy these values should decrease to one, B_425_90_25. Click
Open .
6. Close the current window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Showing Family Tables on a Drawing

Task 1. Retrieve the barrel family table drawing and create a table in
which to display the family table information.
1. Retrieve BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.DRW.
2. Click Table > Create .
3. Click Descending > Rightward > By Num Chars . Locate the

upper left corner of the table tp the right of the detailed view.
4. Specify the width of the first column as 13 units, and the second
column as 15 units.
5. Make the height of the first row 2 units, and the height of the
second row 1 unit. The table should appear as shown in Figure 15.
Figure 15: Initial Table
Task 2. Set up the columns of the table with left and middle
justification. Create a 2-D repeat region and define the information to
include in the table.
1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column .
2. Click Center > Middle . Pick both columns of the table to set the
justification.
3. Click Repeat Region > Add > Two-D . Pick the cells as shown in
Figure 16.
Select this cell
second
Select this
Select this cell third
cell first
Figure 16: Repeat Region Creation

NOTES
4. Click Enter Text > Reprt Sym and pick the upper right cell of the
table.
5. Click fam... > inst...> param… > name .
6. Pick the lower left table cell and click fam... > inst... > name .
7. Pick the lower right table cell and click fam...> inst...> param… >
value .
8. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should look
like the one shown in Figure 17.
Figure 17: Family Table
Task 3. Change the order of the columns in the table to reflect the
column order of the original family table, as shown in Figure 18.
1. Click Sort Regions , then pick the region of the table.
2. Click the No Default check box and click Done . The columns are
ordered as they are in the Family Table editor.
Figure 18: Sorting the Region
Task 4. Retrieve the barrel family table part and add a new instance to
the table. Return to the drawing and notice that the table automatically
includes the new information.
1. Retrieve the generic BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.

NOTES
2. Click Family Tab > .
3. Set the values shown in Table 3.
Table 3: Values for New Instance

Column Value
Name B_475_110_25
BARREL_DIA 4.75
CYLINDER_DIA 1.10
CENTERLINE_DIA 2.5
HOLE_CHAMFER N
COST 15.00
4. Exit from the table.
5. Close the part window and activate the drawing window.
6. The system may have already updated the table to include the new
instance. If it does not display the new instance, click Regenerate
> Draft .
7. Save and quit the drawing.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Separate Drawings for Each

Instance
Task 1. Retrieve the bolt drawing and replace the current family table
instance with a new instance. Clean up the display of the drawing and
create a copy of it for this new instance.
1. Retrieve BOLT_REPLACE.DRW.
2. Click Views > Dwg Models > Replace .
3. Select [B_5_20] as the instance to retrieve and click Open .
4. Erase DETAIL 1 from the drawing since there is no chamfer in this

instance. Click Views > Delete View and pick DETAIL 1. Type
[yes] to remove all detail arrows and circles for this view.
5. Copy the drawing to a new name. Click File > Save As . Type
[B_5_20] as the name of the new drawing and click OK .
Task 2. Replace the model of this drawing with another instance.
1. Repeat this process and create new drawings for the instances
B_5_20_C.
2. Do not delete the detailed view of the chamfer.
3. Save the drawing as B_5_20_C.DRW.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a family table of parts.

• You can create a parts catalog.
• You can create a drawing table with a 2-D repeat region.

Module
Working with Large Drawings

In this module, you learn various ways to work with large drawings.
Objectives
• Reduce the amount of information displayed on a drawing.

• Control when a view is regenerated.
• Limit the number of files that must be retrieved to display a
drawing.
Page 19-1
NOTES
MANAGING LARGE DRAWINGS

You can define a large drawing in several ways. The term large can be
relative, since hardware platforms perform at different levels; however,
you can generally classify any of the following as large drawings:
• A drawing of a part model that is highly complex.

• A drawing of an assembly that has multiple components.
• A drawing that consists of a large number of views and sheets.
Working with large assemblies places a greater burden on your system
than working with a small assembly or part. Likewise, working with a
drawing of a large assembly can place an even greater load on your
system. This is due to the fact that most drawings have multiple views
that the system must update for hidden line removal, component
placement, etc. Even assemblies which are not large by your definition
may become unacceptably slow once a certain number of sheets and views
is reached.
The following are some of the areas that are negatively impacted by large
assembly drawings:
• Retrieval time
• Repaint time
• Switching sheets
• Regeneration
• Placing views
Drawing Retrieval Process

There are many techniques one can implement which are intended to
improve the performance of large drawings. Prior to choosing a
technique, it is important to understand the steps the system performs
when a drawing is first selected for retrieval. When you open a drawing,
the system will:
• Load the associated models into memory (RAM)

• Regenerate all the views on the drawing
• Display the image on the screen
NOTES
Each of the available techniques may target one of the steps listed above,
and it is recommended to estimate which step is impacting performance
the most and implement solutions to improve that area.
APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT

In general, you can use the following methods to improve your drawings
performance:
• Use the system configuration settings to optimize the modeling

environment for use with large drawings.
• Create a simplified representation of the assembly and base the
drawing off of this configuration.
• As the drawing is being built up, you remove detail from regeneration
and display that is not necessary at that specific time.
• Develop each sheet of the drawing as a separate drawing file, and
merge them together when all of the sheets are completed.
The remaining sections of this summary document will discuss each of
these approaches in greater detail.
Configuration File Settings

The easiest technique to implement involves configuring the system to
handle the large amount of data in an efficient manner. These
configuration options are designed to impact both retrieval time and daily
tasks.
Table 1
Config.pro KEYWORD SETTIN DESCRIPTION
G
Disp_trimetric_dwg_mod No System will not take the
e_view time to draw an initial
image when placing a
General view
Display_in_adding_view Minima If Default is selected
l_ while placing a General
wirefr view, the simplest image is
ame displayed
Force_wireframe_in_dra Yes All views are displayed as
wing wireframe regardless of
Environment or display
settings
Tangent_edge_display No Prevents system from
calculating and displaying
tangencies
Wo rk in g wit h L a rg e D ra win g s Pag e 1 9- 3

NOTES
Display_silhouette_edg No Prevents system from

es calculating and displaying
silhouette edges
Edge_display_quality Low Decreases tessellation of
edges which will speed up
display
Interface_quality 0 Determines the amount of
work performed when
checking for overlapping
lines for pen plotters
Compress_output_files Yes, Stores files in a
no compressed format
Auto_regen_views No Eliminates system forced
updates of windows
Retain_display_memory Yes, Display of objects in
no session kept in memory.
Save_display Yes, Writes display to drawing
no file.
These settings will not need to be in effect all of the time. In fact, users
will typically want to toggle all of these setting on and off many times
during the day. It is recommended that you:
• Create two configuration files:

½ Large_draw_on.pro – Sets the modeling environment for working
with large drawings.
½ Large_draw_off.pro – Disables the large drawing settings and

returns each of them to your company's standard setting.
• Create mapkeys or custom menu selections that will read each of these
files in.
Model Simplification
Using simplified representations, you can limit the components that the
system retrieves and displays on the screen. This method allows you to
retrieve and display only those components that you need for the current
operation, thereby reducing the amount of time the system requires to
retrieve, regenerate, and repaint your drawings.
Note:
This technique is targeted at the first stage of drawing
retrieval: reducing the number of models retrieved into
memory.
NOTES
Figure 1: Master and Simplified Versions of a Transmission Assembly
Tip!
Create a simplified rep with only a few models in it and use
this to place all of your views.
Geometry Representations
A geometry representation requires less time to retrieve than the actual
part because the system does not retrieve any of the parametric
information, only the geometry. Although these versions of the part are
non-modifiable, you can still extract valuable information such as Mass
Properties and show dimensions on drawings.
Note:
It is recommended to base your large drawing on a Simplified
Representation where most of the models are displayed as the
Geometry Rep.
User Defined Representations

You will typically create your own simplified representation for use in
drawing mode. With this rep you can:
• Exclude components that do not need to be seen.

• Set models to Geometry Rep that need to be displayed, but will not
require modification from the drawing.

NOTES
• Substitute detailed parts and sub-assemblies with placeholder parts to

represent the volume of that component or subsystem and reduce the
detail represented.
Figure 2: Assembly Substituted with a Placeholder Part
• Set models to Master Rep that require all of the feature data in
memory
View States
As the drawing is built up and the need to show more detail approaches,
the rep can be altered or new ones created where more components are
displayed. Pro/ENGINEER allows you to set each view of your drawing
to be displayed as a different Simplified Representation using the View
States option.
View Manipulation
Once your drawing is partially developed and the majority of the views are
placed, you may notice a performance drop for tasks such as initially
retrieving the drawing, regenerating the views or switching sheets. To
target this area for improvement, you can implement any of the techniques
outlined in the following sections.
Z-Clipping
As mentioned in an earlier chapter, Z-Clipping will allow you to display
only the geometry in front of a plane and will ignore all geometry behind
it. Essentially, this will:
• Terminate hidden line removal computations at the Z-Clip location.
NOTES
• Terminate the displaying of any geometry from the Z-Clip location.
Figure 3: Front and Side Views
For example, when looking at the front view of the vehicle as shown in
Figure 3, it is not necessary for the system to regenerate any geometry
beyond the vehicle center.
Erasing Views
As mentioned in an earlier chapter, you can temporarily remove views
from a drawing by erasing them from the display. With the views erased,
switching sheets is instantaneous. By saving the drawing with erased
views, retrieval time will decrease. The views are resumed for general
review, to perform additional detailing operations on the view or prior to
plotting.
Cross-Section Manipulation
Cross sectional views require additional system resources in order to:
• Determine which components are intersected by the cutting plane.

• Determine which geometry is in front of the cutting plane in the
desired view and eliminate it.
• Determine which geometry is behind the cutting plane and how it is
impacted by display settings such as Hidden Line or No Hidden.
• Determine cross hatch setting for each model intersected by the cutting
plane.

NOTES
In some cases, an Area cross section can be used instead of the default
Total cross section to improve performance and clarity. With an Area
cross section, only the geometry intersected by the cutting plane is
displayed, preventing the system from calculating the geometry in front of
and back of the cutting plane. This type of section may not be appropriate
where display of components behind the cutting plane is desired, but can
certainly be employed as a temporary, in-process solution.
Drawing Rep Tool

A drawing representation is a series of commands that specify a display
configuration for the current drawing. You can use drawing
representations to control which models and which views of a drawing the
system retrieves and displays. For example, you can temporarily remove
all models and views that are not necessary for current work. With
drawing representation functionality you can load a drawing to a particular
drawing sheet, zoom location, or view center-for example, retrieve only
specified sheets of a drawing without loading all the sheets and displaying
every view on each sheet.
Figure 4: The Two Tabs of the Drawing Rep Tool
Merging Drawings
Using the Merge command, you can combine two drawings together.
Merging allows for:
NOTES
• Increased Performance – The individual drawing files will retrieve

faster than the multi-sheet drawing would have.
• Parallel Development Efforts – Several individual Pro/ENGINEER
users can work in parallel on separate portions of a multi-sheet
drawing and then merge their separate drawings into a single drawing
file.
A source file is appended to the target file as additional sheets; for
example, when you merge a two-sheet source drawing into a four-sheet
drawing, the target drawing then contains six sheets. You can later use
Sheets > Reorder to rearrange sheet order. Models that are used by the
source drawing are added automatically to the target drawing during the
merge.
View Only Retrieval

You can significantly reduce retrieval time by retrieving a drawing in
view-only mode because the system does not retrieve any of its associated
models.. This method is most useful for browsing or plotting out a
drawing. If you decide to modify the drawing after viewing it, you can
retrieve the models at any time.
In order to use the view-only retrieve method, however, you must save the
display of the model with the drawing. If you did not set one of these
options prior to the last time that you saved the drawing, the system then
only shows the outline of the views, omitting any geometry.

NOTES
Goal
To reduce regeneration and repaint time for large drawings.
Method
In the first exercise, you reduce the regeneration and repaint time for a
large assembly by reducing the amount of clutter on the screen and using
view-only retrieve mode.
In the second exercise, you create a few simplified representations for the
pump assembly using rules, and then use a representation in the drawing.
In the third exercise you merge two drawings into one file.
EXERCISE 1: Reducing Regeneration and Repaint

Time
Task 1. Reduce the amount of information that the system must display
on the drawing by erasing views that you do not currently need.
1. Retrieve PUMP.DRW.
Figure 5: Sheet One of the Pump Drawing

NOTES
2. Change to Sheet 2.
Figure 6: Sheet Two of the Pump Drawing
3. Click Views > Erase View , and pick the detailed view. Type [no]
when the system prompts you to remove all arrows and circles
associated with this view.
4. Repeat this procedure to erase the two views in the lower left
portion of the sheet.
Task 2. Alter the configuration file to improve performance while

working with large drawings.
1. Edit the config.pro file and add the option

disp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view to no , and
force_wireframe_in_drawings to yes .
2. Repaint the display. Pro/ENGINEER now does not have to take

the time to calculate the removal of hidden lines.
Task 3. Add a 3-D view in the upper right corner of Sheet 2.
1. Click Add View > General > Done .

NOTES
2. Locate the view in the upper right corner of Sheet 2.
Note:
The view does not display on the screen but the Orientation
dialog box appears because you changed the setting for
disp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view to no .
3. Click Saved Views , select Iso and click Set . Click OK to finish.
4. Remove hidden lines and tangent lines from the new 3-D view.
Click Disp Mode > View Disp , then pick the 3-D view. Click
Done Sel . Click No Hidden > No Disp Tan > Done .
5. Edit config.pro and change the value of the configuration file

option force_wireframe_in_drawings to no .
6. Repaint so that the drawing views no longer display in wireframe.
7. Resume the views that you erased earlier by clicking Resume

View > Select All > Done Sel .
8. Return to Sheet 1.
Task 4. Change the configuration file so that it only regenerates the

display when you choose to regenerate it.
1. Click Modify then pick one of the .750 dimensions. Type [1.25]
as the value.
2. Click Regenerate > Model > Automatic . Notice how much time
it requires to regenerate the views.
3. Return to Sheet 2. The views on the second sheet begin to

regenerate.
4. Set the configuration file option auto_regen_views to no .
5. Return to Sheet 1.
6. Click Modify and pick the 1.25 dimension. Type [.75] as the value.
7. Click Regenerate > Model > Automatic . Pro/ENGINEER

regenerates the model and the dimension value updates, but the
view geometry remains the same.

NOTES
Note:
Setting auto_regen_views to no allows you to control when
the views regenerate so that you can make many changes to
the model or drawing without waiting for the views to update.
8. Click View > Regenerate View > Pick View . Pick the bottom
view, then click Done Sel . Pro/ENGINEER only updates this
view.
Task 5. When the system retrieves a drawing, it retrieves all of the

models used in the drawing. As a result, the system may require a
significant amount of time to simply open the drawing for you to view or
plot it. Configure this drawing for View Only Retrieval.
1. Save the drawing and erase it from memory.
2. Retrieve the drawing without retrieving any of the part or assembly

files used in the drawing. Click File >Open . Click and select
Retrieve Drawing as View Only. Select PUMP.DRW and click
Open .
3. The system retrieves the drawing very quickly, but it only displays
the view borders because you did not save the display with the
drawing. Click Utilities > Enviroment and select the Saved
Display check box.
4. Click Retr Models > Confirm . The system retrieves the models
used in the drawing and displays the views correctly.
5. Change to Sheet 2.
6. Save the drawing and then erase it again.
Task 6. Retrieve the drawing without retrieving any of the part or

assembly files used in the drawing.
1. Retrieve the drawing again as view only.
2. The system retrieves the drawing very quickly and displays it

correctly on the screen. Pro/ENGINEER displays the graphics the
way that they appeared when you last saved the drawing. You can
now change sheets, plot, or retrieve the models.

NOTES
Note:
If one of the models changed since you last saved the drawing,
the graphics that the system displays may be out of date.
Regenerate the views on the drawing to update the graphics.
3. Change to the next sheet, then close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Simplified Representations

Task 1. The pump drawing only shows the exterior of the model, and
the interior components are not visible in the views. Retrieve the pump
assembly and create a simplified representation that eliminates the internal
components.
1. Retrieve PUMP.ASM.
Figure 7: Master Rep of the Pump
2. Click Simpfd Rep > Create , then type [exterior]. Click

Exclude Comp as the default rule.
3. Rather than manually select the external components, use the Simp
Rep rule to evaluate this condition for you. Accept the defaults
Master Rep then click By Rule .
4. On the New Rule tab of the BY RULE dialog box, place a check
mark beside Exterior Comps and click Evaluate .
5. Scroll down the MODEL TREE to see the components that satisfy
this rule.
6. Click Update Screen > Done.
7. Save the assembly.

NOTES
Figure 8: External Components of the Pump
Task 2. Retrieve the pump drawing and swap the current master rep
model with the external simplified rep.
1. Retrieve PUMP.DRW and view Sheet 1.
2. Click Views > Modify View > View State .
3. Pick the lower view on Sheet 1. Click Confirm , select EXTERNAL,

and click OK .
4. Switch to Sheet 2.
5. Repeat this procedure for the 3D view and the four planar views.
Any dimensions that can no longer be displayed with the current
models in the rep are displayed in magenta. These dimensions
could be recreated.

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Merging Two Drawings into One
Task 1. Open the two separate drawings which will be merged together
and review them.
1. Open the MOTOR_P3 drawing.
Figure 9: The Motor Drawing
2. Notice that the drawing text is large in size and it interferes with
using standard offsets for the dimensions. In the lower-left view
notice the axis display for the pattern of holes around the flange of
the motor. The axis lines are horizontal and vertical, not radial
about the flange.
3. Open the COVER_P3 drawing.

NOTES
Figure 10: The Cover Drawing
4. Notice that the text is smaller than that of the previous drawing. It
is also using a different font type, called font. Notice in the lower-
left view the axis circle and radial placed axis on the tabs along the
edge of the cover.
5. Close the window and clear memory.
Task 2. Merge the motor drawing with the cover drawing.
Note:
The drawing that is being merged is the source drawing. The
drawing into which it is being merged is the target drawing.
1. Click Advanced > Merge .
2. Select the MOTOR_P3.DRW and click Open .
3. Investigate the added sheet. Notice that the text height and type has
automatically taken the values of the target drawing. Also, notice
that the axis pattern is now radial with an axis circle being
displayed.

NOTES
Note:
After the drawings are merged, the drawing setup file options
from the target drawing override the options used by the
source drawing.
4. Choose Views > Dwg Models > Set Model . Notice that both the
cover and motor parts are associated to the drawing.
5. Save the drawing and erase it from memory.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can reduce display of items in the drawing using layers,

environment options, and the configuration option.
• You can control when a view is regenerated.
• You can use View Only and Simplified Representations to limit the
file that need to be retrieved.

Module
Plotting
In this module, you learn to how to create plot files.
Objectives
• Plot a drawing interactively.

• Configure the plotter.
• Plot using the Batch utilities.
Page 20-1
NOTES
PLOTTING A DRAWING
Using Pro/ENGINEER, you can create plot files of the current object
(part, drawing, assembly, etc.) and send them to the print queue of a
plotter.
Plotting Interactively
Interactive plotting provides flexibility in creating a plot file because you
can scale, clip, or output the plot to the screen to preview it. Once you
have properly set up all of the plotting options, you can send the plot
directly to the plotter from within Pro/ENGINEER.
Figure 1: Print Dialog Box
• Destination – You can specify the printer to which you want the
system to plot your file, add a new type of printer, configure the
printer for this operation, and print out to a file.
• Sheets – You can print all of the sheets, only the current sheet, or a
range of sheets (for example, 11-14).
• Number of copies – When you send the plot directly to a printer, you
can enter a positive number between 1 and 99 to specify the number of
copies that you need.
• Plotter command – By typing the system command that you use to
send a file to the printer, you can print the object from within
Pro/ENGINEER.
NOTES
Configuring the Plotter

Using the three pages of the PRINTER CONFIGURATION dialog box, you
can specify the page, printer, and model configuration for the plotter to
use, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2: Printer Configuration
You can specify the following information concerning the plotted page:
• Dimensions of the paper – You can specify the size of the sheet to
which you are going to print (for example, you can print a C-size
drawing on an A-size sheet) or create a customized size.
• Offset on the paper – You can specify the offset distance of the plot
from the origin.
• Label to include on the plot – You can include a label on the plot
and control its height. The system prints the label as NAME:<OBJECT
DATE> and shifts the plot to the right, which may clip some geometry
along the right border.
• Units of the paper – You can define the variable plot size in inches or
millimeters.
You can specify the following information concerning the printer:
Plo t t i n g Pag e 2 0- 3
NOTES
• Pen information – You can select the pen table file to control which
pens the system uses for different types of lines. You can also set the
pen velocity to a printer that has pen speed control.
• Cutter information – You can specify that you want to install a cutter
on a Versatec plotter (only if you select a Versatec plotter from the
PRINT dialog box).
• Handshake information – You can access either the software plotter
handshake mode or the hardware plotter handshake mode.
• Sheet type – You can specify the type of paper as cut-sheet or roll.
• Rotation – You can properly print a landscape orientation drawing on
a portrait type laser printer or a portrait orientation drawing on a
landscape type laser printer.
You can specify the following information concerning the model you are
plotting:
• Type of plot – You can select the following plot types:

½ Full Plot – Creates a plot of the entire object.
½ Clipped – Creates a clipped plot by defining a box around the
area to plot. This area appears on paper in its normal location
relative to the lower-left corner.
½ Based on Zoom – Creates a scaled, clipped plot based on the
paper size and the zoom setting in the graphics window. This is
the default setting.
½ Plot Area – Creates a plot by shifting the area inside the clip
box to the lower-left corner of the paper and scaling the clipped
area to match the user-specified scale.
½ Model Size – Scales the plot to a specified model scale. For
example, if you enter 0.25, the system creates a plot of the
model to ¼ scale. This choice is valid only for 3-D objects.
• Plot scale – You can specify the plot scale in a range from 0.01 to 100
(2-D only). In addition, you can also generate a segmented plot and
control whether or not the system plots it with the drawing. A
segmented plot plots the drawing in real size, breaking it up onto
separate sheets.
• Layers – You can control whether the system plots all visible layers or
only the one specified by ID.
• Plot quality – You can specify the quality of the output file by
controlling the amount of checking that Pro/ENGINEER performs for
overlapping lines.
NOTES
Plotting Using the Pro/BATCH Utility

Using the Pro/BATCH utility, you can process a large number of
Pro/ENGINEER files in a batch mode and create output files in a variety
of formats. You can schedule the batch process to run on a delayed start
time utilizing system resources during off-peak hours. The Pro/BATCH
utility outputs files as plot files, IGES, DXF, STL, VDA, and any of the
formats that you can create interactively from within Pro/ENGINEER.
The Pro/BATCH utility retrieves the specified list of objects and creates
the output file without requiring any further interaction with you.
When using the Pro/BATCH utility, you should keep in mind the
following:
• License requirements – You must have an available Pro/ENGINEER

license and access to all modules required for the scheduled
operations.
• Local version numbers – Filenames listed for processing do not
require the local version number. The system retrieves the latest
version of the object as it normally would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you
specify a local version of the file, Pro/BATCH uses that specific
version of the file.
• Configuration files – Pro/BATCH reads the configuration files from
the same locations as a Pro/ENGINEER session, including the current
working directory from which the Pro/BATCH utility is executed.
• Search paths – The Pro/BATCH utility uses the Pro/ENGINEER
search paths to find the files in the list. The system creates output files
in the current directory unless you specify the destination directory in
the Pro/BATCH interface.
• Log files – The system generates log files for each Pro/BATCH
session listing each command line in the file followed by a success or
failure exit code.
Working in the Pro/BATCH Environment

Pro/BATCH allows you to define the actions that you want the system to
perform in the batch session, as well as schedule the job for the
appropriate time. When you execute the pro_batch command, the
system brings you into the Pro/BATCH environment. You can then create
batch files and save them, using the same batch process repeatedly, if
necessary.
Before you can create a batch file, you must start Pro/BATCH and then set
up general preferences. You can then create the batch file, specify the files
NOTES
on which to perform the action, set up the options for each action, and
schedule the batch process.
Starting Pro/BATCH and Setting up Preferences

To start the Pro/BATCH utility, type the command [pro_batch] in a
system window. The Pro/BATCH interface should then appear on your
screen as shown in Figure 3. You should then set up the general
preferences for the batch file to define the default action that you want the
system to perform on the files (Figure 4).
Figure 3: Pro/BATCH Dialog Box
Note:
If you include objects for plotting in the batch file, you must
enter the Plotter command on the Plot options page.
NOTES
Figure 4: Option Preference Dialog Box
Creating a New Batch File

After defining the preferences, you can create a new batch file and define
the command used to start Pro/ENGINEER. You should then specify the
files on which you want the system to perform the actions, as well as the
options for each action.
• Select the names of the files that you would like to include.
• You can then define the appropriate options for each file using the SET
OPTION dialog box. After you finish specifying options for a batch
file, you should save it.
Scheduling the Start of the Batch Process

You can set the exact amount of time that should elapse before the batch
process starts.

This option lists the Pro/ENGINEER configuration file options that affect
plotting. You can add them to the loadpoint configuration file and set them
as read-only for other Pro/ENGINEER users. Specific projects may
require unique plotter configuration setups. If you place the appropriate
configuration file in the project directory, the system can read those
configuration settings when you execute it from that directory.
NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Plotting

delete_after_plotting yes Determines if the system
no (default) deletes a plot file after
plotting. When set to
“yes,” the system
automatically deletes a plot
file after successfully
plotting it.
edge_display_quality very_high Controls the edge display
normal (default) quality for wireframe and
hidden line removal. It also
high affects screen display.
low
interface_quality value (0-3) Determines the default
quality check the system
uses to check for
overlapping lines in a plot
or 2-D export.
pen#_line_weight (# = 1-8) Sets the weights of the
value (1-16) entities plotted to pens 1
through eight to a value of
1 through 16, where 1 is
the thinnest, 16 being the
thickest in increments of
.0006 in. Default values
are Pen 1 4, Pen 2 1, Pen 3
2, Pen 4 3, Pen 5 2, Pen 6
3, Pen 7 1, Pen 8 4. The
default thickness for Pen 1
is .0024 in.
pen_slew value Sets the pen speed for both
x and y directions for
plotters that are compatible
with this option.
pen_slew_xy value and value Sets the pen speed for x
and y directions separately
for plotters that are
compatible with this
option. The first value is
for the x direction and the
second is for the y
direction.
pen_table_file path and name Specifies a default pen
mapping table (table.pnt)
file.
NOTES
plotter plot driver name Specifies the plotter driver

as shown in the list of
supported devices in the
Plot dialog box.
plotter_command command Specifies a command to
initiate the plot from the
operating system. (for
example, lp, lpr etc.)
plot_file_dir directory name Specifies the directory to
where the system writes
plot files.
plot_names yes When set to yes, system
no (default) gives plot files extensions
to identify plot format.
(.ps, .hp, .hp2, .ver etc.).
use_8_plotter_pens yes Allows full support of 8
no (default) pens (uses 4 pens by
default).
use_software_line_ yes When set to “yes,” plots
fonts no (default) the exact line style used in
Pro/ENGINEER. When
set to “no,” the plotter
plots lines using its own
font.
NOTES
Goal
To plot a drawing interactively, and by using batch utilities.
Method
In this exercise, you create plot files for drawings. You create plot files
manually and by using the Pro/BATCH tool.
EXERCISE 1: Creating Plot Files for Drawings

Task 1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and create a plot file by
manually changing the settings through the PRINT dialog box. Create a
plot file for both sheets of the drawing on A-size sheets.
Note:
PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.DRW.
1. Set up the print configuration to print to an A-size sheet. Click File

> Print . Click Configure… . Click the Page tab and select A from
the SIZE drop-down list.
2. Ensure that the system plots the entire drawing, regardless of

whether you zoom in on it. Click Model and select Full Plot from
the PLOT drop-down list.
3. Confirm the With Format check box is selected and click OK .
4. Select Generic Postscript from the DESTINATION drop-down list

to change the destination.
5. Select the TO FILE check box, clear the TO PRINTER check box,
and select All for the SHEETS. Click OK .
6. Create a plot file. Accept the defaults Create Single File and
[PLUNGER_BODY.PS] as the name of the plot file and click OK .

NOTES
7. Open a system window to make sure that the plot file is in the
current directory. Click Window > Open System from the Main
Menu.
8. For DOS, type [dir *.ps*] to list all of the postscript files in the
directory. For UNIX, type [ls *.ps*] to list all of the postcript
files. Type [exit] to close the system window.
9. Exit Pro/ENGINEER.
Task 2. Start the Pro/BATCH utility and create a new batch file, then
set up the preferences for plot files.
1. Open up a system window and begin the Pro/BATCH utility. Open

a system window and type [pro_batch] at the command line.
2. Create a new batch file. In the PRO/BATCH dialog box type

[DRW_PLOT] as the name in the BATCH FILE box.
3. Specify the command to start Pro/ENGINEER. Type the command

used to start Pro/E in the PRO/ENGINEER COMMAND box. (For
Windows make sure to include the .BAT extension.)
4. Define the default option preferences for this file. Click

Preference > Set Preference .
5. Define the default action for this batch file as plotting. Click the
General tab and select Plot from the DEFAULT ACTION drop-
down list.
6. Define the preferences for plot files. Click the Plot tab. Select
DEFAULT from the PLOTTER drop-down list, select C as the
PAPER SIZE, select 3 as the OUTPUT QUALITY, and type [1.0] as
the USER SCALE. Click OK .
Task 3. Specify the files to plot during this batch process. After
selecting the files, set up the preferences for each action.
1. Specify the list of drawings to plot. Click File > Browse .
2. Navigate to the FUND_DRAW_310 directory in the

DIRECTORIES area.
3. Filter for drawings.
NOTES
4. Select the BOLT_REPLACE, screw, and threaded bolt drawings.

Holding down the <CTRL> key, select BOLT_REPLACE. DRW,
SCREW.DRW, and THREADED_BOLT.DRW.
5. Click Add Objects . Click Close Browser when you have

finished.
6. Change the plot options for the screw and threaded bolt drawings
to plot to an A-size sheet. Select SCREW.DRW and
THREADED_BOLT.DRW.
7. Click Options > Set Option from the pull-down menu. Change
only the plotting option for the sheet size.
8. Select A from the PAPER SIZE drop-down list and click OK . The
option column changes from ’default’ to ’userdefined.’
Task 4. Save the batch file and schedule it to start immediately.
1. Click File > Save in the PRO/BATCH dialog box.
2. Execute the batch process. Click Schedule > Start the Task .
3. Specify the task to start immediately. In the SCHEDULE dialog

box, type [0] as the number of hours to delay before starting the
batch process.
4. Click OK to start the task. When the process has finished, click OK
to close the dialog box.
5. Exit from batch processing. Click File > Exit > OK from the
PRO/BATCH dialog box.
6. Open a system window and list the contents of the batch file saved
in the current directory.
7. List the contents of the PRO_BATCH.LOG file in the current

directory to view the results of the batch process. For the DOS
window, type [type pro_batch.log.1]. For UNIX, type
[more pro_batch.log.1].
8. After viewing the log file, close the system window.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can interactively plot drawing, parts, and assemblies.

• You can plot using the Batch utilities.
Module
Markup Model
In this module, you learn how to create engineering markups. You
also learn how to superimpose drawings using overlays.
Objectives
• Create markups for different types of objects.

• Save and retrieve markups.
• Superimpose drawings with overlays.
Page 21-1
NOTES
ENGINEERING MARKUPS
A markup is an informal sketch that you can create in Pro/ENGINEER
and superimpose over an object, as shown in Figure 1. Each markup acts
like a set of transparent sheets on top of a drawing sheet, enabling you to
superimpose text and sketched entities in a variety of colors to indicate
where changes might be required.
Figure 1: Markup Example
Creating a Markup
You can create a markup for a part, assembly, drawing, report, layout, or
manufacturing model. However, the object that you use for the markup is
read-only, which means that you cannot make any changes to your part or
drawing while in Markup mode. You can only indicate the changes that
you need to make.
To create a markup, you must select an object and then specify a name for
the markup. The default name is your login name. The system creates the
file and attaches a .MRK extension to it to signify that it is a markup. You
NOTES
can then set up the markup by specifying the color, text height, and line
width to use for the markup entities.
After setting up the markup, you can create notes and sketched entities
(sketch, curve, arrow, or line) on the markup, as well as modify, move, or
delete entities. If your drawing contains multiple sheets, you can mark up
all of the sheets at the same time and in the same markup. You do not have
to have a separate markup for each sheet.
Saving and Viewing a Markup

When you save a markup, Pro/ENGINEER saves the specified markup
only; you must save other markups separately. It saves all of the sketched
entities and notes with the markup file, not the object. Because the object
does not change, the system does not save it with the markup.
Retrieving Markups
When you retrieve a drawing that has an associated markup,
Pro/ENGINEER does not inform you that a markup exists for it because it
considers the drawing to be independent of the markup. Therefore, you
may want to implement a notification system for your users using email,
voice mail, memos, or a database manager.
When you retrieve a specific markup, Pro/ENGINEER lists the markup

name with the related model in brackets; then it automatically retrieves the
related model and the markup. You can then toggle between different
markups for that model without having to open each individually.
Naming Conventions
Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically create a new version of a markup
when you create a new version of the associated drawing. Therefore, you
may want to create a new markup with each version of your drawing to
maintain current markups.
OVERLAYS
Using overlays, you can superimpose the image of one drawing on top of
another to view changes among the source drawing, the drawing in which
you created the overlay, and a target drawing. This is a useful tool for
viewing the differences between family table drawings in which you have
replaced the views from one instance with another. An overlaid view
M a rku p M o d e l Pag e 2 1- 3
NOTES
contains all detail items from the source drawing, and it automatically
updates to reflect any changes.
When using overlays, keep in mind the following:
• Overlays are read-only in the target drawing.

• You cannot select an overlay for any drawing operation in the target
drawing.
• If the size of the target drawing sheet is different from that of the
source drawing, they both consume the same graphics area. The
system rescales the model from one size to another.
• You can place overlays from multiple drawings on individual sheets
that contain no detailing that was originally in the target drawing. This
allows you to create a master target drawing with multiple sheets
composed of overlays of the source drawings.
NOTES
Goal
To create markups for a drawing.
Method
In this exercise, you create two markups for the plunger body drawing.
The first markup specifies the removal of the triangular symbol and
modification of the detailed view scales. The second markup specifies the
modification of the scale of the 3-D view.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Markup on a Drawing

Task 1. Create a new markup for the plunger body drawing. Sketch a
circle and an arrow around the triangular symbol
1. Create a new markup for the plunger body drawing. Click File >
New > Markup . Type [CHANGE_A] as the name and click OK .
2. Open PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
Note:
If you did not finish the previous version of the plunger body
drawing, retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.DRW.
3. Define the settings for the first markup. Change the color, the text
height, and the line width. Click Setup > Color > Green. Click
Text Height and type [.3]. Click Line Width and type [.1].
4. Sketch a freehand circle around the triangular symbol in the lower

left view on Sheet 1. Click Sketch and drag the mouse while
pressing the left mouse button. To finish the sketch, release the left
mouse button.
5. Create an arrow pointing to the freehand sketch that you just

created. Click Arrow and press the left mouse button to specify the
position of the arrowhead. Move the mouse to another position and
press the left mouse button to create the other end of the arrow.
NOTES
Task 2. Create a note specifying the removal of the symbol from the
drawing. In addition, create a note and two arrows specifying a change in
the scale of the detailed views.
1. Click Note and pick near the end of the arrow for the location of
the note.
2. Type [REMOVE THIS SYMBOL] as the first line of the note and
type [FROM THE DRAWING] as the second line of the note.
3. Press <ENTER> on a blank line to finish the note, as shown in

Figure 2.
Tips & Techniques:

To reposition items, use the Move option.
Figure 2: Remove Symbol
4. Switch to Sheet 2 to add more geometry to this markup. Click

Setup > Switch Sht > Next until Sheet 2 appears.
5. Create a note between the two detailed views to specify the

adjustment of the scales. Locate the note between the detailed
views.
6. Type [CHANGE THE SCALE] as the first line of the note, [FOR
THESE VIEWS] as the second line, and [TO 5.00] as the third
line.
NOTES
7. Create arrows pointing from the note to DETAIL 1 and DETAIL 2,

Figure 3: Change Scales
8. Save this markup.
9. Click Done/Return to finish this markup.
Task 3. Create a new markup that specifies a modification of the scale

for the 3-D view, then change the line width and text style.
1. Click New from the ENTER MARKUP menu. Type [CHANGE_B]

as the name of the markup.
2. Switch sheets to Sheet 1 of the drawing.
3. Create a curve surrounding the 3-D view on Sheet 1. Click Curve ,

then pick points through which the curve should pass (see
Figure 4). Click the middle mouse button to finish.
4. Create an arrow pointing to the curve that you just created.
5. Create a note at the end of the arrow. Type [CHANGE THE SCALE]
as the first line of the note and [TO 1.25] as the second line of the
note, as shown in Figure 4.
NOTES
Figure 4: Change View Scale
6. Change the line width of the curve and the arrow that you just
created. Click Modify > Line Width , pick the curve and the arrow,
and click Done Sel . Type [.05] as the new line width.
7. Click Setup > Color > Cyan to change the color of the new
markup to light blue.
8. Change the justification of the note text and increase the text
height. Click Modify > Note > Text Style . Pick both lines of the
note and click Done Sel .
9. Type [.25] for the HEIGHT and click Center from the JUSTIFY
HORIZ drop-down list.
10. Click Apply > Close .
11. Save this markup and close the window.
Task 4. Retrieve the markup for the plunger body drawing and display
both markups simultaneously.
1. Open the markup CHANGE_A.MRK. At this point, only markup

CHANGE_A should appear on the drawing.
2. Display the markups for CHANGE_A and CHANGE_B

simultaneously. Click Setup > Show > CHANGE_B . The markup
CHANGE_B should now appear also.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a markup of a drawing.

• You can display more than one markup simultaneously.
• You can overlay a drawing on top of another.
Appendix
Creating ISO-Standard Drawings

In this module, you learn how to create a drawing that conforms to
ISO standards.
Objectives
• Use the configuration file and drawing setup options to create an

ISO standard drawing.
• Create tolerance tables at the part and drawing levels.
• Create ISO standard surface finish symbols.
Page A-1
NOTES
CONFIGURATION FILES AND DRAWING SETUP

FILES
Configuration file options affect all modes in Pro/ENGINEER globally,
while drawing setup file options set drawing parameters that are unique to
every drawing. You must modify both files to create a correct drawing in
accordance with the ISO/DIN standard.
Using Configuration File Options to Create ISO-

Standard Drawings
By setting configuration file options in Drawing mode, you can display
chamfer dimensions and reference dimensions in accordance with the ISO
standard, as well as show 3-D views in an isometric or dimetric projection.
Displaying Chamfer Dimensions

Using the configuration file option chamfer_45deg_dim_text, you
can control the format of the 45-degree chamfer dimension in any mode. If
you change the default value ASME/ANSI to ISO/DIN, you can display
chamfer dimensions according to the ISO standard, as shown in Figure 1.
ASME/ANSI ISO/DIN
Figure 1: Chamfer_45deg_dim_text
Showing Reference Dimensions in Parentheses

Using the configuration file option parenthesize_ref_dim, you can
show reference dimensions in parentheses in accordance with the ISO
standard to distinguish them from other dimensions. If you set the value to
yes, the system encloses reference dimensions in parentheses.
Pag e A- 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
Showing 3-D Views in Drawing Mode in an Isometric or

Dimetric Projection
Using the configuration file options orientation, y_angle, and
x_angle, you can display 3-D views in Drawing mode in an isometric
projection or dimetric projection. To create either view type, set the value
of orientation to user_def to add the option User_Def to the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box, in addition to Trimetric and Isometric . For
the isometric view, set y_angle to -30, and x_angle to 30. For the
dimetric view, set y_angle to -42, and x_angle to 7.
Using Drawing Setup File (.dtl) Options to Create

ISO-Standard Drawings
By setting drawing setup file options, you can create ISO-standard
drawings. Table 1 lists the available drawing setup file options according
to their function. The first column gives the name of the option, while the
second column specifies the value.
Append ix A Pag e A- 3
NOTES
Table 1: Drawing Setup File Options for ISO-Standard

Drawings
OPTION NAME OPTION VALUE
Options controlling views and their annotations:
half_view_line symmetry
detail_circle_line_style phantomfont
projection_type first_angle
view_note std_iso
view_scale_format ratio_colon
Options controlling cross-sections and their arrows:
crossec_arrow_style head_online
crossec_arrow_place above_tail
cutting_line std_iso
cutting_line_segment 10
Options controlling solids shown in views:
hlr_for_threads yes
thread_standard std_iso
Options controlling leaders:
draw_arrow_style filled
Options controlling gtol information:
gtol_datums std_iso_jis
new_iso_set_datums yes
Options controlling dimensions:
angdim_text_orientation parallel_fully_outside
chamfer_45deg_leader_style std_iso or std_din
iso_ordinate_delta yes
lead_trail_zero std_metric
ord_dim_standard std_iso
text_orientation parallel
tol_text_height_factor 0.6
tol_text_width_factor 0.6
Miscellaneous options:
decimal_marker comma
line_style_standard std_iso
weld_symbol_standard std_iso
NOTES
TOLERANCE TABLES
You can create dimensional tolerances using a set of tolerance tables that
the system assigns to each model in either the ANSI or ISO standard.
Pro/ENGINEER assigns the ANSI tolerances based on the nominal
dimension’s number of digits. However, tolerance tables drive the ISO-
standard tolerances.
Using Tolerance Tables for ISO Standards

The system loads tolerance tables into the part file when you create an
ISO-standard model if you have set the configuration file option
tolerance_standard to ISO (the default is ANSI). However, you
can also switch the tolerance standard from ANSI to ISO using the Tol
Setup option in Part mode, Assembly mode, or Drawing mode. Since the
tables determine how the model regenerates, the system stores them
permanently with the model and controls only the driving dimensions.
In general, four types of tolerance tables are available. The General

Dimension and Broken Edge tolerance table exist just once for every model.
However, you can have several different holes and shafts tables per model.
When you create a dimension, the system assigns it automatically to the
General table. You can switch the tolerance table reference of the
dimension to any other table using Modify, DimCosmetics, Assign Tol .
You can also display or change the tolerance table as illustrated in Table 2.
Table 2: Tolerance Tables

Parameter Value
TABLE_TYPE GENERAL_DIMS or BROKEN_EDGES
TABLE_NAME DEFAULTS
TABLE_UNIT MILLIMETER
RANGE_UNIT MILLIMETER
DESCRIPTION 0.5 - 3 3-6

FINE 0.05 0.05
MEDIUM 0.1 0.1
COARSE 0.2 0.3
VERY COARSE - 0.5
NOTES
Each ISO-standard model also needs an extra attribute called the model
class, which determines the general coarseness of the model (fine,
medium, coarse, or very coarse), as shown in Table 2. The system uses the
tolerance class in conjunction with the dimension value when retrieving
tolerances for General or Broken Edge dimensions. The configuration file
option tolerance_class sets the default tolerance class for ISO
models.
After you load a new table, the system assigns the new dimension
tolerances and you can regenerate the model. If you modify a dimension
tolerance, it deletes the tolerance table reference for that dimension and
the tolerance value remains the same until you modify it again or reassign
the tolerance table. The configuration file option
tolerance_table_dir sets the default directory for a user-defined
tolerance table.
Displaying Dimensions Driven by Holes or Shafts Tables

All holes and shafts tables overwrite existing tables. Figure 2 illustrates
how Pro/ENGINEER displays dimensions in ISO models, which are
driven by holes or shafts tables.
Figure 2: Display of Dimensions with Tolerances
When changing the tolerance table reference, keep in mind the following:
• If a holes or shafts tolerance table drives a dimension’s tolerances, you

cannot show it in a plus-minus symmetric format. The system assumes
that the General and Broken Edge tables have symmetric values.
• If a dimension value falls outside the ranges specified in the table, the
system uses the closest range to obtain tolerances.
• If you place a dimension tolerance in a family table, the system deletes
its tolerance table reference. Also, if you switch a model from ANSI to
ISO, or vice versa, it preserves the tolerances in the family tables and
does not assign a table reference to those dimensions.
NOTES
ISO SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS

To create an ISO-standard surface finish symbol, you must place an
instance of a symbol using a generic ISO surface finish symbol consisting
of building blocks, or groups. Table 3 presents a brief overview of groups
that you can use to create an ISO surface finish symbol (group names are
in bold print).
Table 3: ISO Surface Finish Symbol Groups

GROUPS DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION
UNSPECIFIED Surface can be produced by
any method.
LEADER Used to create a symbol
leader.
MACHINED Material removal by

machining is required.
NO_REMOVAL Material removal prohibited.
LAY Designates the direction of lay:

PARALLEL - Approximately
parallel to the line representing
the surface to which the
symbol is applied.
PERP - Approximately
perpendicular to the line
representing the surface to
which the symbol is applied.
ANGULAR - Angular in both
directions to the line
representing the surface to
which the symbol is applied.
MULTI_DIR - Multi-
directional.
CIRCULAR - Approximately
circular relative to the center
of the surface to which the
symbol is applied.
RADIAL - Approximately
radial to the center of the
surface to which the symbol is
applied.
NON_DIR - Nondirectional,
or protuberant.
ROUGHNESS Indicates permissible
NOTES
GROUPS DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION

roughness range (micrometers
or inches):
AVERAGE - Roughness
average.
MAX_MIN - Maximum and
minimum roughness average
values.
REMOVAL Material removal by
ALLOW machining that is required to
produce the surface
(millimeters or inches).
SAMPLE_LEG Roughness sampling length or
cutoff rating (millimeters or
inches).
OTHER_ROUGH Text used for specifying other
roughness.
PROD_METHOD Text used for specifying
production method.
NOTES
Goal
To create a drawing to ISO standards.
Method
In this exercise, you create a drawing that follows the ISO standard by
changing the drawing setup file and defining ISO tolerance tables for hole
or shaft dimensions.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing in Accordance

with the ISO Standard
Task 1. Retrieve the ISO_DRAWING.PRT in Part mode as shown in
Figure 3, and obtain information about how the part was created.
Figure 3: Part with Tolerances
1. Turn on the tolerance display using the ENVIRONMENT dialog

box.
2. Check the dimensions of the first protrusion. Click Modify and

select PROTRUSION ID 9 from the MODEL TREE.
3. Continue to use modify to check the dimensions of hole id 465.

Notice that the diameter dimension is displayed in plus/minus
format.
NOTES
4. Check the remaining features using the MODEL TREE.
Task 2. The cover part, as shown in Figure 3, was created with metric
dimensions and the four dimensions shown were changed from Nominal
to the Plus-Minus format. Change the tolerance standard from ANSI to
ISO. Since the cover will hold bearings, you will change additional
dimensions to display a tolerance.
1. Click Utilities > Preference to change the configuration file.
2. Add the configuration file options.

OPTION VALUE
CHAMFER_45DEG_DIM_TEXT ISO/DIN
ORIENTATION USER_DEFAULT
Y_ANGLE -42
X_ANGLE 7
3. Save the file and name it [ISO_CONFIG]. Apply the changes and
close the PREFERENCES dialog box.
4. Change the tolerance standard to ISO. Click Set Up > Tol Setup >
> Standard > ISO/DIN . Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.
5. Assign the model to a tolerance class. This part is used in an

engine, and the general coarseness is medium. Click Model Class
> MEDIUM . Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.
6. The dimensions that had their tolerances displayed have been

added to the General tolerance table. To view the values inside the
table, click Tol Tables > Show > General Dims . Click File > Exit
to close the table.
7. Tolerance two of these four dimensions to a specific hole tolerance

table. Click Tol Tables > Retrieve , select the TOLERANCE
TABLE DIRECTORY from the LOOK IN drop-down list and select
HOLE_J.
8. Click Open . Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.
9. Repeat step 7 to apply a shaft tolerance table SHAFT_H to the

model. Click Done/Return > Done to return to PART menu.
10. Assign the ∅50 dimensions of the bearing to the J6 hole tolerance
table. Click Modify > DimCosmetics > AssignTol > Holes and
type [j6] in the message area.
Pag e A- 1 0 Fundament als of D ra wing

NOTES
11. Select HOLE ID465 and HOLE ID 520 from the MODEL TREE to
show the dimensions. Pick the two ∅50 dimensions as shown in
Figure 4. Click Done from the MODIFY menu.
Figure 4: Changing the Two Diameter Dimensions
12. Save the changes.
Task 3. Open the ISO_DRAWING, start the conversion to an ISO

standard drawing, and change the drawing setup file in accordance with an
ISO standard.
1. Open the file ISO_DRAWING.DRW.
2. Modify the existing drawing setup file to reflect the values shown
in Table 4.
Tip!
Set the SORT option to As Set to have the options displayed
as listed in Table 4.
Table 4: Changing the Drawing Setup File to the ISO Standard

drawing_text_height 3.5
text_thickness 0.35
detail_circle_line_style PHANTOMFONT
projection_type FIRST_ANGLE
NOTES
view_note STD_ISO
view_scale_format RATIO_COLON
crossec_arrow_length 6
crossec_arrow_style HEAD_ONLINE
crossec_arrow_width 3.5
crossec_text_place ABOVE_TAIL
cutting_line STD_ISO
cutting_line_segment 10
hlr_for_threads YES
thread_standard STD_ISO
angdim_text_orientation PARALLEL_FULLY_OUTSIDE
chamfer_45deg_leader_style STD_DIN
dim_leader_length 5
dim_text_gap 1.2
iso_ordinate_delta YES
lead_trail_zeros STD_METRIC
ord_dim_standard STD_ISO
text_orientation PARALLEL
tol_display YES
tol_text_height_factor 0.6
tol_text_width_factor 0.6
witness_line_delta 1.0
witness_line_offset 1.5
draw_arrow_length 3.5
draw_arrow_style FILLED
draw_arrow_width 1.5
draw_attach_sym_height DEFAULT
draw_attach_sym_width DEFAULT
draw_dot_diameter 1.0
leader_elbow_length 6
axis_line_offset 4
circle_axis_offset 4
radial_pattern_axis_circle YES
gtol_datums STD_ISO_JIS
decimal_marker COMMA
drawing_units MM
3. Apply the changes then save a copy of the drawing setup file. Type
[ISO] for the name.
4. Repaint the screen and notice the changes. Close the

PREFERENCES dialog box.
Task 4. Note that the projected view (the one with the cross section) did
not update. You can change the view orientation by changing the view
type.
1. Click Views> Modify View> View Type to modify the view type.
Pick the VIEW RIGHT_2 projected view.
2. Click General> Done to define the type as general.

NOTES
3. Click Done from the MENU MANAGER to leave the existing cross
section definition.
4. Modify the view type again. Click View Type . Pick the VIEW
RIGHT_2 projected view again.
5. Click Projection> Done to set the view type back to projected.
6. Press <Enter> to allow the system to reorient the detail view.
7. Click Done from the MENU MANAGER to leave the existing cross
section definition.
8. Resolve the conflict in the views’ parent. Select the general view to
the left of the view you are changing.
Task 5. The cut direction for the cross section is defined by the views
initial orientation. Change the orientation for the cross section view so that
it is correct.
1. Click X-Section> Flip and pick the projected views cross-hatching

to redisplay the cross section by modifying it.
2. Return to top level menu. Click Done/Return .
Task 6. Some of the notes on the drawing do not comply with ISO
standards. Change the notes to meet compliance.
1. Modify some of the notes on the drawing. Select Modify> Text >
Text Line , then pick DETAIL C. Type [{0:&view_name}] in the
message area.
2. Blank the words SECTION A-A using a layer. Click View>

Layers . Click , type [Note] for layer name and click OK .
3. Associate the note to the layer. Click Item and Add . Select 2D
ITEMS. Then pick the note SECTION A-A and click Done Sel and
Done/Return .
4. Change the display of the layer. Select the NOTE layer from the
list then click . Click Save Status > Close .
NOTES
Task 7. Set the dimension offsets to be correct according to ISO

standards.
1. Click Create > Snap Line > Att View and pick the four cyan
edges in the projection view.
2. Click Done Sel to create snap lines in the projected view to control
the position of the dimensions.
3. Type [10] as the distance of the first snap line, type [5] as the
number of snap lines, and type [8] as the distance between snap
lines.
5. Move the dimension to snap. Click Move and move the dimensions
so that they appear as in Figure 5.
6. Click Delete, pick the extra snap lines to remove, and click Done
Sel to delete extra snap lines that you did not use.
Task 8. Add the number of holes to the 60 degree angular dimension as

parametric information.
1. Add the pattern parameter of six holes to the 60.0 dimension. Click
Modify > Dimension , pick the 60.0 dimension, and click Done
Sel .
2. Click Dim Text and type [&p0 X] in the PREFIX text box. Click
OK > Done/Return .
3. Erase the 6 holes note. Click Show/Erase . Click Erase >

and pick 6 HOLES. Close the dialog box. The drawing should
appear as shown in Figure 5.

NOTES
Figure 5: Completely Dimensioned Drawing
Task 9. Change tolerances and the number of decimal places in

Drawing mode.
1. Click Modify > Num Digits , then type [3]. Click Pick Many and
create a box around the entire drawing.
2. Click Done Sel .
3. Apply the tolerance table to the diameter dimension. Click

Dimension, pick the ∅130 dimension, and click Done Sel .
4. Select SHAFT from the Tolerance table list. Select H and 6 from
the TABLE NAME drop down menus.
5. Select LIMITS from the TOLERANCE MODE drop down list then
select OK to view the exact values of the dimension.
6. Change the tolerance format of the two ∅50 dimensions. Click

Modify > Dimension , pick the two ∅50 dimensions, and click
Done Sel .
7. For the Tolerance mode, select Limits to show the exact values in
parentheses. Close the dialog box by selecting OK .
NOTES
9. Finish the clean up of the dimensions. Click Move to reposition the

snap lines and dimensions so that they do not intersect, as shown in
Figure 6.
Figure 6: Drawing with Tolerances
Task 10. Place surface finish symbols on the drawing according to the
ISO standard.
1. Click Create > Symbol > Instance to create ISO-standard surface

finish symbols.
2. On the PLACEMENT tab, click Retrieve to retrieve a pre-defined

instance. Click System Syms from the LOOK IN drop down list.
3. Double click isosurftext then click isosurftext.sym > Open . The

symbol definition is now ISOSURFTEXT.
4. In the HEIGHT box, type [15].
5. From the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED drop down list, select

WITH LEADERS, then pick the lower attachment of the two surface
finish symbols as shown in Figure 7. Click Done Sel .

NOTES
6. Use Move to move the symbol to a different location, if necessary.
Figure 7: Surface Finish in the Drawing
7. Use the pro-defined groups to change the symbol. Click Grouping

and select MACHINED > ROUGHNESS > AVERAGE >
PROD_METHOD , and LEADER .
8. Define the values for the symbol. Click Var Text . Type [0,8]
under AVER_ROUGHNESS. Type [grind] as the
PROD_METHOD.
9. Click New Inst to create another surface finish symbol without

closing the dialog box.
10. Define the attachment for the next symbol. Click Placement and
then select PLACE INST from the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED
area of the dialog box.
11. Pick the upper attachment of the two surface finish symbols as
shown in Figure 7, then click Done Sel .
12. Move the symbol to the location shown if necessary.
13. Add a third surface finish as the global finish. Select NEW INST
from the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box.
NOTES
14. Type [30] to change the height of the symbol.
15. Define a free placement. Select FREE NOTE from the

PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED drop down list. Pick in the lower
right corner, as shown in Figure 7.
16. Move the note if necessary.
17. Remove the production method and leader group options. Click
Grouping and clear the PROD_METHOD and LEADER check
boxes.
18. Click New Inst from the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box to add
the last surface finish as the global finish.
19. Click Placement > Place Inst to place as a free note. Pick in the
lower right corner, next to the previous symbol, as shown in
Figure 7.
20. Change the average roughness to 3,2. Click Var Text and change
the aver_roughness value of [3,2 ].
21. Click OK > Done/Return to finish the symbols.
22. Clean up the symbol leaders. Create a jog on the two surface finish
symbols with leaders, as shown in Figure 7.
Task 11. The configuration file settings effected the display of the
chamfer dimension. Change the dimensional text of the chamfer
dimension to reflect ISO standards.
1. Move the chamfer dimension. Click Move and pick the 1 X 45°
dimension. Move it to the other side of the projected view.
2. Click Modify > Dimension , pick the 1 X 45° dimension, and click
Done Sel . Click Dim Text , then type [{2:2 REQ’D}] in the
DIMENSION TEXT area as a second line. Click OK .
Task 12. Create a perpendicular gtol placed on the two axes of the
bearing holes, in accordance with the ISO standard.
Note:
For the following section you will need the axes tags
displayed. If they are not, Click Utilities, Environment then
select DISP AXIS from the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, then
click OK .

NOTES
1. Start changing the display of axis A_19. Click Modify >

Datum/Axis and pick axis A_19.
2. In the AXIS dialog box type [A] as the name.
3. Set the axis to be used for a geometric tolerance reference. Click

>OK .
4. Change the display of axis A_20. Repeat the above steps and type
[B ] for the name. Click Done/Return to return to the top level
menu.
5. Move the set tags to the left of the view so that they snap to the
first snap line. Use Move to arrange the drawing as shown in
Figure 8.
Note:
You may also need to move the axis so that they extend to the
location of the tag.
NOTES
Figure 8: Drawing with Gtols
6. Start the creation of a perpendicular gtol. Click Create > Geom

Tol > Specify Tol . In the GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE dialog box,
click .
7. Define axis A_1 as the reference. Select AXIS from the TYPE
drop-down list in the REFERENCE: TO BE SELECTED area.
8. Click Select Entity and pick axis A_1 located at the center of the
model.
9. Define the placement using a leader associated to the upper arrow

of the 130 diameter dimension. From the PLACEMENT: TO BE
PLACED area select NORMAL LDR from the drop-down list.
10. Using Query Sel , pick the upper arrow of the ∅130 dimension.
Place the gtol as shown in Figure 8.

NOTES
11. Specify the datum references as the A and B axis. Click Datum
Refs . Specify the datum references on the primary tab. select A
from the BASIC drop-down list. Select B from the COMPOUND
drop-down list.
12. Click Tol Value and type [0.005] in the OVERALL TOLERANCE
text box to define the tolerance value as .005.
13. Show the diameter symbol in the gtol. Click Symbols and click
the ∅ Diameter Symbol check box.
14. If necessary, use Move or Move Text to change the position of the
gtol. Select OK to finish the placement.
15. Save the drawing.
16. Erase the drawing and all associated object models from memory.
Figure 9: Finished Drawing
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can use configuration file and drawing setup options to create an
ISO standard drawing.
• You can create tolerance tables at the part and drawing levels.
• You can create ISO standard surface finish symbols.

Appendix
Info Bill of Materials Menu

In this module, you learn how to use the Info Menu to incorporate a
Bill of Materials (BOM) report into your drawing, and change the
content and format of the report.
Page B-1
NOTES
PLACING A BOM USING THE INFO MENU

A Bill of Materials (BOM) is a listing of parts and part parameters that are
contained within the current assembly. When creating an assembly
drawing, it is often necessary to include a table showing the BOM. If you
have a license for Pro/REPORT, you can use repeat regions to automate
changes to the BOM, as described in module 17 “Creating a Bill of
Materials,“ of this training guide. However, if you do not have
Pro/REPORT, you can create a BOM file in Assembly mode or Drawing
mode using the INFO menu, and then add it to your drawing by entering it
as a note from a file. To format or arrange the information in the BOM,
you must use the system editor.
When you create a BOM in Assembly mode, you can choose which level
of the model that you want to show in the BOM. Using the BOM dialog
box, you can specify the entire assembly or select an individual
subassembly (Figure 1). In addition, you can specify whether to include
skeleton models or components that have not been fully placed in the
assembly.
Figure 1: Bill of Materials
Pag e B- 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
Note:
A BOM that you add to a drawing is not associated with the
BOM file that you used to create the note. If the composition
of the assembly changes, you must create a new BOM and add
it to the drawing as a new note. You can fully edit the BOM
displayed on the drawing as a note without affecting the
original BOM file.
Manipulating the Format of a BOM Report

When you create a BOM using the INFO menu, Pro/ENGINEER uses a
default format to display the information. You can reconfigure this format
to display information in accordance with your company standard by
setting the configuration file option bom_format. If you specify a user-
defined format file as the value for this option in the configuration file, the
system displays BOMs in your drawings using your customized format.
Dividing a BOM into Sections

When you create a user-defined BOM, you can list the members of each
subassembly, as well as the total quantity of each part in the assembly, by
creating two separate sections within the format file:
• To list the members of each subassembly separately, with a heading

for each assembly breakdown, you can enter the .breakdown
command within the format file.
• To create a shopping list of all of the parts needed to build the
assembly, with a heading for each assembly breakdown, you can use
the .summary file.
You can include one or both sections, but you must specify the column
titles, row content, and display format for each section that you include.
Specifying Information and Format

The user-defined format file contains a combination of text and formatting
commands.
Info Bil l of Mate rial s M enu Pag e B-3

NOTES
• Specifying Information – Within each section, you can use the

following commands to specify information:
½ .title – Specifies the title of each column. The title line starts with
this command and then shows the titles as specified, separating
each column title with a semi-colon.
½ .row – Specifies the information to display in the repeating rows of

the BOM. Pro/ENGINEER prints text that is not part of a
parameter name as it appears. For example, to print a dollar sign
before the user-defined attribute price, enter [$%price]. Within
each row, you can use the following parameters:
½ %$name – Inserts the name of the part or subassembly.
½ %$type – Inserts the type of a model (assembly, subassembly, or

part).
½ %$quantity – Inserts the number of times a specific part or

subassembly is used in the assembly.
½ %xxx – Inserts any user-defined parameter associated with the

current part or subassembly, where xxx is the name of the
parameter.
• Specifying format – You can add format specifiers to control the

column width, justification, and number of decimal places. The system
encloses three types of format specifiers in brackets as combinations of
numbers and letters.
• String – A string format specifier is composed of two numbers and a
letter. The first number specifies the width of the column, the number
following the decimal point truncates the string at a specific character,
and the letter signifies the parameter type. For example, a string
specifier of [6.6s] specifies the column width as 6, the maximum
length of the string as 6 characters, and the parameter as a string (such
as Precis instead of Precision).
• Integer– An integer specifier is composed of a number and a letter.
The number specifies the column width, and the letter specifies the
parameter type. For example, an integer specifier of [3d] specifies the
column width as 3 and the parameter as an integer (such as 8).
• Floating Point – A floating point format specifier is composed of two
numbers and a letter. The first number specifies the width of the
column, the number following the decimal point controls the number
of decimal places, and the letter signifies the parameter type (“f”
NOTES
stands for floating point). For example, a floating point specifier of

[6.2f] specifies the column width as 6, the number of decimal places as
2, and the parameter as a floating point (such as 400.25).
Tips & Techniques

To left-justify the text for a field in each row, enter a minus
sign before the number. Example: [-4s].
Calculating a Total Value

To calculate a total value such as cost or quantity, you can use the $total()
command. The system calculates the total value for the parameter included
inside the parenthesis. For example, $total(cost) would calculate the total
cost of the components in the assembly.
Example of a BOM Report

Figure 2 shows an example of a customized BOM format file, and
Figure 3 shows the output from this file.
Figure 2: BOM Format
Info Bil l of Mate rial s M enu Pag e B-5

NOTES
Figure 3: BOM Output
Appendix
Sketcher Basics
Previously, you have learned that Pick and Place features allow for
very fast creation of features such as holes and rounds whose
geometry is easily understood as part of standard engineering
operations. For any geometry that involves the definition of more
complex, individual shapes, you will actually sketch them.
To enable this, Pro/ENGINEER provides a Sketcher mode and
includes a built-in Intent Manager to help you capture design intent.
This module starts with the basics of the Sketcher mode.
Objectives
• Describe the functions and tools in the Sketcher mode.

• Explain how Sketcher dimensioning scheme allows you to capture
design intent.
• Create geometry including lines, centerlines, arcs, circles,
rectangles and sketched points.
• Apply geometrical constraints to sketched entities, such as the
equal lengths constraint and the perpendicular constraint.
• Employ geometry tools and section tools to change section
sketches.
Page C-1
NOTES
THE SKETCHER ENVIRONMENT

The Sketcher Interface
The Sketcher interface consists of:
• A menu bar with the usual Pro/ENGINEER pull-down menus and two
additional Sketcher-specific menus—EDIT and SKETCH.
• A standard Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
• An additional Sketcher toolbar, which displays specific Sketcher
functionality such as Undo , Dimensions On/Off , and Grid On/Off .
• A message area below the toolbars.
• An Intent Manager with fly-out icons on the right to perform
frequently used actions.
• An additional Sketcher-specific message area at the bottom left of the
window describing Intent Manager’s fly-out icons.
Figure 1: Sketcher Interface
Pag e C- 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
• The color red is used to highlight and select entities. This provides
accurate and easily identifiable entities selections.
• Using the mouse, you can select individual or multiple-specific
sketched entities, or all entities that fall within a swept box.
Intent Manager
• The Intent Manager with fly-out icons appears automatically on the
right side of the screen when you enter the Sketcher mode.
• These icons are logically grouped together, based on capability.
Default cursor to
pick entities
Icons to create
different kinds of
geometry
To create dimensions
To modify dimensions
To impose constraints
To trim Entities
Figure 2: Intent Manager’s Fly-Out Icons
• With fly-out icons, you can access the most frequently used sketching
tools with a single click without having to go to pull-down menus.
Append ix C Pag e C- 3
NOTES
Pop-Up Menus
• Additional pop-up menus can be accessed by right clicking in Sketcher
mode.
• These pop-up menus aid ease-of-use.
• They offer short-cut methods for sketching, modifying, dimensioning,
deleting, and undoing steps.
Figure 3: A Typical Sketcher Pop-Up Menu
NOTES
SKETCHER MODE FUNCTIONALITY

Sketcher Menus
• EDIT and SKETCH are two top-level menus specific to the Sketcher
mode.
• They contain all the commands needed in the sketching environment.
They are shown below.
Figure 4: Edit and Sketch Menus
• In addition, all Intent Manager commands are available through these

menus.
• You can insert Text into the Sketching area using the Text option in
the SKETCH menu.
• With the new EDIT menu, you can manipulate your sketched geometry
with the Modify, Move , Trim , Toggle Construction , and Toggle
Lock commands.
NOTES
Specifying References
One of the first things you will be prompted for after beginning a sketch in
the Sketcher mode will be to specify references of the section you are
about to sketch.
You will need to provide references when you:
• Create a new feature.

• Redefine a feature with missing or insufficient references.
• Provide insufficient references to place a section.
It is good practice to reference before sketching. This provides the
sketched entities a location to automatically align to and dimension from.
Note:
The references that you select for a section create Parent/Child
relationships.
Creating Geometry
Sketcher mode enables the creation of a variety of geometrical shapes and
entities. The basic ones—lines, arcs, and circles—are discussed below.
Lines
Figure 5: Lines Fly-Out Icons
Using the Line fly-out icons in the Intent Manager, you can create two
types of sketched lines—straight lines from point to point or centerlines
for referencing or constraining entities.
Arcs
Figure 6: Arcs Fly-Out Icons
NOTES
Using the Arcs fly-out icons in the Intent Manager, you can create four
types of arcs. You can create:
• An arc by 3 points or tangent to an entity at its endpoint.

• A concentric arc.
• An arc by picking its center and endpoints.
• A conic arc.
Circles
Figure 7: Circle Fly-Out Icons
Using the Circle fly-out icons in the Intent Manager, you can create three
types of circles. You can create:
• A circle by picking the center and a point on the circle.

• A concentric circle.
• A full ellipse.
Sketched circle
Concentric to this
edge
Figure 8: Sketching a Concentric Circle to an Edge
NOTES
Dimensioning
After completing a sketch, you must dimension it. To place dimensions in
Sketcher, pick the entity with the left mouse button and place the
dimension with the middle-mouse button.
The following figure illustrates the simple dimensioning of a rectangle.
Figure 9: Creating Dimensions for a Rectangle
• You can grab a dimension and place it at a more convenient position in

the Sketcher at any point during or after sketching.
• An orderly arrangement of dimensions helps visual clarity, particularly
when the sketch gets complex.
Figure 10: Grabbing and Moving Dimensions
NOTES
Modifying Dimensions
• Sketcher makes it easy to modify dimensions of geometric entities at
any time.
• With the MODIFY DIMENSIONS dialog box, shown below, you can
change the dimension values of multiple entities with just a click of the
mouse.
Figure 11: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box
• In addition, you can now double-click on an individual dimension to

change its value.
• The SENSITIVITY scrollbar at the bottom right of the dialog box allows
you to adjust the sensitivity of the control wheels for changing
dimensions dynamically.
• You also have the options to dynamically Regenerate and Lock
Scale the sketch.
NOTES
Constraining
• Sketcher assumes certain constraints for the geometrical entities you
create.
• You are free to impose your own constraints overriding the system’s
default constraints to capture your design intent.
• This can be done easily by accessing the CONSTRAINTS dialog box
shown below.
Figure 12: Sketcher Constraints Dialog Box
You can use constraint options to:
1. Make a line or two vertices vertical.
2. Make two entities tangent.
3. Make two points or vertices symmetrical about a centerline.
4. Make a line or two vertices horizontal.
5. Place a point on the middle of the line.
6. Create equal lengths, equal radii or same curvature constraint.
7. Make two entities perpendicular.
8. Create points, points on entities, or collinear constraint.
9. Make two lines parallel.
Pag e C- 1 0 Fundament als of D ra wing

NOTES
Additional Sketcher Tools

EDGE
The Edge tool has two instances represented by its two fly-out icons in the
Intent Manager, as shown below:
Figure 13: Edge Fly-Out Icons
• Use Edge – Uses an existing model edge to create sketched entities.

Automatically selects that edge as a specified reference.
Figure 14: Using Existing Model Edge to Create Sketched Entities
NOTES
• Offset Edge – Uses existing model edge to create sketched entities at

an offset distance.
Figure 15: Creating Sketched Entities at an Offset Distance
Note:
The Use Edge and Offset Edge options create parent/child
relationships with the referenced feature.
Copy
Copies 2-D draft/imported entities from a drawing. You can dynamically
move and scale a section, making legacy data easier to manipulate. This
functionality can be accessed by clicking Edit > Copy from the menu bar.
Mirror
This tool mirrors sketched entities from one side of a centerline to the
other. This can be accessed by Edit > Mirror.
Move
• Repositions sketched entities. The MOVE ENTITY menu displays the
following options:
• Drag Item – Moves an entity or its vertex to a new location.
½ Drag Many – Translates picked entities within a sketch.
½ Rotate90 – Rotates sketched entities about a specified point by
multiples of 90 degrees.

NOTES
½ Dimension – Repositions a dimension within a sketch.

Trim
This can be accessed by clicking Edit > Trim . Trim shortens (or extends)
an entity in three different ways corresponding to the three fly-out icons
shown below:
Figure 16: Trim Fly-Out Icons
½ The first dynamically trims section entities

½ The second cuts or extends entities to other entities or
geometry.
½ The third divides an entity at the point of selection, replacing
the original with two new entities.
Replace
Replaces a sketched entity from the original section with a newly sketched
entity.
Section Analysis
To obtain information about a particular section within Sketcher, click
Analysis > Section Analysis . This option provides you with information
about
• intersection and tangency points

• angles and distances
• dimensioning references
• entity curvature display
Sketcher Points
½ They force coincidence among sketched entities.
½ Allow slanted dimensions between sketched entity end-points.
NOTES
Figure 17: Midpoint Definition Using Sketcher Point
Figure 18: Defining Theoretical Sharps Using Sketcher Points
SETTING SKETCHER PREFERENCES

You can now modify the Sketcher environment in the new SKETCHER
PREFERENCES dialog box in the UTILITIES menu.

NOTES
Figure 19: Sketcher Preferences Dialog Box
Use the SKETCHER PREFERENCES dialog box to:
• Modify the display options of various sketcher entities.

• Set constraints preferences by enabling or disabling constraints
assumed by Sketcher.
• Set grid, grid spacing, and accuracy parameters.
• Click the Default button to reset the preferences.
Sketching in 3-D
When you select the Use2D Sketcher option from the ENVIRONMENT
dialog box. Sketcher starts in 2-D orientation (that is, with the sketching
plane parallel to the computer screen).
NOTES
Figure 20: The Environment Dialog Box
When you do not select this option, Sketcher starts in 3-D orientation. You
may change the view orientation at any time and sketch in 3-D.

NOTES
SKETCHER PHILOSOPHY
Rules of Thumb
Certain rules of thumb must be rigorously adhered to gain maximum
advantage from the power of the Sketcher mode’s diverse capabilities,
1. Keep sketches simple.

½ This makes the final model flexible and helps regeneration.
2. Use the Undo option.

½ The Undo option restores a sketched section to its prior state.
½ This is extremely useful when sketching features
incrementally.
3. Do not sketch to scale.

½ Firstly, concentrate on getting your geometry straight by
sketching large.
½ Secondly, resolve the sketch by modifying dimensions.
½ This rule is particularly helpful when the sketched entities are
small.
4. Use the grid as an aid.

½ Create lines equal, parallel, or perpendicular.
½ Align sketched entities.
½ Align centers horizontally and vertically.
5. Do not extend the sketch outside of the part.

½ There is no need to sketch sections that extend outside the part,
as is required with some solid modeling packages.
6. Make effective use of Sketcher accuracy.

½ The range for the accuracy is 1.0 e-9 through 1.0 (default).
½ To prevent Sketcher from making constraints, you can increase
Sketcher accuracy by changing it from 1.0 to a lower number.
7. Use open and closed sections appropriately.

½ When sketching an open section, you cannot have more than
one open section per feature.
NOTES
½ If you use an open section, you must explicitly align its open
ends to the part.
½ When in doubt over whether you should use an open or closed
section, you should use a closed one since it is easier to
regenerate, and is less prone to failure.
Example 1
Protrusion B
Example 1
Protrusion A
Example 2
Cut
Figure 21: Open and Closed Sections

NOTES
Goal
By the end of this lab, you will be conversant with basic sketching skills
such as entering sketcher mode, creating straight lines, creating arcs,
applying constraints, dimensioning, and generating solid models.
Method
In Exercise 1, you learn sketching basics.
In Exercise 2, you create a snap ring by sketching in steps.
EXERCISE 1: Sketching Basics
Figure 22: Completed Sketch after Exercise 1
Task 1. Create a new sketch named ROUND_RECTANGLE.
1. Click File > New .
2. In the NEW dialog box, select Sketch .
3. Type [ROUND RECTANGLE].
4. Sketcher mode activates.
NOTES
Task 2. Sketch four lines as shown, the bottom line being horizontal.
Figure 23
Task 3. Apply the constraint to make the lines perpendicular.
1. Click > , then pick two lines to make them perpendicular.
2. Similarly, once again pick the other two lines to make them
perpendicular.

NOTES
Figure 24
3. Close the CONSTRAINTS dialog box.
Task 4. Delete the two vertical lines.
1. With the pointer icon pick the left vertical line.
2. Hold shift and pick the right vertical line.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
Task 5. Sketch a tangent end arc on the left side of the section.
1. Click .
2. Pick the top left vertex and drag the mouse out of the left quadrant
of the circle to get a tangent end arc.
3. Pick the end point to be the bottom left end point, as shown below.
NOTES
Figure 25
Task 6. Repeat the process on the right side of the section.
Figure 26
Task 7. Add the proper dimensions.
1. Click .
2. Pick each arc with the left mouse button, then place the dimension
where you would like it to appear with the middle button.
3. Select Tangent and Horizontal for type and orientation.

NOTES
Figure 27
Task 8. Create a diameter dimension on the left arc.
1. Click .
2. Pick the left arc twice with the left mouse button and place it with
the middle.
Figure 28
NOTES
Task 9. Modify both dimensions.
1. Pick both the horizontal dimension and the diameter dimension

using the <SHIFT> key and click icon.
Figure 29: Modify Dimensions Dialog Box
2. Modify the diameter to [2] and the linear dim to [4].
Figure 30
3. Save and close

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Sketching in Steps
Figure 31: Completed Snap Ring after Exercise 2
Task 1. Create a new sketch called SNAP_RING.
1. Click File > New .
2. Select Sketch .
3. Type [SNAP_RING] as the name of the sketch.
Task 2. Create two offset circles aligned horizontally.
1. Click and draw two circles as shown below.
NOTES
Figure 32
Task 3. Create a rectangle that snaps to the inside circle on both upper
vertices.
Stop cursor here
Delete
Start dynamic
trim here
Figure 33
1. For the rectangle, click . Just click once to start and then click
again to end sketching.
2. Then use the dynamic trim to create intersections. Click , Put

your cursor below the bottom horizontal line and drag it to above
the top horizontal line.

NOTES
3. Then delete the items that you just crossed out. The result is shown
in the figure below.
Figure 34
Task 4. Sketch another rectangle.
1. This time snapping to the outside circle and the bottom of the two
vertical lines as shown below.
2. Make sure not to snap through any of the arc’s vertices.
NOTES
Figure 35
Task 5. Use the dynamic trim to remove the final lines and arc.
1. Click to trim the unwanted entities.
2. The result is shown below.
Figure 36

NOTES
Task 6. Dimension the entities.
1. Click to create the dimensions.
2. Pick each entity with the left mouse button and place the
dimension with the middle mouse button.
3. Click to modify the six dimension values.
Figure 37
4. Save and close.
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Sketching a Hexagon

Task 1. Create a new sketch called HEX.
1. Click File > New . Select Sketch and type [HEX] as the name.
Task 2. Create a sketcher point
1. Click the point button.
2. Place a point in the center of the screen.
Task 3. Add vertical centerlines passing through the Sketcher Point.
1. Click on the centerline button in the line fly-out icons.
2. Create a vertical centerline that passes through the point.
3. Create two additional centerlines that pass through the point at an

angle.
Task 4. Modify the angles to 60°.
1. Modify the angle between centerlines to 60° as shown below.
Figure 38

NOTES
Task 5. Create a circle centered on the point.
1. Pick on the circle to highlight in red.
2. Right-click on the circle.
3. Click Toggle Construction to convert it to a construction circle.
Figure 39
Task 6. Create a hexagon by sketching 6 lines from the intersection

points of the circle and the centerlines.
Figure 40
NOTES
1. Add a diameter dimension to the construction circle and modify it’s

value to [1.0]
2. Save and close.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you learned that:
• The Sketcher interface consists of the main sketcher area, pull-down

menus, toolbars, message areas, the INTENT MANAGER with fly-out
icons, and pop-up menus.
• All geometry has to be sketched, dimensioned, and constrained.
• When sketching, one of the first tasks to be performed is to specify
references.
• You can create lines, arcs, circles, rectangles, splines, and many other
geometrical entities using the Intent Manager.
• The EDIT and SKETCH menus contain most of the tools that are
unique to Sketcher mode such as Copy, Mirror , Move , and Trim .
• System dimensions can be over-ridden and dimensions can always be
modified at any stage of model generation.
• It is possible to over-constrain a model. The system notifies you when
there is a clash of constraints though.
• Sketcher preferences can be set using the SKETCHER PREFERENCES
dialog box.

Notes - Proe Drawing & Sketcher

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Notes - Proe Drawing & Sketcher

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

- For University Use Only -

Commercial Use Prohibited

CREATING VIEWS 2-1

ASSEMBLY AND MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS 3-1

SHOWING DIMENSIONS 5-1

CREATING DIMENSIONS 6-1

TOLERANCES ON DRAWINGS 8-1

DRAWING STANDARDS 9-1

DRAWING TABLES 10-1

COSMETIC FEATURES 11-1

2-D DRAFTING 12-1

USING LAYERS TO CONTROL DRAWING DISPLAY 14-1

RESOLVING REGENERATION PROBLEMS 15-1

DRAWING FORMATS 16-1

CREATING A BILL OF MATERIALS 17-1

FAMILY TABLES 18-1

WORKING WITH LARGE DRAWINGS 19-1

CREATING ISO-STANDARD DRAWINGS A-1

INFO BILL OF MATERIALS MENU B-1

SKETCHER BASICS C-1

PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT D-1

USING PTC.HELP E-1

• Create and modify configuration files.

PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER

Using Drawing Templates

Pag e 1- 2 Fundament als of D ra wing

These drawing templates will typically be created and maintained by a

Using Configuration Files

Pag e 1- 4 Fundament als of D ra wing

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawings

drawing_setup_file filename.dtl Points the system to the

Files Automatically Loaded by the System

• Config.sup in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in which

Editing the Configuration File During a

Pag e 1- 6 Fundament als of D ra wing

Using Drawing Setup Files

Specifying Your Default Drawing Setup File

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options

Pag e 1- 8 Fundament als of D ra wing

EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing

1. Change the working directory to FUND_DRAW_310. Click File >

2. Create a default configuration file for the current session. Click

3. In the OPTION box of the PREFERENCES dialog box, begin

Table 3: Configuration File Options

4. Save the configuration file to a new name. Click , for the

5. Click OK from the PREFERENCES dialog box.

Task 2. Create a new drawing using a drawing template.

1. Change the Working Directory to INTRODUCTION.

2. Click File > New > Drawing .

Figure 2: New Drawing Dialog Box

5. Click OK . The drawing should appear as in Figure 3.

6. Save the drawing.

Pag e 1- 10 Fundament als of D ra wing

Figure 3: The Initial Drawing

- Place four views

- Set the scale of all views to .500

- Set the display of the isometric view to No Hidden

- Set the display of the planar views to Hidden Line

- Place a standard note on the drawing

- Create snap lines offset a predefined distance from the views

- Show the dimensions for the model with a view location

-Locate the dimensions on the snap lines